The fact that the oak tree emerges upon examination to have a mental and subjective source rather than an outward and objective nature, does not in any way alter its apparent reality. It continues to stand proudly before us, and to appear as something distinctly separate from ourselves.
Yet this apparent independent reality is illusory, for what our detailed investigation into the nature of matter has revealed, is that the tree is intrinsically part of ourselves, and is responsive to our every thought and deed.
The universe, of which our oak tree is a part, is a construct of the mind. Being mind-made, it can always be remade.
This priceless jewel of understanding is the culmination of our search into the meaning of manifested form. It is this discovery of the inherent plasticity of our world which allows us to mould it according to our birthright of creative freedom. Yet we remain plagued with doubt.
The idea that the mind can somehow come to influence the objective world that we see and sense around us, seems in complete conflict with our sensory perceptions. For, as one questioner challenged Sri Nisargadatta Maharaj:
QUESTION: “How can the mind be a part of nature?
MAHARAJ: Because nature is in the mind; without the mind where is nature?
QUESTION: If nature is in the mind and the mind is my own, I should be able to control nature, which is not the case. Forces beyond my control determine my behaviour.
MAHARAJ: Develop the witness attitude and you will find in your own experience that detachment brings control. The state of witnessing is full of power, there is nothing passive about it.”5
Not only are the twin worlds of mind and matter intrinsically linked together, but the world of matter always derives its nature and character from the underlying cast of mind. It is the mind which both creates form and then determines the relationships which bind these forms together.
The world is not created according to some divinely ordained set of rules. The entire universe manifests according to that structure of belief which we ourselves impose upon it, and each one of us is free to change that structure as and when we wish.
Every object that exists within time and space can be linked together in any way we choose. That is the message of the mystics.
“The relation between space and objects and between time and events is according to your estimate of them; there is no intrinsic relationship between them.”6
“Whatever propositions are made of logic are no (true) propositions, for they stand in no intrinsic relation to my inner light.”7
Our experiences in life are invariably determined by those patterns of belief which characterise our particular description of the world. We have seen how, in the western world, our experiences are dominated by the scientific description of the universe. Although this scientific overlay of thought normally defines the character of our experiences in the world, we are not bound by this scientific code of thought.
If we choose to vary our description of the world, we will find that our experiences will vary in unison with this new description. If we choose to define the world in a way that is in conflict with the scientific description of the world, we will find that our experiences will equally be in conflict with scientific opinion. We will then discover that we are able to do what science deems impossible.
Evidence of the truth of this assertion surrounds us on every side. Yet we hardly dare to look at it for fear that it should undermine our carefully reasoned state of mind. Perhaps nowhere has this subtle marriage of mind and matter been demonstrated more dramatically in recent years than in the strange saga of “radionics”.
In the early years of the twentieth century, at a time when the Italian physicist Guglielmo Marconi was experimenting with the transmission of long-wave radio signals, a young Californian physician named Albert Abrams made a strange discovery. While he was examining a patient who was suffering from a cancerous growth on his lip, Dr. Abrams found that a particular area of the patient’s abdomen produced a dull sound when struck by his fingers.
What made this discovery even more mysterious was that this dull sound was only detectable when the patient was facing west. Because of the limited direction in which this anomaly occurred, Abrams speculated that he was dealing with an unusual electrical phenomenon, perhaps linked in some way with the earth’s magnetic field.
Intrigued by this curious effect, Abrams conducted numerous tests with other patients who were suffering from other forms of disease. He found that each type of disease was characterised by a similar dull percussive response on a specific part of the abdomen. These results led Abrams to develop an unusual theory about the nature of disease.
Since all matter was then known to be composed of energy, Abrams suggested that all bodily tissue gave off certain “radiations” of a frequency which was specific to the organ concerned, and that these radiations could be monitored by the use of suitable electrical equipment.
To this end Abrams designed a special apparatus which he called an “oscilloclast”, a type of variable electrical resistance-box that he developed in conjunction with a leading expert in radio waves. By varying the resistance of this instrument, Abrams claimed to be able to assign a value in ohms to the emanations given off by various organs, and so identify the radiations associated with each organ.
In this way he developed a catalogue of frequency radiations emanating from all parts of the human body. In experimenting with patients suffering from different diseases, Abrams found that diseased tissue also gave off these subtle radiations, but did so at vibratory rates which differed from those of healthy tissue.
Abrams therefore advanced a novel theory of the treatment of disease. He claimed that diseased tissue could be cured by subjecting it to healing vibrations which were precisely attuned to those radiations which he had found to be compatible with those of healthy tissue. By simply calibrating his oscilloclast to the correct rate of vibration, Abrams claimed to be able to heal diseased tissue.
Treatment involved attaching an electrode to the affected area of the patient’s body, and then applying current to the oscilloscope at the required vibratory rate. In the diagnosis of disease, Abrams later found that it was not even necessary to obtain a sample of diseased tissue, as a single drop of the patient’s blood would do as well.
Although Dr. Abrams was able to support his claims with documented evidence of successful cures, his novel theory of disease incurred the wrath of the medical profession. The formidable voice of the American Medical Association condemned radionics as “based on voodoo” and pronounced it “claptrap invented by quacks for the desperate and the gullible”. 8
Far from eradicating these unusual practices, however, this fusillade of criticism served only to publicise and promote them. One of those who took up the torch of radionics was a young man by the name of Curtis Upton. Although Abrams had confined his practice to the treatment of disease in people, it occurred to Upton that these discoveries might also be used in the treatment of diseases in plants and crops.
With the help of an electronic engineer, Upton designed his own version of an oscilloclast by substituting a radio frequency transmitter. And instead of using the vibratory rates in ohms which Abrams had devised, Upton used samples of certain chemicals and other “reagents”, which he found by trial and error.
Instead of a drop of blood which Abrams had used for diagnostic purposes, Upton took a leaf from the diseased plant and sprinkled on it a quantity of the appropriate chemical or reagent. Although the treated leaf might be many miles away from the diseased plant, Upton found that he was able to cure at a distance by means of his radio transmitter.
Upton found, in fact, that he could use his apparatus in two different ways. He could either stimulate the growth of a plant, in which case he would put a leaf on the input plate of his machine, and switch on the transmitter which had been set to a prescribed frequency that promoted growth. He could also use his machine to remove infestations of beetles or unwanted insects by treating a leaf of the affected plant or crop with an appropriate pattern of radio waves.
Upton found that after these treatments the insects had either been killed or else had moved away from the affected area. He then went on to make an extraordinary discovery. Instead of having to rely on actual leaves from diseased or pest-ridden crops, he found that he was able to treat a large area of crops simply by taking an aerial photograph.
What he did was to mark out a designated area in a field with white sheets. When photographed from the air these white sheets would appear on the photographic negative as black areas. Upton then cut away and burned all parts of the photographic negative which did not need to be treated.
After radionic treatment, he found that only that area marked by white sheets had benefitted. Everything outside this area remained unchanged. So confident was Upton of obtaining beneficial results, that he made it his practice not to charge for his services unless he was successful.
Another person who successfully carried on the ideas of Albert Abrams was Thomas Hieronymus. Hieronymus also adapted Abrams’ oscilloclast to his own ideas, this time utilising vacuum tubes for amplification and condensers for tuning. He applied for a patent for his unusual machine and was granted one by the United States Patent Office in 1949.
In his application for this patent, Hieronymus noted that it was based on the manipulation of energy radiated by known elements of matter. Although he was unable to say precisely what these radiations were, he thought that they were probably of an electrical nature. In 1956, Hieronymus presented a copy of his patent to John Campbell, who was a trained scientist, and editor at that time of Analog magazine.
At the suggestion of his friend Arthur Young, Campbell made a simplified model of the apparatus designed by Hieronymus. But instead of incorporating vacuum tubes and condensers, he merely drew a circuit diagram of the patented machine, with printed symbols in place of the component parts. To his utter amazement, Campbell found that this symbolic design achieved similar practical results to that of the actual apparatus used by Hieronymus!
It is hardly surprising that conventionally trained scientists and physicians found the extravagant claims of radionics impossible to swallow. Not only did they contravene the accepted understanding of physical science, but they also contradicted existing theories of medicine as well. To top it all, they flatly confounded all common sense.
While Abrams claimed to be able to intercept electrical “radiations” given off by human tissue on his oscilloclast, physicists could detect no trace of these radiations on their own sophisticated electrical equipment. Accepted physical theory did not even provide for the existence of such radiations.
Besides, the oscilloclast which Abrams had concocted was a rudimentary piece of electrical equipment which seemed hopelessly inadequate to achieve the type of results which he claimed to have obtained.
The idea that diseased tissue could be cured by means of radio waves was ridiculous enough, but that the diagnosis of such diseased tissue could be made from a single drop of blood seemed patently absurd. The ludicrous nature of the entire rationale of radionics was further compounded when Upton claimed to be able to cure plant diseases and destroy insect pests at a distance by the use of radio waves.
Credibility was strained even more when he claimed that he could eradicate these pests by simply treating an aerial photograph of the plants in question. There seemed little doubt that the entire subject belonged to the nether world of mumbo-jumbo when John Campbell announced to the world that he was able to achieve radionic healing by using a symbolic drawing of Hieronymus’ patented machine.
Because the need for a physical machine in obtaining these cures was seen to be unnecessary, the ideas on which these machines were based now seemed to be effectively demolished.
Yet there was one fact which no amount of medical or scientific contumely could deny, and that was that these methods worked. All of these people were able to achieve genuine results, in spite of their illogical theory and their hopelessly inadequate machines.
It was only much later that investigators into the claims of radionics began to recognise that a subtle interaction was taking place between the minds of the operators concerned and the physical effects associated with them.
This suggested that the weird contraptions invented by various practitioners were in fact incidental to their claims, and that since what was most likely occurring was a direct interaction between mind and matter, the machines themselves were ultimately not needed.
For this reason, the way in which these interactions came to be rationalised and explained was equally irrelevant. As Edward Russell has pointed out:
“Young, therefore, was probably the first to realize – and Campbell the first to demonstrate – that mind and pattern are the key to radionics, and that the type of instrument used is of secondary importance because the instrument only serves to focus the thoughts of the operator”. 10
This secondary importance of the role of the equipment involved has also been emphasised by researcher James Beal:
“The machines perform no understood function by themselves, based on our present understanding in physics. They appear to have been developed over the years by their inventors in a deductive fashion and definite relationships seem to exist between shape, materials used, texture, arrangement of components, and size of components. Persons using this equipment appear to act as receivers of information on the subconscious level.”11
Just how effective each practitioner was clearly depended upon the calibre of their minds. Those who doubted the entire theory found that they could get no results at all, while those who had some facility in this field found that they could achieve modest results, albeit with the aid of a machine.
Finally, there were certain exceptional people found that they could not only get positive results, but that they could even dispense with the need for any form of machine altogether.
To the intuitive investigator, it seemed evident that the mind was capable of influencing matter in ways which defied the accepted laws of science. The fact that it did so, however, did not so much deny the validity of these laws, as to suggest that they were actually mind-made, and that having been made by mind, they could be re-made whenever conditions were appropriate.
Another example of the power of the mind to influence matter was exhibited by two Americans who claimed to have invented what they called “free-energy machines”. Unfortunately, John Keely and Edwin Babbitt took their secrets with them to the grave. However, another American was sufficiently intrigued by their claims to conduct experiments of his own. His name was Henry Moray.
In his youth Moray was inspired by the work of the extraordinary American-Croatian genius Nikola Tesla, and especially by his claims of energy sources that were infinitely greater than those that had already been discovered. After completing his schooling at Salt Lake City, Utah, Moray pursued his interest in electrical engineering and obtained his doctorate from the University of Uppsala in Sweden.
Soon after his return to the United States he succeeded in designing a “free energy” device that was capable of generating considerable amounts of electrical energy. One prototype, which weighed just sixty pounds (27 kilograms), was able to produce 50,000 watts of energy.
Because his device incorporated the use of a cold cathode tube, which was known to be incapable of generating electricity, it was immediately dismissed by other scientists as fraudulent. Moray was denied a patent by the U.S. Patent Office because he was unable to identify the source of energy utilised by his machine.
Although Moray successfully demonstrated his device before numerous other scientists and engineers, and on one occasion even took his equipment several miles into the country so that he could not be accused of surreptitiously using a hidden source of energy, Moray’s invention continued to be ignored by science. When he died in 1974, his dreams of tapping a vast reservoir of unknown energy for the benefit of humanity had proved a dismal failure.
The tragedy of Henry Moray was that there was no room to accommodate him at the inn of modern science. His ideas remained outcast, since they were unable to be incorporated within the dominant scientific paradigm of his times. Fortunately for humanity, Moray’s ideas have continued to survive via his book “The Sea of Energy in which Earth Floats”, awaiting the day when science is finally ready to embrace a new view of reality.
It is not difficult to see the parallels here between the responses of the medical fraternity to the claims of radionics, and the reaction of the scientific community to the free energy devices created by Keely, Babbitt and Moray. In both cases, startling new ideas were advanced which were completely at odds with the accepted paradigm of science.
The fact that these pioneers could point to successful practical results did not prevent them from being cast out as heretics for having had the temerity to challenge the accepted scientific way of thinking.
The problem which confronted Moray, just as it did Albert Abrams and others before him, was that they were unable to incorporate their theories into the established paradigm of their peers. Yet all these men were profoundly scientific in their methodology and embarked upon an empirical search for substantiation of their hypotheses according to the established protocols of science.
That they were condemned was not because they were poor scientists, but because their results conflicted with what accepted thinking had decreed. The fundamental difficulty which confronted such inventive men as Moray, Abrams and Hieronymus, was that they were unable to explain why they had obtained their results.
Based on their intuition, each had proceeded in a certain way and had achieved certain practical results. In order to gain the acceptance of their peers, however, it was necessary for them to explain how their results had been obtained. Since these fell outside of the existing paradigm of thought, this was a task which clearly lay beyond them.
The true explanation of such enigmatic phenomena as radionics and free-energy machines rests with the insights of the mystics. Since, they avow, the universe is not some vast objective reality that exists outside of ourselves, but is a subjective creation in consciousness, there can be no a priori rules which govern the functioning of the universe.
What we find therefore is what we seek. And what we seek is determined by what we believe. Where thought is sufficiently strong it inevitably comes to imprint itself on physical reality. How it does so does not require adherence to some consistent set of rules, for each obtains results according to their predetermined beliefs.
Abrams obtained radiations from human tissue because he believed it was possible to do so. Scientists and conventional medical practitioners find no evidence of these radiations because they have been taught to believe they do not exist. Yet if they could only be persuaded to change their way of thinking, they would undoubtedly find evidence to support them.
The world is full of examples of people who do things that defy conventional scientific thinking. The fact that they do so is not only a tribute to their faith, but also proof that the universe is not bound by scientific law, as will be seen in the following instalment.
Continued in Part Three
References:
5 “I Am That”, Conversations with Sri Nisargadatta Maharaj, translated by Maurice Frydman, Book I, Chetana, Bombay, 1973, p. 214.
6 “Tripura Rahasya”, translated by Swami Saraswathi, Sri Ramanasramam, Tiruvannamalai, 1962, p. 103.
7 Yoka Daishi, “Song of Enlightenment”, Verse 33, Quoted in “Manual of Zen Buddhism”, by D.T. Suzuki, Rider, London, 1983, p. 97.
8 Joseph Goodavage, “The Incredible Hieronymus Machine”, in “Future Science” edited by John White and Stanley, Krippner, Anchor, New York, 1977, p. 390.
9 Edward Russell, “Radionics – Science of the Future”, in “Future Science”, op.cit., pp. 366-385.
10 Ibid., p. 371.
11 James Beals, “Fields within Fields”, quoted in “Future Science”, op.cit., p. 340.
Allan, Our Magical World, February 21, 2019, 2:08 pm
We live in a universe of awesome majesty and size. Within this age-old cosmos, isolated galaxies pursue lonely paths through the desolate void of space. Set against this primeval darkness, these wandering galaxies shine with the light of a myriad glowing suns.
Within again these systems of solar light, tiny planetary satellites revolve. The earth, which is but a microcosm of this universal scheme, is our island home in space. Yet we who inhabit this world are dwarfed by its immensity and grandeur.
Its splendour has been the subject of epic tales of wonder, and its beauty the source of endless songs of praise. Our poets in every generation have set to rhyme the nature of this beauty, while our composers have sought to express the music of the spheres. Our lives in fact are daily acts of worship within this panoply of form.
But what lies behind this mystery of form? What secret ingredient lends its perfume to the petalled rose, or yields magic to a morning sunrise? What vital essence permeates an ice-clad peak, or animates the fury of the storm? What motivates our world of heat and light and power?
Our search for the meaning of these mysteries, and an understanding of the true nature of this world, has led us on an extraordinary journey. When we began our quest into the reality of the objective world, we used as an illustration the example of an oak tree.
Standing tall in our world of common experience, this oak tree appears to have undoubted existence and reality. Not only do we see it as an object separate from ourselves in space, but each one of our senses yields specific information about the tree which contributes to our overall evaluation. Thus, we are able to see its stature, feel its strength, taste and smell its texture, and hear it creaking in the wind.
Based on all these impressions that are conveyed to us by our senses, we naturally assume that the oak tree has an objective existence and material reality. We consider it to be a part of nature, part of the real world we see around us.
In reaching this conclusion we are joined by numerous other people who share our view, for in comparing the information which they receive from the tree, we find that their sensory impressions coincide exactly with our own. This leaves us in no doubt that the tree exists as part of a real, physical world that is experienced equally by ourselves and others.
This reality seems unquestioned, and hardly worthy of further examination.
Yet when we begin to analyse the nature of the world around us, this simple viewpoint of reality undergoes a disturbing transformation. When we examine our oak tree in the cold light of scientific understanding, we find that the tree itself is composed of long, wooden fibres which are densely packed together.
Upon closer study, these wooden fibres are found to consist of tiny cells which are in turn composed of specific molecules. These molecules are not solid bits of matter, however, for they themselves can be broken down into constituent atoms. Even these atoms are not basic indivisible units of matter, for they have been found to consist of yet smaller particles which are composed of energy.
Our oak tree thus resolves itself into complex patterns of energy that are constantly in motion. Not only is this energy in motion, but it continually sparkles into existence and vanishes out of existence again into nothing.
Our scientific investigation into the nature of the tree tells us that our oak tree is in fact pure energy, which emerges out of a residuum which physicists have called the quantum field. Yet there is nothing in these various patterns of energy that distinguishes them as our oak tree, for the particles which make up the tree are no different from the particles which make up all the other objects in the world.
Far from clarifying the nature of material objects, therefore, science seems to have robbed them of their meaning. Our tree no longer has form, objectivity or strength, for all of these features have disappeared upon examination into the simple movement of energetic particles.
Equally, the perfume that is exuded from the flower, or the song that can be heard in the murmuring of the surf cannot be found within the movement of the particles themselves, especially as they are held to move according to the random laws of chance.
Nature as illuminated by science turns out to be a meaningless affair. Those writers, poets and composers who have gloried in nature have responded to something that resides uniquely within themselves, for it is to be found nowhere within the scientific explanation of the world. As the British philosopher and mathematician Alfred North Whitehead observed:
“Nature gets credit which should in truth be reserved to ourselves; the rose for its scent, the nightingale for his song and the sun for its radiance. The poets are entirely mistaken. They should address their lyrics to themselves and should turn them into odes of self-congratulations on the excellency of the human mind. Nature is a dull affair, soundless, scentless, colourless, merely the hurrying of material, endlessly, meaninglessly.”1
The world of nature which surrounds us in such rich profusion carries no meaning until it is revealed in consciousness. It is only when the image of the oak tree appears in consciousness that we become aware of it and can tell of the impressions within consciousness which it engenders. These impressions appear to be derived through the agency of our physical senses.
When we investigate the process whereby exterior sensations are converted into interior impressions in consciousness, we find ourselves confronted by yet another difficulty. We discover that we are not able to determine precisely how sensory signals, in the form of electrical impulses, are converted into images in consciousness. Furthermore, we are unable to account for the origin and existence of consciousness itself, nor for its characteristic feature which is called the mind.
The idea that there exists an objective world outside of ourselves that is revealed to us via our senses is nothing more than an article of faith. It is so because we believe it is so.
No evidence has hitherto been led to justify this claim. What we have done has been to point to these images in consciousness as evidence of their objective reality. In other words, we have taken the existence of our sensory perceptions of matter and form outside of ourselves as proof that this is indeed so.
But there can never be any object in nature that exists outside of consciousness. As nuclear physicists have now conceded, if there actually is an objective, physical world which exists “out there” in space independently of consciousness, then they can say nothing about it, for all their conclusions are based upon information that resides in consciousness.
The fact that different observers happen to agree upon the nature of their observations is not in itself proof that these observations have an objective nature. It merely confirms that different people share similar perceptions in consciousness.
Mystics of every age have taught that all experience is mind-made, and as such can never be separated from the consciousness of the individual experiencer. The idea that what is contained within consciousness is representative of an actual outer world is therefore considered to be illusory.
The reason why the world is described by mystics as an illusion is not because it does not exist, but rather because what is acknowledged to exist is not representative of an outer reality. According to these mystics, there can never be an object without an accompanying observer, and correspondingly, that there can never be an observer without a world to interact with.
The fact that consciousness may sometimes appear to be blank, or devoid of images, does not detract from this intrinsic duality, for blankness is merely another form of image. Furthermore, as they point out, the idea of individual personality is itself illusory, for it is born of this duality.
It is the interaction with “objects” in experience which builds up the idea of personality. The personality is thus a residue of images and events which are retained in memory. It is nothing more or less than the sequential record of experience, and each personality becomes coloured by that experience.
This experiential sequence progresses from “birth” through to “death,” and forms a perceived lifetime of experience which is then attributed to that personality. All experience takes place within a faculty of expression in consciousness called “mind”. Upon investigation, the mind is found to be the sum of the contents of consciousness, which are thoughts.
These thoughts arise spontaneously in consciousness and are projected outwardly in the form of an outer world. The world, therefore, is a product of individual consciousness, and is projected by that consciousness. The world does not impinge on consciousness from without as the senses suggest. Instead, it is projected outwardly by consciousness, just as cinematic images are projected on a screen.
That the senses are not simply windows onto an objective and physical world is evidenced by our experience in the waking state of various forms of suggestion. Simply by means of suggestion, it is possible to make the eye see sights that are not part of the commonly accepted world, or hear spurious sounds, or vary the normal functioning of the senses.
The best example of the power of suggestion occurs in hypnosis. While hypnosis is usually regarded as a sleep-like condition, practitioners such as Kreskin emphasize that hypnosis is not a trance-like state in which normal waking consciousness is superseded.
Unless a specific suggestion of sleepiness is given, the subject continues to relate to his or her environment as if nothing unusual had occurred in their normal waking state. As Kreskin points out, the power of suggestion can cause the mind to project new images which are at complete odds with normal waking reality.
“Using only suggestion, tapping nothing but waiting imagination, I’ve had subjects seeing flying saucers or shivering in polar cold within two minutes, and audiences of six hundred dancing Irish jigs.”2
These experiences are by no means illusory to the people who experience them, for they remain adamantly convinced that these events formed an unbroken extension of their normal waking state, and that they “really” happened.
The basic challenge of what we take to be normal waking reality is this. If everyone projects a world of his or her own making, then how is it that different people agree on what they see and sense?
If, for example, a friend of mine should happen to visit my home, they will experience it in the same way I do. And if we both go to a place that neither of us has ever been before, we will find that we experience this new environment in precisely similar ways.
The answer to this conundrum is that everyone who shares a common experience of reality, has learned to construct that reality according to a similar pattern of ideas.
This construction begins shortly after birth and continues throughout adolescence and is usually fully developed by the time the child reaches puberty. The basic purpose of our cultural education is a deliberate process of ensuring that we do, in fact, succeed in creating a precisely similar world.
Our parents are our initial tutors, but this education is later continued by society at large. At stake is our ability to participate in a world of common experience. Not all children complete this course of education satisfactorily. When they fail, they are invariably branded as suffering from some or other pathological state of mind.
Membership of this common world can also be lost, often as a result of sudden emotional shock, causing the individual to substitute a new world scene, which is then interpreted by others as a form of insanity. This educational conditioning of mind is neatly summarised by Carlos Castaneda in speaking of his mentor, Don Juan:
“He pointed out that everyone who comes into contact with a child is a teacher who incessantly describes the world to him, until the moment when the child is capable of perceiving the world as it is described. From that moment on, however, the child is a member.
“He knows the description of the world; and his membership becomes full-fledged, I suppose, when he is capable of making all the proper perceptual interpretations which, by conforming to that description, validate it. For Don Juan, then, the reality of our day-to-day life consists of an endless flow of perceptual interpretations which we, the individuals who share a specific membership, have learned to make in common.” 3
Not only is our present waking condition the product of a process of conditioning, but this conformity is maintained moment by moment. Our world is not an enduring physical construct which existed long ages before we were born and will continue aeons after we are dead. Instead, it is a series of separate perceptions, created moment by moment, which are strung upon the thread of memory to provide congruence and consistency.
Just as separate frames of a cinematic image blur together to create the impression of an unbroken sequence, so do our momentary perceptions combine to form an unbroken sense of personality. Our world then is not the product of long evolutionary growth. It is a thing of momentary fragments. It is in this sense that the world is referred to by the Buddha as a “flickering lamp” and a “flash of lightning in a summer cloud”.
Having learned to project a common world in consciousness, we then seek to interact with this world according to the promptings of our personal desires. The actions born of these desires impact on others, just as the actions of others affect us. Of course, we only influence, and are in turn affected by, those who share our state of consciousness and our composite worldview.
Those who inhabit other states of mind are immune from our actions, and we theirs. Because every action, like every ripple in a pond, extends outwards to affect the entire content of consciousness, however weakly, we cannot talk of any one event as being the result of any one single cause.
Whatever happens in this constructed world of ours occurs as a result of the combined interaction of all desires, just as a pond reflects at any one time the combined result of all disturbances. Our actions, therefore, not only affect ourselves, but reach out to the furthermost stars in our heavens. It is for this reason that Nisargadatta Maharaj has said:
“Like everything mental, the so-called law of causation contradicts itself. Nothing in existence has a particular cause; the entire universe contributes to the existence of even the smallest thing; nothing could be as it is without the universe being what it is. When the source and ground of everything is the only cause of everything, to speak of causality as a universal law is wrong.”4
While the manifestation of the apparent universe is a product of its constituent thoughts and desires, the actual conditions of life experienced by any individual will always be dominated by his or her thoughts. If the world is a projection of the mind, and if the mind is the sum of a person’s thoughts and desires, then it is these very thoughts and desires that are the major determinants of that person’s experiences in life.
Now the thoughts that come to influence our lives most strongly, are those thoughts which are most firmly imprinted in consciousness. Once we have understood this fundamental truth, we see why it is that so much emphasis has always been placed upon the nature of belief. Our beliefs are those thoughts which we have come to accept as being true, usually by virtue of our education and cultural conditioning.
It is our beliefs which form our basic concepts of the world, and it is these beliefs that determine the way in which it manifests.
According to our beliefs, so are our experiences in life. Those thoughts which are reinforced by constant repetition form a powerful force and draw into manifestation their counterpart in matter. As we have seen from the teachings of the Sages, the creative power of thought rests upon certain requirements. In order for thought to influence matter or circumstance, they must first be clearly defined.
Thoughts which are vaguely formulated, or which are themselves counteracted by conflicting thoughts, usually in the form of doubts and fears, lack creative power. Their creative nature depends upon their clarity as well as the force with which they are held. This force is based upon the strength of desire.
Where the desire to experience a particular objective is strong, and the equivalent thought form is resolutely held in mind, circumstances within our world conspire to bring about the fulfilment of that desire.
It follows that faith is a necessary partner is this process. Faith is the capacity to hold onto a particular belief in the absence of physical evidence, in the confident expectation that the object of desire will subsequently manifest in reality. As the thirteenth century mystic St. Thomas Aquinas has confirmed: “The light of faith makes us see what we believe.”
Two other factors contribute to the efficacy of our thoughts. They are will and emotion. Will is a particular cast of mind. It is a characteristic which reinforces desire despite the presence of contrary conditions. It reveals itself in the capacity of the mind to overcome these limitations. It is the will to succeed. Where the will is strong, the power to create is equally strong.
Finally, any thought can be empowered by its association with emotion. Those thoughts which are supported by highly charged emotions become powerful forces for change. The Sages have taught that the world of our experience is not the creation of some divine being or supreme power, nor are we the victims of destiny or chance.
They have assured us, based on the conviction born of personal experience, that we are the masters of our souls and the architects of our lives. We are free to spin whatever cosmic web of thought that we desire. These Sages require only that we take responsibility for our lives, and not blame our limitations on others or on a punitive God. Our world is thus the true haven of our dreams.
We are free to make of it a heaven or a hell.
Continued in Part Two
References:
1 Quoted in “Introduction to Comparative Mysticism”, by J. De Marquette, Philosophical Library, New York, 1949, p. 15.
2 Kreskin, “The Amazing World of Kreskin”, Avon, New York, 1974, p. 124.
3 Carlos Castaneda, “Journey to Ixtlan”, Simon and Schuster, New York, 1972, p. 9.
4 “I Am That”, Conversations with Sri Nisargadatta Maharaj, translated by Maurice Frydman, Book I, Chetana, Bombay, 1973, p. 10.
Allan, Our Magical World, February 8, 2019, 1:10 pm
There is a symbol that stares at us through the hazy mists of antiquity. Its origins lie lost in the antediluvian world. It is a symbol which has been renewed in meaning from one culture to another, and from age to age. It has formed a powerful source of fascination for the human mind. This symbol is the maze.
At first glance, the maze seems to be nothing more than an intricate pattern of concentric lines. However, on closer examination, this convoluted pattern has been formed from a single unbroken line. This meandering line starts at the circumference of the circle, and after a series of tortuous turns arrives at the centre. From there it proceeds back towards the outer fringe, as depicted below.
The Chartres Labyrinth
The labyrinthine features of the maze were adopted by the early Christian Church, and this symbol was incorporated into the foundation of some of its grandest structures. Perhaps the largest of these labyrinths, shown here, is set out in the nave of Chartres Cathedral. It measures some forty-two feet (13 metres) across the floor.
Another classic example of this symbol can be found carved in stone on the walls of the cathedral at Lucca in Italy. Other examples of labyrinths can be found in cathedrals at Amiens, Bayeux, Sens and Poitiers in France. While these symbols were most commonly portrayed in the form of a circle, they were also constructed in rectangular or octagonal forms.
The symbol of the maze did not originate with the early Christians, however, but was derived from earlier sources dating back to the ancient Egyptians. The maze was also an integral part of Greek culture. According to Hellenistic mythology, the hero Theseus killed the legendary beast called the Minotaur that lurked within the labyrinthine tunnels of Knossos in Crete.
Throughout the centuries, the intricate meanderings of the maze have come to represent in symbolic form the deepest truth of the human evolutionary adventure. The maze is, in fact, a mandala (esoteric symbol) of the cosmic web.
The maze is a symbol of the universe, that wondrous artifice of thought which we have learned to spin. The world which we have taken to be a solid, separate and objective mass is, in truth, a subjective phenomenon – a stream of images displayed upon the screen of consciousness.
The universe of ours is moulded by experience and varies with experience. When we examine our subjective states of experience, we classify them into dreams, visions, hallucinations and the like. Each one of these states is a montage of images that is projected by the mind of each individual and is unique to that individual.
My dream is unique to me. It is not shared by others even though it seems to be populated by a host of other living forms. In a similar way we do not share our visions or drug-induced hallucinations. The content of each visionary experience is determined by the content of each mind, and represents a creative interplay of those thoughts, memories, expectations, desires and fears which characterise each individual mind.
Our worlds of visionary experience are not fixed worlds. They do not operate according to fixed laws of behaviour. The experiences of our dream worlds are infinitely plastic and can be moulded into unlimited panoramas of expression.
The true nature of our waking world is challenged by the examples of our dreams and other visionary hallucinations, which are direct subjective creations of our minds. In contrast with these subjective experiences, we have become conditioned into believing that our waking experiences are unique, and that they alone represent the real world.
We have been taught to believe that this world of objective form exists independently of our minds and operates according to pre-ordained laws. Yet our dreams and drug hallucinations do not defer to some divine creator. We alone are the creators of our dreams.
The creatures that inhabit our dreams are not the product of some pre-ordained system of evolution. They do not slowly evolve over aeons of time into the form in which we experience them in the dream. They are in fact momentary projections in consciousness, sustaining their existence with the unfolding saga of the dream.
When we wake, our dream worlds resolve themselves again into consciousness. They do not continue to undergo some separate existence from our minds, until such time as we choose to revisit them.
We are the creators and destroyers of the universes of our dreams. In a similar way, each one of us spins a web of thought, sustained by belief, which becomes for us our waking world of “reality”.
We learn to project our worlds according to certain patterns of belief that are common to our culture. In this way we come to share worlds which are common to those who think like us. Having created this subjective world of expression, we imagine that all people who inhabit our world share similar worlds which have the same content as our own, and which function in similar ways according to similar sets of rules.
This actually is the case for those who think exactly like us. But there are numerous other people who do not share our culture or our beliefs and who do not think as we do. They create for themselves very different worlds of expression. These other worlds are inhabited by different sorts of beings and operate according to different sets of rules.
The fundamental truth is that there is no objective universe out there in space. And the universe that we experience is experienced differently by different people. There is no single universe that is common to all souls.
Among those who create worlds of richer experience than our own are those people we call psychics. These “sensitives” create worlds for themselves which are not only far more vivid in terms of colour and intensity but are also populated by a far more diverse range of beings. They interact with ethereal beings that are invisible in our world.
As much as we might like to share their window on a wider world, we find that we are unable to do so, for as long as we hold steadfastly to our foundations of belief – those fundamental principles of thought which have given our world its distinctive and definitive character. Once we choose to change these underlying tenets however, we find that our world becomes transformed in harmony with these changes.
Each one of us lives a life within that web of expression that we call the universe – our waking world of projection. When we die this experience of interaction with form does not end. The experience of being continues, and the sense of identity remains, albeit on another plane of consciousness.
These after-death experiences draw their character from those actions which we have initiated during our waking world of life and are shaped by our motives and desires. If we sow pain in our worldly state of consciousness, we reap pain in the after-death state. If we generate joy on the earthly plane, we experience the delights of the heavenly realm.
Our after-death experiences in consciousness thus come to reflect a balance, or karmic character which yields to each the due reward of those seeds of action which were sown during the pre-death state. Our lives are comprised of a sequence of experiences in consciousness.
In the unfolding dream of consciousness, we therefore vacillate from “living” state to “death” state, and back again to the “living” state. This cycle continues endlessly, for as long as we continue to be the initiators of our actions. Within each incarnation, we spin a web of thought which is in harmony with our beliefs.
None of these webs are permanent and none of them are perpetuated. At the end of each incarnation we withdraw the threads of each web which we have so laboriously spun, back into our own source of consciousness, only to repeat this process in another cycle of rebirth.
No matter how grand our universe of expression, and no matter how satisfying our experience may be, we always remain bound by the limits of the web that we have spun for ourselves. Every web that we spin is a product of our beliefs, those thoughts which have become deeply imprinted on our minds.
Yet by changing the nature of these thoughts we can enlarge or reduce our webs. We can also refine them or make them coarser. The contents of our living experiences are dependent on the webs which we have spun. The finer the web that we create, the more delicate will be the creatures of consciousness that we will find manifested therein.
If our webs are coarsely spun, with large spaces between the strands, the subtler manifestations of consciousness pass through these spaces. It is not that we are prevented from experiencing them. It is just that our webs are too coarse to reveal their presence. The remedy is to refine our thinking, and to re-make our webs in more subtle ways so as to trap these desired experiences.
The maze that appears on the floor of Chartres cathedral symbolically depicts the web of thought that represents our world. It is composed of a single strand that leads outwards, by complicated convolutions, to the circumference of the web.
This web can equally well be unravelled, by pursuing the thread back to its point of origin.
There is but a single way to overcome the limitations of the web. This way is shown by the outline of the maze. It is the secret of its symbolism and the reason for its enduring charm. The web must consciously and painstakingly be unravelled, by steadily following the thread back to its source.
The Sages have consistently taught that the way to overcome the limitations of our worldly web is by retracing our thoughts back to their origin in consciousness. It is by steadily pursuing our thoughts to their source that we unravel the web of our own creation, and so free ourselves from the limits of the web.
The mystery of the maze hides another profound secret. When the thread that creates the maze is followed to its source, it ends in the emptiness of the Void. The heart of the labyrinth yields nothing but emptiness. Yet it is that emptiness which is the plenum of all created life.
To reach the fountain of Supreme Truth, it is necessary to transcend the Void, that Ungrund of outer darkness which shields the inner light. Those who finally reach this inmost Sanctuary, have to pass through that ring of darkness which St John of the Cross has called “the dark night of the soul”.
Those who persist in their efforts to cross over to the farther shore, however, find a joy that is beyond all telling. It is living at its most abundant, unlimited and without end.
The idea that there can be life beyond the nihilism, emptiness and darkness of personal extinction, defies the intellectual mind. We simply cannot comprehend life other than through our customary conscious experience.
The difficulty which confronts the mind is that it attempts to form a concept of illimitable experience. This attempt is doomed to failure. The limited mind is quite unable to conceive of an experience that is without any form of limitation. All words fail in their efforts to describe it.
No concept, no matter how subtle, can define it. Yet the desire to eat of this divine confection is countered by the fear that we might not like its taste. Anxious to forestall this possibility, we attempt to derive beforehand an idea of what it is we may finally hope to achieve.
Even though we can acknowledge the limitation of the mind, we nevertheless resolutely seek to reduce Reality to corporeality, and so dress the illimitable in clothes of thought, before deciding whether it really is worth striving for.
Having severed the knot of identity which strings images together in consciousness, the Sage does not react to these images from the standpoint of personality. They come, and they go, and there is no desire to link successive images. Yet from the viewpoint of the observer, the Sage continues to act and speak just like a normal, rational human being.
The Sage encompasses all consciousnesses and all worlds, and yet it is not limited by their content. The Sage experiences things as others experience them. The Sage feels and shares the thoughts and feelings of others as if they were his or her own experience. Yet the Sage remains beyond the reach of all experience. Being at the heart of all experience, the Sage is all-knowing.
Again and again we try to look into the mind of the Sage to see as he sees, and to try to grasp the action of his mind. What we fail to recognise is that the Sage is truly mindless, and does not evaluate the images of perception, which do not remain stuck in memory upon the screen of consciousness.
Jesus promised all those who truly sought the deathless state, which was likened to a jewel beyond value, that their wish would be fulfilled. But the price that would have to be paid for this supreme gift was personal sacrifice – the voluntary dissolution of the ego.
Jesus coerced no one. He merely invited those who wished to be like him to adopt the path which he had followed. He was the Way, and his life was the Truth. His Way remains equally valid to this day and has been trod alike by every Sage.
The idea of giving up personal identity, of surrendering individual desire, is a prospect which fills us all with horror. What lies beyond appears as forbidding as the grave, shorn of all laughter, fun and joy, and of every quality which makes our lives worth living. The Sage coaxes us to trust, and not to fall prey to these fears.
He who would save his life, declared Jesus, would lose it. But he who was prepared to sacrifice his own life would gain all things, in a life of boundless joy. This is the acid test of the mature seeker – the willingness to sacrifice the known in the anticipation of the unknown.
We shrink from this call to impersonality, fearing in this sacrifice the loss of personal identity, which is the vital core of our being.
Of all the preoccupations of the mind, the most persistent and captivating is the idea of personality. At each moment of our lives we are involved in a constant search for satisfaction according to the dictates of this identity. We are all obsessed with the idea that we are bound to a particular body that was born in time, and will in turn, succumb to death.
The Truth cannot be grasped by the conscious mind. Every attempt to encompass it must inevitably fail. Yet the earnest desire to experience it creates the conditions which allow it to suddenly shine forth.
If there are few who experience this fullness of Reality, it is because there are few who are willing to lay down the burden of their lives. They would rather strive to improve their temporal condition than abandon it completely.
The Sage is immersed in this Reality and is anxious to reveal the way to overcome all suffering. The Sage sees no difference between this Reality and other persons. All are rooted in the one Reality. Because he knows this Reality, he is ever free from the limitations of unreality.
Those of us who have mistaken this illusory unreality for reality, continue to be trapped in its limiting web. The Sage points out the nature of the web that imprisons us. It is then up to us to extricate ourselves from its cloying strands.
For many, the effort to understand and learn dwarfs their analytical powers. They instinctively resent the mental struggle that is necessary to seek out the origin of their selves. Yet for them, burdened by the weight of many sorrows, there is still hope and the promise of salvation. Enlightenment can still be gained, but only if they truly want it above all things.
The choice is always ours. We are always free to abandon the ways which have led us into pain, sorrow, illness and despair. But it is only when we have truly come to see the folly of our ways and long for release that we are ready to turn within and awaken to our Reality.
We first have to be convinced of the need for change. All too often we confess that we are simply unfitted for this task.
But, for as long as we remain dominated by the desire to experience, we are obliged to keep on spinning. And it is this process of spinning that binds us to the unending cycle of life and death. Birth leads to death which leads again to rebirth.
Whatever the fruits of our spinning, they are lost each time we die, and we start each life anew with nothing save the desire again to experience. Once again, we laboriously spin our cosmic web which is the arena of our desire.
For as long as we choose to spin, we are bound by the limits of our web. It is only when we have become satiated with the chore of spinning that we are finally ready to begin to unravel the web that we have spun.
Only then do we begin our journey back to the centre of the maze, by steadily unravelling the luminous thread of the “I am”. And only when we have succeeded in pursuing it to its source, do we rediscover our true nature, and the fact that we were never bound.
We are free to spin for as long as we choose to experience. We are under no duress to change. There is no timetable to our lives. We have all eternity to spin.
Yet in the course of spinning, there will come a day for each one of us when we will long to be free of our cosmic web. No skill or expertise in spinning will then satisfy this yearning. The pangs of this desire will prompt us to unravel the web that we have spun, and voluntarily destroy the personality which we have built.
In the course of this unravelling, we will have to face the death of our individual personality. Yet it is a death which leads to a glorious resurrection. We will be reborn into a world of immortality, beyond the clasp of pain and the trammels of time and space.
The moment we choose to don this cloak of bliss depends on us. We can do it now, or we can leave it for a billion lifetimes hence.
Yet whatever our condition, whatever heaven or hell we have personally constructed for ourselves, we are destined to be free. No amount of spinning can ultimately deter us from this goal. We will be free because we are already free. We have only to shed the blinkers from our eyes.
The morning of this awakening advances on us NOW!
Allan, The Mystery of the Maze, January 24, 2019, 2:09 pm
My name is Mark Stevens. I am talking today to Allan Colston. He is the author of The Last Days of Tolemac, which is a book dealing with prophecy and other end-time events. Welcome to the Podcast Allan.
Thankyou Mark, I hope you had a happy holiday season.
Mark: Very much so, thanks. But on a more sombre note, I want to go back to our last series of Podcasts, where you talked about how what is happening in the world today lines up with Bible prophecy, and the calamitous events described in the Book of Revelation.
The question I wanted to ask you is this. Don’t you find all this discussion about death and destruction depressing? I know I do.
You raise a very good point Mark, because I know that many people feel the same way. Yet the strange thing is that most of them would rather not talk about it. But, to answer your question, no, I am not personally depressed by this, no matter how catastrophic the immediate future of the world may happen to be.
But if you found our previous discussion depressing, then I have something even more disturbing to tell you about.
You will recall how I told you that a new world would rise out of the ashes of the old, and that a saviour would emerge who would rule over the world in a golden age that would last for a thousand years. Perhaps the most depressing words in the entire Bible can be found in the first few verses of chapter 20 of the Book of Revelation, which read as follows:
“And I saw an angel come down from heaven, having the key of the bottomless pit and a great chain in his hand. And he laid hold on the dragon, that old serpent which is the Devil and Satan, and bound him a thousand years. And cast him into the bottomless pit, and shut him up, and set a seal upon him, that he should deceive the nations no more, till the thousand years should be fulfilled”.
And then comes the kicker Mark, and I am using this word deliberately here in its informal North American sense of “an unexpected and often unpleasant discovery or turn of events”, for the Bible goes on to say: “And when the thousand years are expired, Satan shall be loosed out of his prison, and shall go out and deceive the nations which are in the four quarters of the earth”.
When I first came across these words, I was shocked, for it begs the question: what is the point of trying to keep the Biblical commandments if Satan himself has a “get out of jail free” card that he can use from time to time? I mean, what is the point of living if evil keeps on winning?
Other students of the Bible have found this equally distressing. As one reader of a forum that I follow put it:
“What I don’t understand is that if the recurring cataclysms are supposed to cleanse the earth and humanity, how well is it actually being cleansed if evil survives each destruction, only to re-gather its strength and forces to create chaos again and again?
“I don’t doubt these cycles. It’s clear that a very dark force rules this earth at present, but the constant destruction-renewal cycle seems so sad and pointless. Will evil ever be truly destroyed? Will there ever be lasting peace or are we just pawns in a larger, never-ending game?”
The answer to the question posed above is simply this. No, there will never be an end to evil, and Satan and his forces will continue to manifest in our world of shape and form for as long as the world continues to turn, and the universe continues to exist.
And the reason is that we live in a world of opposites – of light and darkness, goodness and evil, heat and cold, high and low, strong and weak and so on and so on. And as Sir Isaac Newton pointed out in his third law of motion, for every action there is an equal and opposite reaction.
So goodness will always be met by an opposing force. If we think of life as a river, then it flows between two opposing banks. On the one side there is goodness, while on the other there is evil. You can never have one without the other.
Mark: How do you know that this is a true analogy?
Well, it’s a long story Mark, and to give you a proper answer I need to refer to my own search for truth and understanding.
As you know, many years ago I wrote a book called The Cosmic Web, which was a synthesis of Eastern mysticism and Western science. In the preface to this book, I outlined why I wrote it and what I found. It included the following words:
“I am a seeker. My personal search for meaning and the answers to the fundamental questions of life began more than half a century ago, while I was a schoolboy at Michaelhouse, located in the Midlands of KwaZulu-Natal in South Africa.
“I had little idea then that this quest would lead me on a journey that would span the globe, taking me to places like South America, India and Tibet, or that I would find myself in the company of extraordinary men and women who would both challenge and enlighten me.
“When I first began my quest for an understanding of the mysteries of life, I approached it from the standpoint of the Western materialistic paradigm. I considered myself to be a human being with a defined culture, language and heritage.
“My education had taught me that I was a physical being operating within a human body that functioned on a planet called earth, which itself was a tiny part of a much larger solar system, that was in turn part of a single galaxy set amongst a myriad other.
“When my search took me to India and I began to investigate the teachings of the Hindu Vedas, I was immediately confronted by a profound enigma. According to the teachings of the Sages of the East, based on their own personal experiences, I was not a human being at all, and the world that I considered to be real was dismissed as an illusion.
“My confusion was accompanied by an overwhelming urge to find the answer to this riddle. After all, the world could not possibly be both real and an illusion. It had to be one or the other. I had to know which of these two viewpoints was correct.
“For if it turned out that the scientists were right, then how was it that the Sages had been misled for thousands of years? Or if the Sages were correct, then how could I possibly explain away centuries of scientific proof that our world is incontrovertibly real?
“It took me many years to resolve this conundrum. The answers that I found, and the insights that I gained along the way, form the content of this book. While I have taken care to present the knowledge entrusted to me with the utmost fidelity, I bear full responsibility for the exposition of this thesis. Any shortcomings are mine and mine alone.
“In the course of my investigation, I chose to follow the evidence wherever it led, regardless of whether this happened to agree with accepted thinking at the time. My path ultimately led me to the realisation that the world is nothing like I had previously imagined, and that life holds out the possibility of greater avenues of expression than science has hitherto allowed.
“Now, looking back, I can say that the long years dedicated to this search have yielded a bountiful return. The questing mind has been stilled. But while the distant shore still beckons, the fruits of this endeavour now lie revealed on the pages of this book”.
So there you have it Mark. That in a nutshell explains what I was looking for, and what I found. And having found the answers to my search, my “questing mind has been stilled”. Since that time, I find that I am no longer concerned about the future of the universe, or whether it will unfold in a way that conforms to my own expectations.
Mark: So that leads me to the obvious question. What exactly did you find?
I found the same truth that was taught by the Buddha over two and a half thousand years ago, and which he described in the following way. The basic inescapable fact about the world is suffering. Everyone who is born in this world suffers. However, it is possible to overcome this suffering, and the Buddha laid out his eight-fold path for doing so.
Although I happened to be drawn to a different path from the Buddha, the answers that I found were primarily the same. They can be summarised as follows: Although we live in a world of opposites, it is possible to escape from this limited world of space and time. Not only is this path of escape available to all, but anyone is free to escape at any time.
Once you know this to be true in every fibre of your being, you find that it not only brings about an outward transformation, but an inner peace as well. Not only is there an end to fear, but all doubt ceases to exist as well. In fact, you come to laugh at the very idea of fate.
So although I continue to investigate what is happening in the world on a daily basis, to see if the events that are unfolding do indeed match the prophecies outlined in the Bible and other works, I am personally untroubled by what I find. The same inner peace that I found in India continues to remain with me to this day.
This sense of equanimity within is not generated by outward circumstances, which means that it is not dependent on, nor is it at risk from, anything that may happen to me or to the world. Although I may end up suffering like everyone else, and my body may die, I am not concerned. And that is because I know the ultimate Truth, which is that I am not a person, and never have been.
Mark: Well you’ve got me there Allan. Not only am I a person, but everyone I know knows me as a person. What do you have to say to that?
I understand what you are saying Mark, but once you begin to investigate the true nature of life, you realise that what we take to be our day-to-day reality is actually an illusion. Just as a dream turns out to be an illusion when we wake up, so it is possible to “wake up” from our so-called “real” world of space and time.
Once we do that, our individual personality disappears. I know this may sound strange. It certainly seemed strange to me when I first began my search. The difference is that I had an inner experience that transformed my life. It not only changed the way I thought about the world. It changed the way I thought about myself.
So if you will bear with me Mark, I will try to describe this transformation to you as simply as I can.
The source of all experience in consciousness begins with the sense of “I am”. Before anything can be experienced or known in life, whether it be in the waking state or any other projected state of consciousness, there is always this foundation of the “I am” – the source of our identity.
This “I am”, according to the teaching of the Sages, is rooted in the Supreme Reality. This sense of being not only permeates all experience and form, it also transcends them. This “I am” can never be subdivided. It is always solid, uniform and indivisible.
With the dawning of experience, the images that appear in consciousness become linked together in memory. Through the faculty of memory, the individual personality is formed. Each personality can have no existence without the faculty of memory.
As the individual personality begins to link images together in memory, so it begins to initiate desires, which are derived from the memories of past pleasures. These desires are attempts by the personality to order experiences in pre-selected ways.
The growing child begins to select experiences according to the dictates of desire. It is the desire to experiencewhich lies at the root of all conscious life. Desire is the attempt to attract those experiences which are meaningful or pleasurable to that individual personality. There can be no desire that is independent of personality.
There are no universal desires. Desires are personal expressions which reflect personal motivations. Each personality is thus an embodiment of those desires which form around the central experience of the “I am”. We are all products of our desires, and our experiences in life are determined by the nature of these desires.
Being ourselves the true creators of experience, there is no God who can be commended or blamed for what transpires. Each one of us is personally responsible for what happens in our lives.
The nature of our thoughts determines the character of our experiences. As our thoughts become ingrained in the form of rigid beliefs, so our universe appears to function according to these rigid rules.
Within western technological society, science represents a concerted attempt to reduce all experience to common rules of behaviour that are applicable to all. The rules which science finds, however, are the rules which it alone ordains. Science fashions life into a specific mould of experience which is self-serving and self-validating.
Because science merely deals with permutations of the web and is an attempt to reduce all webs to a common pattern, it can never transcend the web. As such, science can never reveal Reality, or the Truth which lies behind the manifestation of the web. The limitations of science are the limitations of our minds.
Science is free to roam within the vast expanse of mind and is successful in enabling us to spin ever more amazing patterns. But the patterns which science reveals are those patterns which are the reflections of scientific thinking.
By moulding the world into an image of its own belief, science imagines that it has revealed the universe “as it really is”. Yet our worlds are never fixed, and no amount of scientific endeavour can ever restrict the universe to inviolable laws.
The driving force of life is the motivation of desire. Life is nothing more or less than the desire for experience, and the search for ever-new ways in which to experience. Desire stirs the waters of consciousness.
The central Sun of Awareness (which reveals itself as the “I-am” sensation within), shines on this surface and is reflected in a host of tiny ripples, each of which represents an individual personality. Yet the appearance of each separate sun is illusory. Each reflection is a product of the movement of the water. When this disturbance ceases, each wavelet disappears, and with it the image of a separate sun.
The way to transcend the limits of our personal experience is by renouncing the desire to experience. Since it is desire which stirs the waters of consciousness, it is the absence of desire which stills them. So the rediscovery of the central Sun of Awareness is not the fruit of desire, but of the absenceof desire.
It is by voluntarily relinquishing the desire for individual expression that the personality becomes absorbed in the universe, just as the individual raindrop is absorbed into the amorphous sea. By sacrificing individual existence, the personality rediscovers its universal nature.
The price for surpassing all human limitation has always been to surrender individual existence and the desire for individual experience in life. For as long as the personality marches to the beat of an individual drum it can never experience its universal nature.
It is only by voluntarily surrendering the desire to be a person that the personality merges with the Infinite. Individual identity is lost forever, but Universal Awareness is regained.
It was this message of redemption through the death of the personality that was the central feature of the teachings of Jesus. Perhaps I could quote some verses from the Bible to explain.
“Then said Jesus unto his disciples, if any man will come after me, let him deny himself, and take up his cross and follow me. For whosoever will save his life will lose it, and whosoever will lose his life for my sake shall find it.” (Matthew 16: 24-25) “He that loveth his life shall lose it, and he that hateth his life in this world shall keep it unto life eternal.” (John 12: 25)
The cross which Jesus bade his disciples take up was not mere death of the physical body. It was the ultimate sacrifice of the personality – the voluntary relinquishment of individual existence. It was this self-sacrifice which opened the doors of redemption by resurrecting the soul in eternal life.
As Jesus himself proclaimed, he was the way to eternal life, and his life was the pathway to everlasting Truth.
The soul that strives for personal expression is bound to the cycle of rebirth. The individual appears to undergo a series of incarnations which always end in death. It is only when the soul voluntarily surrenders its individual existence that it transcends the power of death and is born no more. It takes off its mortal garb to don the cloak of immortality.
This was the same message that was taught by the Buddha, as recorded in the Dhammapada.
“Go beyond the stream, Brahmin, go with all your soul: leave desires behind. When you have crossed the stream of Samsara (the endless cycle of births and deaths) you will reach the land of Nirvana (extinction of the flame of individual life).” (Verse 383)
“Leave the past behind; leave the future the present behind. Thou art then ready to go to the other shore. Never shalt thou return to a life that ends in death.” (Verse 348)
“He who has gone beyond the illusion of Samsara, the muddy road of transmigration so difficult to pass; who has crossed to the other shore and, free from doubts and temporal desires, has reached in his deep contemplation the joy of Nirvana – him I call a Brahmin.” (Verse 414)
“Empty the boat of your life, 0 man; when empty it will swiftly sail. When empty of passions and harmful desires you are bound for the land of Nirvana.” (Verse 369)
“The traveller has reached the end of the journey! In the freedom of the Infinite he is free from all sorrows, the fetters that bound him are thrown away, and the burning fever of life is no more.” (Verse 90)
The purpose of Jesus’ life was to reveal the good news of the joy of living that lay beyond all mental thinking and intellectual understanding. “I am come that they might have life, and that they might have it more abundantly.” (John 10:10) Well Mark, I don’t know if any of this makes sense to you.
Mark: What you have described might seem appealing to you Allan, but I must say that it sounds like death to me.
That’s exactly what I am describing here Mark. I am talking here about the death of the individual personality. Everyone fears the death of their personality, because they believe that it will lead to their extinction and the loss of everything that they value most in life. Instead, it leads to something more wonderful than anything they can possibly imagine.
In chapter thirteen of the gospel of St. Matthew, Jesus describes this state in the following words: “Again, the kingdom of heaven is like unto treasure hid in a field; the which when a man hath found, he hideth, and for joy thereof goeth and selleth all that he hath, and buyeth that field”.
Notice how Jesus likens this state to a “hidden treasure”, that once found would cause a man to sell everything he owned in order to possess it. And the reason he would do so would not be to acquire status in society or unimaginable wealth. He would do so simply for “the joy thereof”.
And that is what I have been trying to describe to you Mark. We are not talking here about a state of mind or some intellectual theory that can be challenged or denied. Instead, this is the rediscovery of one’s true nature which, once found, leaves an indelible memory that can never be erased.
Once you have come to know your true nature, even if it is only for an instant, you can never forget it, and you become willing to do whatever it takes to get it back. And that has been the motivating force behind the lives of all the great Sages in history. And what I am describing is not limited to them. Anyone of us can experience this at any time.
Mark: You say that anyone can experience this state at any time. Do you know anyone who has? Have you ever experienced it yourself?
As a matter of fact, Mark, I have. And I am not alone in this. Numerous people throughout history have testified how they have had momentary flashes of insight into this divine state. In my Blogpost titled Plato’s Cave, I wrote how the English poet Percy Shelley described this transcendent state in his poem Ode to Liberty:
“Within a cavern of man’s trackless spirit is throned an Image, so intensely fair that the adventurous thoughts that wander near it worship, and as they kneel, tremble and wear the splendour of its presence, and the light penetrates their dreamlike frame till they become charged with the strength of flame”.
As I discussed in my Blog, my own experience happened when I was 31 years old. I was living in India at the time and was visiting a friend in the town of Varkala in Kerala, not far from the southern tip of India. As I sat down one morning, gazing idly into the water of a small pond that was part of his estate, IT happened.
Although the experience itself only lasted for perhaps a few seconds, its effect on the mind was electric! But because this state of Supreme Reality exists beyond the mind, the mind itself is incapable of describing it. Nevertheless, the experience left a residue that has been imprinted on my mind ever since.
I was left with a sense of sheer exhilaration. I knew without a shadow of doubt that I had experienced a state of freedom that lay beyond the mind. It was a state of bliss that defied description. I was not only free from the limits of space and time, but I understood at that moment exactly how the entire universe worked.
I understood also what the ancient Sages of India had said about life. They described it by the Sanskrit term Lila, which represented a form of cosmic dance, in which every part of the created universe had meaning, and that meaning was to express the joy of the Creator.
The best description that I have heard of that state is the one that has been recorded in the Vedas. They called it Sat-Chit-Ananda, which can be translated as Being-Consciousness-Bliss. And that was my experience. I was not only aware, but I was conscious of being aware, and I was immersed in total Bliss.
The key thing to understand Mark is that this Supreme State can never be reached by the intellect. You cannot use the mind to go beyond the mind. No amount of education or speculation can take you there. In fact, those who lack a formal education are sometimes better equipped to navigate this journey of self-discovery.
An example of this was a 15th century basket weaver from Benares (now called Varanasi) in India.
The man’s name was Kabir. Although he was a Muslim by birth and uneducated, he sought union with the Divine with a blazing passion, and it was his unyielding fervour that carried him to his goal. When he died his life was celebrated by Hindus and Muslims alike as one of India’s greatest mystical poets. This is how he described the joy of the Divine State:
“The Lord is in me, the Lord is in you, as life is in every seed.
O servant! Put false pride away, and seek for Him within you.
A million suns are ablaze with light,
The sea of blue spreads in the sky.
The fever of life is stilled, and all stains are washed away;
When I sit in the midst of that world.
Hark to the unstruck bells and drums! Take your delight in love!
Rains pour down without water, and the rivers are streams of light.
One Love it is that pervades the whole world, few there are who know it fully:
They are blind who hope to see it by the light of reason,
That reason which is the cause of separation.
The House of Reason is very far away!
How blessed is Kabir, that amidst this great joy he sings within his own vessel.
It is the music of the meeting of soul with soul;
It is the music of the forgetting of sorrows;
It is the music that transcends all coming in and all going forth.”
Mark: Well Allan, I must say that this has been a very revealing discussion. Although most of it went over my head, I have no doubt that our listeners will find a lot to think about. I want to thank you so much for your time.
You have been listening to Allan Colston, author of the book The Last Days of Tolemac. He can be reached by Email at tolemac@shaw.ca
Allan, AUDIO, The Joy of Living, January 11, 2019, 8:49 am
My name is Mark Stevens. I am talking today with Allan Colston. He is the author of The Last Days of Tolemac, which is a book dealing with prophecy and other end-time events.
For those listeners who were not with us during our last Podcast, this is a continuation of our series “Signs of the Times”. Welcome to the Podcast Allan.
Thanks Mark, it’s a pleasure to chat to you again.
Mark: So, just to recap for our listeners Allan, in Part One of our discussion, you talked about how more and more countries around the world are being dominated by tyrants, and how even well-established western democracies are now at risk.
That’s right, Mark. I then went on to focus on the United States, and how President Trump was beginning to exhibit tyrannical tendencies of his own, and how his actions have threatened the Constitution under which the country has been governed for the last two centuries.
These dangers have increased greatly in the last month as a result of two events – one of which has already happened, while the other is yet to come. The first event was the result of the mid-term elections, in which the Democratic Party regained control of the Lower House of Congress.
What this means is that, starting in January 2019, Congress will finally begin to fulfil the role that was assigned to it under the Constitution, and which was completely ignored by the Republicans for the first two years of the Trump Administration. That role is to oversee the actions of the President.
The second event, which has not yet come to fruition, is the completion of the investigation by Special Counsel Robert Mueller into the activities of the Russians during the 2016 election campaign, and whether there was any collusion between them and Donald Trump’s organisation.
Both events carry profound implications for the President, because everything that he does, or has done in the past, will now be the subject of intense scrutiny, of a kind that Donald Trump has never previously had to endure. And no one knows how he will respond to this pressure.
For if either he, or any member of his immediate family, is threatened with prosecution by the FBI or the Justice Department, we know that he is capable of doing just about anything to divert the nation’s attention. He might even plunge America into another war.
But that is a story for another time. And I have no doubt that we will be talking about this again in the not too distant future. Anyway, to return to our last conversation, I ended up by posing two questions.
My first question was: How did the American people ever come to elect a man like Donald Trump as president in the first place? And the second question was: Was this just a matter of chance, or was this part of some grand cosmic design? And that is what I want to talk about today.
As to the first part – how did the people ever come to elect a man like Donald Trump? – well, the answer to that is simple. They didn’t. As I explained in Part One of our Podcast titled “Hail to the Chief”, voters don’t elect the American president. The Electoral College does.
And by taking advantage of the way the Founding Fathers set up the Constitution, Donald Trump was able to attain a majority in the Electoral College, even though he didn’t win the most votes. So you could say that he was elected by way of a lucky break. But was that really the case?
Was it just a coincidence that Trump happened to be elected president at a time when the rest of the world seemed to be unravelling as well? Looking at it from a superficial point of view, that may seem to be so. But not if you study prophecy. And Bible prophecy in particular.
I have written about this at great length in my Blog, Mark. But for the sake of those listeners who may not be conversant with it, do you mind if I go over some of the important points here? I think it will help to answer the question as to whether this is part of some grand cosmic design.
Mark: Not at all Allan. Please carry on.
Back in February of this year we did a Podcast together in which I quoted from the words of the Oracle of Tolemac, who said:
“We want you to know that everything that is happening on your planet at this time is part of a plan. This is the great Cosmic Plan that will lead you into the coming golden age”.
What the Oracle was saying Mark, is that the events that are happening in the world today are not the result of chance, but are part of a great Cosmic Plan that has been steadily unfolding over the centuries. And those who know about this plan can tell us how our present age will end.
One of the people who knew was the legendary sage of ancient Egypt called Thoth, whom the Greeks called Hermes. He was the author of the sacred scroll, written in hieroglyphics, that was called the Book of Thoth. Part of this scroll came to be known as the “Lament”.
In this scroll, Thoth (or Hermes) predicted that there would come a time when foreigners would occupy the land of Egypt, and all that would be left of their former civilisation would be tombs and corpses, and the ruins of their ancient shrines and temples. As he wrote in this Lament:
“in that hour, weary of life, men will no longer regard the world as a worthy object of their admiration and reverence…. they will esteem it a burden; and then they will despise and no longer cherish this whole of the universe.
“For darkness will be preferred to light; it will be thought better to die than to live; none will raise his eyes towards heaven; the pious man will be thought mad, the impious, wise; the frenzied will be thought brave, the worst criminal a good man.
“Only the evil angels will remain, who will mingle with men, and constrain them by violence – miserable creatures – to all the excesses of criminal audacity, engaging them in wars, brigandage, frauds, and in everything which is contrary to the nature of the soul”.
Although these words were written untold thousands of years ago, it is clear that the time that Thoth was writing about has now arrived. Anyone who reads a newspaper or who watches the evening news will be aware of the torrent of horror stories that are unfolding in the world today.
And this is not just about the evil that men and women do to each other. There has been a steady decline in moral virtue underlying it all. I am reminded here of the words of the popular American author Henry Miller, who penned the following lines shortly after the end of the last world war:
“A new world is being born, a new kind of man is springing up today. The great mass of mankind, destined in our time to suffer more cruelly than ever before, ends by being paralysed with fear, becoming introspective, shaken to the very core, and does not hear, see or feel anything more than everyday physical needs.
“It is thus that worlds die. First and foremost, the flesh dies. But although few clearly recognize it, the flesh would not have died if the spirit had not been killed already”.
Thoth wasn’t the only one to know about this cosmic plan. Jesus knew about it as well, and he warned his disciples about the type of events that would unfold upon the earth prior to his return.
Mark: What did he have to say?
Listen to the words that are written in chapter 24 of the gospel of St. Matthew:
“And as he sat upon the mount of Olives, the disciples came unto him privately, saying, tell us, when shall these things be? and what shall be the sign of thy coming, and of the end of the world?
“And Jesus answered and said unto them, take heed that no man deceive you. For many shall come in my name, saying, I am Christ; and shall deceive many.And ye shall hear of wars and rumours of wars: see that ye be not troubled: for all these things must come to pass, but the end is not yet.
“For nation shall rise against nation, and kingdom against kingdom: and there shall be famines, and pestilences, and earthquakes, in diverse places. All these are the beginning of sorrows.Then shall they deliver you up to be afflicted and shall kill you: and ye shall be hated of all nations for my name’s sake.
“And then shall many be offended, and shall betray one another, and shall hate one another.And many false prophets shall rise and shall deceive many. And because iniquity shall abound, the love of many shall wax cold.
So for those people who regard Donald Trump as an exception to the rule of government, and hope that after his term of office has ended America will once again return to the values upon which the nation was built, Jesus offers cold comfort. Things will only get worse – much, much worse.
Jesus knew that at the time of the end, most of mankind would forsake his teachings and that fraud, corruption, exploitation, greed, vice and depravity would dominate the planet. And that is especially true today. The U.S. has long since abandoned the Christian principles upon which it was founded.
Mark: By the way Allan, at the end of Part One of our Podcast entitled “Hail to the Chief”, you made the following comment:
“Some people have asked me if I think that Donald Trump will turn out to be the long-awaited Anti-Christ. I tell them no I don’t. But I do think that he will serve up a very good first course”.
What did you mean by that?
I’m glad you raised that point Mark. First of all, as I have made plain elsewhere in my Blog, although the Anti-Christ will be a real, physical person, he will not appear on the earth until after it has been devastated by a series of world-wide catastrophes.
In addition, he will come as a man of peace. He will perform similar miracles to those of the historical Christ. He will feed the hungry, heal the sick and raise the dead. It will not be until many years have passed that he will reveal his dark side and fulfill his evil destiny.
Because of this, anyone who is a prominent leader today cannot be the Anti-Christ predicted in the Bible, if only because he lacks the necessary divine attributes that this man has been predicted to possess.
But that doesn’t mean to say that there won’t be leaders who manifest the spirit of the Anti-Christ. And that was what I was referring to when I said that Donald Trump would serve up a very good first course. You might say that he is a perfect forerunner to the Anti-Christ.
Why do I say that? Let me explain by way of a very droll parallel. I don’t know if you are aware of this Mark, but Donald Trump’s father had a very unusual middle name. Believe it or not, he was christened Frederick Christ Trump. So Donald Trump can legitimately be called the son of Christ.
So if Jesus is the son of God and Donald Trump is the son of Christ, then how do you think they compare with one another?
The qualities that define a truly spiritual person are those that have been set out in the holy books of every faith.
Spiritual people are the peacemakers of this world. They are patient. They are kind. They are slow to show anger. When any harm is done to them, they are quick to forgive. They do not harbour thoughts of revenge.
They do not make a show of the good works that they do. They do not push themselves ahead of others. They do not seek to be first. They do not search for fame. They have simple needs. They are satisfied with whatever comes their way.
These people lead sober, considerate, thoughtful and dedicated lives. They care for others, especially the poor and the neglected in life. They place the needs of others before their own. In times of hardship they are courageous, resourceful and optimistic. They seek the best in all things. They are not daunted by difficulty.
They are not motivated by material gain. They do not seek to acquire great personal wealth. They are motivated by the desire to gain a deeper understanding of life. They strive to be of service to all those who turn to them for help. They are strong in faith.
They are humble. They are meek. Their apparent outward weakness hides their inner strength. They are at peace with themselves and with the world. They share whatever they have with others without thought of whether they will be repaid.
They are considerate of the needs of other creatures that share life with them. They do not oppress the weak or exploit the gullible. They do not trample on the rights of others. They allow others the freedom to live their lives as they think best.
They are not easily misled. They do not indulge in excess. They do not search after empty pleasures. They do not shirk pain or seek to escape the realities of life.
So let me ask you a question, Mark. Of all the qualities listed above, how many of them would you say that Jesus possessed?
Mark: I would say pretty much all of them.
And how many of them do you think characterise Donald Trump?
Mark: Probably not very many.
Exactly Mark, and that was the point I wanted to make. Donald Trump is not only different from Jesus, he is the complete opposite. And if he is the opposite of the Christ, then he represents the spirit of the anti-Christ. Not only that, but he is an apostle of materialism.
One of the first things that Jesus did when he began his ministry was to deliver his famous sermon on the mount. In this, he specifically warned the assembled throng against the dangers of following the path of materialism – of seeking after material things, which he called “mammon”.
As we read in chapter six of the gospel of St. Matthew:
“Lay not up for yourselves treasures upon earth, where moth and rust doth corrupt, and where thieves break through and steal: But lay up for yourselves treasures in heaven, where neither moth nor rust doth corrupt, and where thieves do not break through and steal.
“For where your treasure is, there will your heart be also”.
Jesus was warning people here that it was not possible to strive after worldly things and at the same time follow him. As he warned:
“No man can serve two masters: for either he will hate the one and love the other; or else he will hold to the one and despise the other. Ye cannot serve God and mammon”.
And for those who treat this warning lightly, he had this to say:
“Enter ye in at the strait gate: for wide is the gate and broad is the way that leadeth to destruction, and many there be which go in thereat. Because strait is the gate and narrow is the way which leadeth unto life, and few there be that find it”.
Notice that Jesus was pointing out that the popular path of materialism that appealed to the masses led only to destruction, while the path that he offered “leadeth unto life”. And it was not just life that he promised, but eternal life.
This is the challenge that Christians face around the world today. Sadly, most of their leaders have already cast their lot with the devil, as we can see from the popularity of what has become known as “prosperity theology” – the idea that faith in God brings financial blessing and physical well-being.
And for those who think that the secret to a successful life is to mix a little materialism with a little faith, it is wise to heed the warning conveyed by St. John: “So then because thou art lukewarm, and neither cold nor hot, I will spue thee out of my mouth”. (Revelation 3:16) There can be no half measures.
And even if a person was able to gain all the wealth in the world, it would not help them in the end. They would only lose it when they die. And when they die, they would have to face the consequences in the afterlife. As Jesus is recorded as saying:
“For what shall it profit a man, if he shall gain the whole world, and lose his own soul”. (Mark 8:36)
The other aspect that I want to emphasize here Mark, is what the Book of Revelation predicts will happen to those people who follow the path of “mammon” in life, and it is not good news.
Mark: What does it have to say?
As I wrote in my article “What is Mystery Babylon in the Book of Revelation?”, the disciple John recorded how an angel appeared before him while he was in exile on the island of Patmos, and showed him what would happen to the “the great whore that sitteth upon many waters”.
This “whore” was described by the angel as a woman arrayed in purple clothing and adorned with precious jewels, and upon whose forehead were written the words “Mystery, Babylon the Great, the Mother of Harlots and Abominations of the Earth”.
Mainstream Christianity today believes that this mystery woman Babylon refers to the rise of a future one-world religion that will be founded, and presided over, by a future Anti-Christ who is predicted to appear on the world stage during the “last days” spoken of by St. John.
But I believe that modern Bible scholars have completely misunderstood the obvious meaning of these words, and are oblivious to the fact that a one-world religion that exactly matches that prophesied by St. John has grown up under their very gaze.
This new religion now encompasses every country on the globe. It attracts converts from every major faith, and appeals equally to every culture, creed and race. No man or woman alive on earth today is free from its spell. This new religion not only attracts Kings, Presidents and rulers, it also lures the poor, the weak and the needy.
This religion is called “Babylon”. Babylon is not just the name of a place. It is a symbol of everything for which the original city of Babylon was once famous. At the height of its glory Babylon was the envy of the world. It was a place of great luxury and wealth. Its hanging gardens were among the wonders of the ancient world.
The religion symbolized by the woman called “Babylon” is the religion of materialism. It is the desire for material wealth ahead of all other values in life. Babylon is a very old religion. It has seduced people since the earliest days of civilization. It is now the dominant religion on the earth. All nations have fallen prey to its seductive lure.
All of humanity is governed today by an economic system that is based on money. All human enterprise is based on a system that is required to generate money in order to survive.
Yet as we have discovered in the last few years, our economic system has become corrupted to the point where the lust for money on the part of the few, has placed the livelihood of hundreds of millions of people around the world in jeopardy.
Not only is this desire for material wealth now the major economic motivator around the planet, but it has assumed the character of a religion. This world-wide religion of materialism has captured the minds and hearts of humanity just as much as if it were a traditional faith.
There is little doubt that our modern economic system comprising commerce, finance, investment and trade now fits the description of the one-world religion described by St. John. For in describing the influence of this mystery woman Babylon he wrote:
“For all nations have drunk of the wine of the wrath of her fornication, and the kings of the earth have committed fornication with her, and the merchants of the earth are waxed rich through the abundance of her delicacies”. (Revelation 18:1-3)
The references above to “the kings of the earth”, “merchants of the earth” and “waxed rich through the abundance of her delicacies” should make it obvious that St. John is not writing about a religious movement led by some future Anti-Christ.
Instead he is referring here to a mercantile system that has grown to world-wide proportions and has become totally corrupted by materialistic pursuits and is devoid of spiritual qualities.
Not only has our modern economic system been subverted from within by greed and the lust for wealth, but it has also been exploited from without by powerful interests whose main purpose has been to entrench themselves in positions of power, and at the same time insulate themselves from accountability and justice.
This system has now become so convoluted and complex that no single nation or institution has the power to reform it. And as has happened in the past, when the institutions of humanity become corrupted from within, they become ripe for destruction from without.
The destruction predicted by St. John will be terrible indeed. For just as our economic system has tentacles that reach out to the farthest corners of the earth, so the destruction that will be inflicted upon ”Babylon” will also be world-wide in scope.
The devastation will be unimaginable, and it will leave merchants everywhere stupefied with terror. The angel revealed that this mystery woman called Babylon would be utterly destroyed. And she would not only be destroyed, but this would be accomplished “in a single hour”.
“Alas, alas that great city Babylon, that mighty city! for in one hour is thy judgment come”. (Revelation 18:10)
Babylon would be destroyed because she had perverted humanity and become the mother of all abominations. According to the revelation of St. John, our global system of international finance and trade will be destroyed by a giant asteroid that will strike the earth and plunge into the sea.
“And a mighty angel took up a stone like a great millstone, and cast it into the sea, saying, thus with violence shall that great city Babylon be thrown down, and shall be found no more at all”. (Revelation 18:21)
Anyway Mark, I’m sorry to have taken up so much time, but I felt it was important for listeners to understand why seeking after material wealth at the expense of spiritual growth is such a threat, and why people like Donald Trump may turn out to be demons in disguise.
Mark: I understand, and I appreciate that you took the trouble to explain it in all in such detail. But I have another question for you Allan.
Go ahead Mark.
Mark: In many of our discussions you have referred to the fact that the world is headed towards destruction, and that the “last days” will be accompanied by unimaginable suffering.
But if this is part of God’s plan, that everything is destroyed and we ourselves are doomed, then it seems like a pretty lousy plan to me. How do you respond to that?
You raise a very important question, and it is one that has troubled many Christians, and others, all over the world. And the answer is this. Perhaps I can say it best by quoting from a poem written by the American writer Max Ehrmann. The poem is titled “Desiderata”:
“Whether or not it is clear to you, no doubt the universe is unfolding as it should. Therefore be at peace with God, whatever you conceive Him to be. And whatever your labors and aspirations, in the noisy confusion of life, keep peace in your soul. With all its sham, drudgery and broken dreams, it is still a beautiful world. Be cheerful. Strive to be happy”.
According to the great Cosmic Plan that has been unfolding over the centuries, wickedness, hatred and violence will finally meet its end in an orgy of destruction. For only thus can the earth be truly cleansed and made ready for the golden age that is to come. This is how Thoth describes it:
“Then he will bring back the world to its first beauty, so that this world may again be worthy of reverence and admiration, and that God also, creator and restorer of so great a work, may be glorified by the men who shall live then in continual hymns of praise and benedictions.
“That is what the rebirth of the world will be: a renewal of all good things, a holy and most solemn restoration of Nature herself, imposed by force in the course of time…and by the will of God.”
When this renewal takes place, and a new earth emerges Phoenix-like from the ashes of the old, a saviour will emerge who will reign over the earth for a thousand years. And here is our proof.
Every major religion in the world speaks of a saviour who will come at the end of this present era, although they call him by different names. This is what the Oracle wrote in The Last Days of Tolemac.
The Son of man is the Great Redeemer spoken of in your holy books. He is the one who will come to save the faithful at the appointed end of the age. When the Son of man returns to the earth with power and great glory, he will be recognized by all peoples as “the one who is to come”.
Every religion has its own tradition of a saviour who will return to the earth at the end times. To those of the Christian faith, the Son of man will be Jesus, the living Christ.
To the Jews, he will be the long-awaited Messiah. To the Hindus, he will be Kalki, the tenth incarnation of Vishnu. To the Moslems, he will be the Mahdi, the expected one. To the Buddhists, he will be the Maitreya, the Buddha that is to come. To the Zoroastrians, the coming saviour will be the Saoshyant.
Among the ancient cultures of the world, the Son of man will be recognized as their long-awaited saviours. To the Incas of Peru, he will be welcomed as the return of Viracocha. To the Mayas of central America, he will be Kukulcan. To the Aztec people of Mexico, he will be the leader of the Gods Quetzalcoatl.
Every society will see in the coming of the Son of man the fulfillment of their holy books of prophecy. His coming will unite the world of the faithful as they inherit the long awaited thousand years of peace. He will be their King, and they will be his people.
Mark: I want to thank you Allan for a fascinating discussion, and especially for your insight into what is unfolding in our world. You have given me much to think about as well.
You have been listening to Allan Colston, author of the book The Last Days of Tolemac. This has been another in our series titled “Signs of the Times”.
Allan, AUDIO, Signs of the Times, December 5, 2018, 1:38 pm
My name is Mark Stevens. I am talking today with Allan Colston. He is the author of The Last Days of Tolemac, which is a book dealing with prophecy and other end-time events.
For those listeners who may be new to this topic, this is another in the series “Signs of the Times”. Welcome to the Podcast Allan. It seems like a long time since we last talked together.
It certainly does Mark. In fact, it has been far too long. But I have spent a lot of time thinking about what I should talk about today. And the thing that keeps occupying my mind is the degree to which things seem to be unravelling throughout the world.
I continue to be reminded of a conversation that I had a few years back with Scott Paton, who was my webmaster and designer of my Blog theme. At the end of that Podcast, which was entitled “The Age of Tyrants”, I offered a summary of the times in which we are now living.
Mark: I am interested to know what you had to say.
My assessment was as follows:
“And so, Scott, I guess I could sum all this up in the following words. We seem to be living in an age of tyrants, where an encroaching darkness is stealing across the planet, slowly swallowing up all the countries of the world, and enslaving good men and women everywhere as it does so”.
During that Podcast, I had focused on the events that were happening in Turkey, and the wave of repression that had spread across the country as Prime Minister (now President) Erdogan carried out his campaign of reprisals against anyone he accused of being involved in the attempted coup.
Since that time, many more countries have been swallowed up by authoritarian regimes, as their leaders have adopted tyrannical modes of government by brutally oppressing their citizens. In fact, they have gone to even greater lengths than before to silence their opponents.
So tyrannical leaders like Putin, Kim Jong-un and President Khamenei of Iran have been joined by people like Nicolas Maduro of Venezuela, President Duterte of the Philippines, Mohammad Bin Salman of Saudi Arabia, and now potentially, the newly elected President of Brazil, Jair Bolsonaro.
These leaders have not only killed political opponents within their own countries, but to an increasing extent, they have begun tracking them down wherever they happen to be around the world, and then murdering them in ever more ghoulish ways.
You will recall how Vladimir Putin used special operatives to track down the former GRU military intelligence colonel Sergei Skripal and his daughter Yulia, who were living in the English town of Salisbury, and apply the deadly nerve agent Novichok to their front door. Fortunately, both survived.
Then there was the assassination of Kim Jong-nam, half-brother of the current leader of North Korea, Kim Jong-un. He was killed when he was attacked by two women at Kuala Lumpur International Airport, who spread another nerve agent, this time VX, on his face in February 2017.
And as I related in my last Blog post, President Erdogan of Turkey even tried to bribe former National Security Advisor of the U.S., Michael Flynn, to forcibly kidnap Fethullah Gülen from his retreat in Pennsylvania and fly him to the Turkish prison island of Imrali – a plot which also, fortunately, failed.
And then, perhaps worst of all, we have the recent murder of dissident journalist Jamal Khashoggi, who was killed in the most brutal fashion at the Saudi Arabian embassy in Istanbul, by a squad of fifteen operatives who had flown in from Riyadh a few hours earlier.
In all of these cases the message conveyed by these dictators has been perfectly clear. You can run, but you can’t hide. And we will track you down wherever you happen to live. These countries cannot protect you, for we are not intimidated by them, nor do we fear their reprisals.
In fact, as the increasing numbers of tyrants all around the world show, democracy is in trouble all over the planet. People are assailed by fear. As history has demonstrated, tyranny is born out of fear. It is sustained by fear. It is ruled by fear, and it is ultimately destroyed by forces generated by fear.
Mark: So how do we overcome those fears?
Well, here lies the rub, Mark. These fears are not easy to overcome. This is not like the time of the Great Depression when President Roosevelt famously told the American people: “You have nothing to fear but fear itself”. These fears are very real. And they exist all around the world.
The basic underlying fear that people everywhere have is the fear of loss. It is the fear of losing their most prized possession, which is their cultural identity. It is the fear of having their very way of life overturned by intruders – those people who do not belong.
And we are seeing this happen all around the planet, as people everywhere are driven to escape their countries of origin, to try to find places of safety where they can live in peace. So, as more and more countries disintegrate into chaos, so more and more people are being forced to flee.
They are fleeing from poverty, unemployment, political oppression, civil war, religious discrimination, drugs and gang-related violence. Added together, these refugees have become a flood of humanity that has been washing over the planet, leaving hardly any country unaffected.
So we see migrants fleeing from failed states all across Africa trying to cross the Mediterranean to gain access to Europe. Refugees from the civil war in Syria trying to get into southern Europe through Turkey. Migrants from central America trying to get into the United States.
And just as understandably, there has been a counter-movement within all of those countries impacted by this influx, to close their borders and stem the tide of what they regard as illegal refugees. And this is where this fear plays into the hands of authoritarian leaders.
We have seen the rise to power of right-wing governments in places like Austria and Hungary, as a predictable reaction to Moslem migrants arriving from North Africa and the Middle East. Similar right-wing movements have even begun to undermine the coalition of Angela Merkel in Germany.
And that of course brings me to Donald Trump, who has built up his entire business and political career by using fear as his “Trump” card. You may recall, Mark, just before his inauguration, we had a lengthy discussion in which I laid out what could be expected from a Trump administration.
Mark: I remember it well. In fact, I was reading it again just a few weeks ago. I must say you really nailed it with your predictions. Almost everything that you said then has turned out to be correct.
You flatter me, Mark. But I will admit that most of what we discussed at that time has turned out to be true. And although I don’t regard myself as a prophet, much of what I said could easily have been predicted, largely because Donald Trump has since done exactly what he said he would do.
Whether or not he is suited, or qualified, for the job of President of the United States, Donald Trump has at least proved that he has a genius for playing on the fears of others, and then turning this to his political advantage. And he has used his talent to gain the highest office in the land.
For example, he has tapped into the fears of rural and blue-collar Americans in a way that no other politician has been able to match. And he has done so right from the moment that he first announced his candidacy for President. Do you recall what he said as he stood on the escalator at Trump Tower?
Let me remind you. “When Mexico sends its people, they’re not sending their best. They’re sending people that have lots of problems, and they’re bringing their problems with them. They’re bringing drugs. They’re bringing crime. They’re rapists. And some, I assume, are good people”.
This was a message that was clearly designed to resonate with all those living close to the border with Mexico, as well as with victims of violence, or of the drugs that are proliferating throughout the country. He even returned to this theme in his pitch just before the mid-term elections.
In fact, his campaign slogan was one that his followers clearly understood and acted upon. His call to “Make America Great Again” was a thinly veiled plot to “make America white again”, by focusing on the needs of white people, rather than those of Blacks, Hispanics, Moslems and other migrants.
He also promised to restore their former status and security, as well as their ability to guide their own fate, by assuring them that he would bring back those manufacturing jobs that had been lost as a result of globalisation, and what he called “stupid trade agreements” made by past administrations.
This of course was something that he was never going to be able to do, because the jobs that had been lost were the result of decisions taken by American multi-national corporations, to build new factories abroad where the price of labour was significantly lower than in the United States.
That ship left port about thirty years ago and is not about to return. Anyway, the reason I wanted to talk about Donald Trump is not so much about what he has or hasn’t done for those who support him. It’s about the way he has reshaped America, and the impact this is having on the rest of the world.
As you will recall Mark, at noon on January 20, 2017, Trump stood on the steps of the Capitol building in Washington and took the official oath of office. Placing his hand on the Bible, he swore to “preserve, protect and defend the Constitution of the United States”.
But what he has actually done since taking office is the complete opposite. And his actions have not only threatened the survival of the United States as the bastion of democracy, they have also undermined the security of the entire western world.
Mark: Well I must say, speaking as a Canadian, I am glad to be living on this side of the border.
Well said, Mark. Whether or not Donald Trump has ever read the American Constitution is a moot point. What is obvious is that the principles embodied by the Founding Fathers in this document are completely foreign to his way of doing things, and that he treats them with disdain.
Because Trump never had a proper education, and was never taught American civic history, he has never grasped the idea of the separation of powers, whereby the Federal government is divided into three separate but equal branches – the executive, the legislative and the judicial.
So when he assumed the office of president, he not only resented the idea of sharing power, but he actively resisted it. His idea of presidential power was based on examples of the strongmen that he praised so widely – men like Putin, Saddam Hussein and Kim Jong-un – who ruled by decree.
Not only that, but he has always been infuriated by anyone who dared to challenge his authority, or who criticized him, either privately or in public. The very idea of freedom of speech or the freedom of the press as guaranteed under the First Amendment, is anathema to him.
So we see his invective against the press, and his continuing diatribe against media organisations like CNN, NBC, CBS and others, whom he accuses of being purveyors of “fake news”. He has even gone so far as to brand those who criticize him as “enemies of the people”.
And we are not just talking here about a smear campaign directed against his opponents. When Trump describes certain organisations or journalists as “enemies” of the people, the danger that this poses to democracy is that millions of his supporters firmly believe this to be true as well.
So instead of upholding the constitution by protecting the freedom of speech and of the press, he has split the country into two opposing camps – those who believe him, and those who believe his critics. But then that has been his mode of operation ever since he took office.
He simply picks an issue – any issue – and then turns it into a source of conflict whereby one side is pitted against another. A recent example of this was his specious issue with NFL players who “took a knee” during the playing of the national anthem at football games.
He does this partly to dominate the daily news cycle, or to divert attention away from something he would rather not talk about, or simply to stir up opposition. And, as anyone who has worked in the present White House will affirm, Trump has turned the place into a war zone.
To illustrate my point Mark, how many people do you think have left the White House staff over the course of the last two years, either as a result of being fired, or of being forced out as a result of fraud or some other illegal activity?
Mark: Well you’ve got me there, Allan. But there must be quite a few.
Quite a few is right. Since he took office, a record number of 141 people have left. And of these, more than half were high-ranking staff – including people like Michael Flynn, H.R. McMaster, Rex Tillerson, Tom Price, Gary Cohn, Reince Priebus, Steve Bannon, Rob Porter, Sean Spicer and a host of others.
Most of them have gone on record as saying that the White House has become a toxic place to work, not only because of the stubbornness and stupidity of the president, but also because of his well publicised paroxysms of rage, some of which have been known to persist for days.
These departures have spawned a whole series of best-selling books, whose titles speak for themselves. Titles like Fire and Fury by Michael Wolff, Fear by Bob Woodward, Media Madness by Howard Kurtz, It’s Even Worse Than You Think by David Cay Johnston, and Everything Trump Touches Dies by Rick Wilson, to say nothing of Unhinged by Omarosa Manigault Newman.
It is hardly surprising therefore that this conflict within the White House has led to extreme partisanship within Congress, as well as in the country as a whole. America is more divided today than it has ever been before, and this poses a significant threat to its survival as a democratic state.
You may have heard the story associated with Ben Franklin, one of the Founding Fathers of America, who, when approached by a group of citizens asking him what sort of government the Constitutional Convention of 1787 had created, reputedly replied: “A republic, if you can keep it”.
We all know the quote, often (but mistakenly) attributed to Thomas Jefferson, saying, “the price of liberty is eternal vigilance”. But whatever its origin, its truth cannot be denied. Unless we the people are always alert to the dangers posed by authoritarian rule, our democratic form of government can easily be lost.
If there should come a time when a large proportion of the American people comes to distrust the media, believing that what they read in the press or see on TV is “fake news”, then all hope of maintaining a free democratic society will be lost. And that time may not be far off.
And then of course Mark, there is America’s standing in the world. From being the unquestioned leader of the free world, and the premier defender of democracy throughout the west, Trump has reduced the nation to a laughing stock abroad, as we saw during his recent speech at the United Nations.
Mark: I was going to ask you about that. What do you think of his policy of “America first”?
I’m glad you raised the subject, Mark. Again, because Trump has never studied world history, and has never bothered to review American foreign policy since the end of the second world war, he remains blithely unaware of the crucial part played by the western alliance in preserving the peace.
As we have seen, he has no time for multi-lateral alliances with foreign governments, especially among western countries. In fact, he has systematically insulted western leaders, and undermined the work of organisations like NATO and the G-7.
Wherever possible, Trump has used the power of his office to withdraw from agreements like the Paris Climate Accord and the Joint Nuclear Agreement with Iran, believing that America was better off charting its own course of action and abandoning its former allies.
So we see China stepping in to fill the vacuum in the Far East, and Russia taking control of the Middle East. The most recent conference that was held to decide the fate of the Syrian province of Idlib involved four countries – Russia, Turkey, France and Germany. The United States played no part.
And during the recent ceremonies held to honour the fallen on the 100th anniversary of the ending of the first world war, we had the question being raised by President Macron of France, as to whether it was now time to form a European army, since they could no longer rely on the United States.
All these signs point to America’s growing isolation in the world, and the degree to which western countries have begun to go their own way is an indicator that there has been a serious breakdown between themselves and the U.S., something that was quite unheard of before Donald Trump took office.
And then there has been the bizarre “bromance” between Trump and the North Korean dictator Kim Jong-un. After their meeting in Singapore, Trump returned to the U.S. with a modern equivalent of Neville Chamberlain’s famous “peace in our time” declaration, shortly before the outbreak of WW2.
The latest reports coming out of North Korea do nothing to validate Trump’s conviction that the country is on the path to full denuclearisation. Instead, they suggest a hardening of their position, and that nothing further will be done until America first agrees to remove all international sanctions.
So although the threat of nuclear conflict between the U.S. and North Korea may have diminished in rhetoric, it has not gone away. And given the history of inflammatory outbursts between their two leaders, there is no guarantee that this issue will not suddenly explode once again.
As I say Mark, we are living in dangerous times, and the administration of Donald Trump seems to be more of a symptom of the breakdown of international order, than of any hope of making the world a better place – let alone restoring America to its former “greatness”.
Mark: And what do you think of Donald Trump as a leader?
As I pointed out, one of the things that Trump likes to bang on and on about is what he calls “fake news”, which turns out to be anything that he happens to disagree with. What makes this supremely ironic, is that he himself is the very epitome of everything that is fake.
There is absolutely nothing about the man that is genuine. Practically everything that he says or does is a fraud. And the remarkable thing about this is that his supporters neither seem to notice or care. Even his face is a disguise, with his dyed hair and his orange-coloured make-up.
According to the official medical report released by the White House in January of this year, President Trump stands 75 inches in height (6’ 3”) and weighs 239 pounds. This has proved to be yet another announcement that has been greeted with wild guffaws around the planet.
In the official photograph of world leaders attending the G-7 summit earlier this year in Quebec, Donald Trump is seen standing next to Justin Trudeau, who is known to be 6’2” in height. Yet Trump is clearly shorter than the Canadian Premier.
Anyone who has seen a photo of Donald Trump playing tennis can see how he billows out of his trunks. And if he is not as tall as he claims to be, then even a weight of 239 pounds would make him obese by BMI standards. But that would come as no surprise to anyone who is familiar with his diet.
In a book written by his former campaign manager Corey Lewandowski, his customary lunch consisted of two Big Mac hamburgers, two Filet-O-fish, French fries and a chocolate milkshake. Add to that his preference for diet cokes, sometimes as many as a dozen a day, and one can see why he is in trouble.
Any 72-year-old who consumes up to 2,500 calories a day, including more than 3,500 milligrams of sodium, cannot be headed for a good outcome health-wise. And then there is the matter of his psychological health, or as some would say, his sanity. Incidentally Mark, do you know how his father died?
Mark: No, I can’t say that I do.
His father Fred died in 1999, at the age of 93, from pneumonia. But for the last six years of his life, he had been suffering from Alzheimer’s disease. Because of this, many people today have begun to wonder whether Donald is already beginning to show early signs of this condition.
YouTube is full of videos where he seems to be lost, unaware of what he is supposed to be doing, rambling on incoherently, or of making glaring errors, such as the time when he visited the town of Paradise, site of the recent California wild-fires, and repeatedly referred to it as “Pleasure”.
No other President in the history of the United States has been guilty of so many mental lapses. Had they happened to anyone else, they might not seem so bad. But when they are associated with the leader of the free world with the keys to the nuclear codes, then all of us have reason to be alarmed.
What makes his claims of “fake news” so laughable, is that he continues to bolster his arguments with facts that are blatantly and demonstrably false. Again, this hardly seems to bother his supporters, who would be incensed if these same “facts” were to be advanced by someone like Hillary Clinton.
The Washington Post has kept a running record of these lies. In August of this year, they issued a report indicating that in the 558 days since he had taken office, President Trump had made 4,229 false or misleading claims, and that this tally was growing exponentially larger by the day.
Media commentators have devoted endless hours dispelling these false claims, but to little avail. What they have yet to realise is that, unlike any previous President, Donald Trump is impervious to these charges, because he has no moral compass, and therefore no basis for evaluating “truth”.
“Facts”, in his world, have no fundamental meaning, and he himself attaches no value to them. Ever since he launched his business career, he has been content to say anything that crosses his mind, as long as it advances his position or validates his argument.
As an example, just before the mid-term elections, he said things like – the Republican Party is planning a 10% tax cut for all middle-income earners – or the Republican Party will safeguard the health of everyone with a pre-existing condition, when there was absolutely no factual basis to what he said.
So the extent of the Republican tax cut, or the size of the crowd attending his inauguration, is based on what he thinks, rather than what the facts show. And when asked by a reporter during his election campaign why he said things that were plainly untrue, Trump replied: “I just don’t care”.
And this goes to the heart of the problem in dealing with Donald Trump, and why his political opponents and the media have been driven to distraction. He comes up with false statements, and when challenged, either doubles down or denies that he ever said them or changes the subject.
Clearly, there is nothing in the history of the United States that has prepared the American public for a man like Donald Trump. But if I can use a play on words here Mark, there has at least been a “precedent” for this president. Have you ever heard of a man by the name of H.L. Mencken?
Mark: No Allan, I can’t say that I have.
Henry Louis Mencken was an American journalist. He was born in 1880 and died in 1956. He was a man of many talents, not least of which was that he was a satirist, meaning that he used humour, irony and exaggeration to ridicule people, especially in matters of contemporary politics.
Anyway, back in July of 1920, Mencken wrote the following prophetic lines:
“As democracy is perfected, the office (of the Presidency) represents more and more closely, the inner soul of the people. We move toward a lofty ideal. On some great and glorious day, the plain folks of the land will reach their heart’s desire at last, and the White House will be adorned by a downright moron”.
Why I consider this comment to be prophetic is that shortly before he was fired, former Secretary of State Rex Tillerson was accused of referring to Donald Trump as an “expletive-deleted moron”. And although Tillerson refused to admit to having said this, he also never specifically denied it.
So if Tillerson is right Mark, and there finally is a moron in the White House, then perhaps it is time for the official acronym for the President Of The United States to be changed from POTUS to MOTUS !
But on a more serious note, we need to ask ourselves the question: how did the people ever come to elect a man like Donald Trump in the first place? Was this just chance, or was it part of some grand cosmic design? I hope to answer this in Part Two of our discussion.
Mark: You have been listening to Allan Colston, author of the book The Last Days of Tolemac. We do hope you will join us next time when we continue our talk on this important subject. Allan Colston can be reached by Email at tolemac@shaw.ca
Allan, AUDIO, Signs of the Times, November 21, 2018, 1:46 pm
This is a tale of two clerics. Although they were born and raised on opposite sides of the world, their lives were fated to become intertwined in a way that neither of them could possibly have imagined, for they have both become key players in the fulfilment of Bible prophecy.
Fethullah Gulen
The name of the first cleric is Muhammed Fethullah Gülen. Gülen was born in the tiny village of Korucuk, not far from the Turkish city of Erzurum. His actual date of birth however, is uncertain. While some say that he was born on 10 November 1938, others contend that this should be 27 April 1941.
According to his biographer, the reason for this difference is that his parents waited for three years to register his birth. Critics however, say that the earlier date was deliberately chosen to coincide with the death of Mustafa Kemal Atatürk, the founder of modern Turkey.
The Early Years
His father was an Imam, an Islamic leader of a mosque according to the Sunni tradition, while his mother was a teacher of the Quran in the village in which they lived. Although he lacked a formal education, the young Gülen was given a religious education when his family later moved to Erzurum.
It is said that he gave his first sermon at the age of 14, and that he was particularly attracted to the teachings of a Kurdish Sunni Muslim theologian named Said Nursi, who taught that modern science and logic was the way of the future, and that science should be taught in all religious schools.
Having completed his religious education, Gülen went on to become an Imam like his father. In 1966, he moved from Erzerum to a mosque in Izmir, a city on the eastern shores of the Mediterranean Sea. It was here that he soon captivated congregations with his inspiring orations.
While his sermons were devoted mostly to matters of the Islamic faith, he nevertheless urged his listeners to embrace capitalism and to combine their education with social activism.
Because the city of Izmir consisted primarily of Muslims who were drawn to western ideas, his teachings soon attracted millions of followers, both within the country and abroad. These teachings were the foundation of what became known as the Gülen movement.
The Gülen Movement
Also known as Hizmet (the Turkish word for “service”), the Gülen movement became a transnational Islamic social movement that was founded on the principles of peace within a civil society, as well as universal access to education based, as we have seen, on modern science and logic.
Over the years the Gülen movement has founded schools, universities, student organizations, radio and television studios and newspapers, and its members include students, teachers, businessmen, academics, journalists and other professionals.
By the year 2017, it was estimated that over a million Turks had been educated in Hizmet schools and universities, including the son-in-law of Recep Erdogan, the current president of Turkey. These schools can be found today in more than 160 countries all over the globe.
Because this movement is not a centralized organization, but rather a set of loosely organized networks of people inspired by Gülen, it is difficult to say accurately how many people may have been involved. But a 1997 estimate stated that up to four million people had been influenced by his ideas.
Gülen continued to perform his clerical duties up until 1981, when he retired from his formal duties as an Imam. For the next twenty years or so he devoted himself to giving sermons in various Turkish cities, as he travelled around the country spreading his ideas.
Moving to America
Early in 1999 however, Gülen developed serious health problems and went to the United States for treatment. Following his recovery, he applied to become a permanent resident in the United States. Although ultimately successful, his application for a Green Card was mired in controversy.
Gülen initially applied for permanent residence on the basis that he was “an alien of extraordinary ability” specializing in the field of education. This application was rejected by the U.S. Citizenship and Immigration Service on the grounds that he had no degree and had published no academic works.
Yet despite the objections of the FBI, the State Department and the Department of Homeland Security, his application was finally approved as a result of personal letters of recommendation written on his behalf by three former operatives of the CIA.
Gülen subsequently retired to a 25-acre wooded estate known as the Golden Generation Worship and Retreat Centre, which was run by members of his movement that was located a few miles from Saylorsburg, a tiny village in Pennsylvania. He has remained there to this day.
Having never married, he continues to lead a spartan and reclusive life. His living quarters consist of two small rooms, one of which has a mattress on the floor, a prayer mat, a desk, bookshelves and a treadmill. Nearby is a hall which residents use as a mosque.
Today Gülen spends his time writing and studying Islamic scripture. He also gives speeches that are broadcast to members of the movement around the world, as well as occasional interviews with journalists and media outlets that are not affiliated with the Hizmet movement.
One might have imagined that over time the name of Fethullah Gülen would have faded into obscurity, especially in the country of his birth. Instead his name has been reviled and he has become the central figure in a brutal reign of terror that has manifested on the other side of the world.
The Emerging Tyrant
Gülen had always professed his support for a Turkish state that promoted a tolerant form of Islam emphasizing altruism, education and hard work. For this reason, he was an early supporter of the Justice and Development Party (AKP) founded in 2001 by Recep Erdogan.
However, things began to change in 2013 when the AKP was accused of a massive corruption scandal involving both Erdogan and his son, who was living in Italy at the time while studying for a PhD at the Bologna campus of America’s Johns Hopkins University.
Turkish prosecutors named 14 people, including several family members of cabinet ministers, of bribery, fraud, money-laundering and corruption, accusing them of being involved in a scheme designed to bypass United States sanctions on Iran.
It was at this time that five audio recordings appeared on YouTube in which Erdogan appeared to be telling his son to hide very large sums of money. Although Erdogan later acknowledged that the voice was his, he claimed that the recordings had been tampered with to include false information.
Erdogan adamantly insisted that neither he nor his son were involved in any wrongdoing. Instead, he maintained that these accusations were instigated by the Hizment movement, and that it was Fethullah Gülen himself who was to blame for spreading these malicious rumours.
The Abortive Coup
It was in the aftermath of this uproar that the ruling party announced that Erdogan would resign as Prime Minister and stand for the office of President in the upcoming elections. And in August 2014 he was elected with a majority of 52% of the popular vote.
Erdogan had already begun to reveal strong authoritarian tendencies before he was elected President, but it was his response to the attempted coup just a few years later that completed his transformation from pragmatic politician to yet another ruthless dictator.
On 15th July 2016, while President Erdogan was on holiday at Marmaris, a tourist resort on the shoreline of the Turkish Riviera, a group of military officers launched an attempted coup. Fortunately, Erdogan was able to fly back to Istanbul in time to quell this rebellion.
No sooner had this insurrection been suppressed when Erdogan again blamed Fethullah Gülen for instigating this attempted coup. What made this accusation so surprising to outsiders was that Gülen was living in Pennsylvania at the time and had remained there since 1999.
Undaunted by this absurdity, Erdogan immediately turned his wrath on all those who he claimed were followers of the Gülen movement in Turkey. What followed was nothing short of a nation-wide pogrom directed at anyone deemed to be an enemy of the state, as defined by Erdogan himself.
Calling this attempted coup “a gift from God”, Erdogan initiated a state-wide purge designed to cleanse the nation of any sympathizer of the Hizmet movement, by dehumanising its prominent members and placing them in custody. He even freed existing prisoners in order to make room for them.
To date Erdogan’s government has dismissed more than 150,000 judges, teachers, police and civil servants. On April 18, 2018, the Turkish Interior Minister announced that 169,013 people had been the subject of legal proceedings, and that 77,081 had been imprisoned.
The Failed Abduction
Not content with directing his wrath at citizens within his own country, Erdogan also directed his agents to target and abduct others who were living outside of the country. His reach even extended to a Turkish educator who had been living in Mongolia for the past twenty-five years.
Although the Turkish government insists that it only extradites suspected Gülenists with the permission of the foreign governments involved, this was clearly not the case with educator Veysel Akcay, who ran a network of international schools associated with the Gülen movement.
Early one morning in July 2018, Mr. Akcay was approached by three masked men near his apartment building in the capital, Ulan Bator, when he was bundled into a Toyota minivan and taken to the airport. A short time later, a Bombardier jet operated by the Turkish Air Force landed there.
Mr Akcay was lucky. As word leaked out about his abduction, his friends and family congregated at the airport. Later that afternoon, the Mongolian government ordered the plane to be grounded. Mr. Akcay was released, and the jet fled back to Turkey without him. But others have not been so fortunate.
Earlier in 2018, Turkey’s National Intelligence Organization (MIT) announced that six Turkish nationals had been captured in Kosovo and had been flown back to Turkey on the same day. This was confirmed by The Turkish Foreign Minister who said that over 100 people had been abducted abroad.
Naturally, the concern within the Hizmet movement was whether Gülen himself would be abducted from his retreat in Pennsylvania. And according to a report in The Wall Street Journal on November 10, 2017, an attempt was made to do so shortly after President Trump was elected.
The alleged plan involved now disgraced former National Security Advisor to the President Michael Flynn and his son. According to this report, Flynn was to be paid 15 million dollars to forcibly kidnap Gülen and fly him in a private jet to the Turkish prison island of Imrali.
According to former CIA Director James Woolsey, this was “a covert attempt in the dead of night to whisk this guy away”. For his efforts, which fortunately did not come to fruition, General Flynn and his son have since become subjects of a criminal investigation by Special Counsel Robert Mueller.
The Second Cleric
Andrew and Norine Brunson
And that brings us to the second cleric in this convoluted story. His name is Andrew Brunson. Brunson hails from Black Mountain, a small town located on the outskirts of the Pisgah National Forest in the American state of North Carolina, where he was born in 1968.
After leaving school, Brunson attended Trinity Evangelical Divinity School just north of Chicago, where he gained a Master of Arts degree in 1991. He then went on to become a pastor in the Evangelical Presbyterian Church, where he expressed an interest in serving the church abroad.
It was in the Biblical town of Smyrna, now known as the Turkish city of Izmir, that the lives of these two clerics first became intertwined. For two years after graduating from Trinity, Brunson and his wife Norine moved to Turkey where he served as pastor of the Resurrection Church in Izmir.
For the next 23 years, Brunson continued to live in Izmir where he raised three children while ministering to a small Protestant congregation of about two dozen people. Having lived there happily for so long, he finally applied to the Turkish government for permanent residency in 2016.
On the morning of 7 October 2016, Brunson and his wife were summoned to the Police station in Izmir. Thinking that this was in connection with their residency application, both went along willingly. But when they got there, Andrew and Norine were taken into custody.
To their surprise and dismay, they were told that they had engaged in missionary activities that were “against national security”, and that because of this they and their family would be deported. Although Norine was released thirteen days later, Andrew remained in prison.
On 11 December 2016, he was moved to a counterterrorism centre and charged with being a spy with links to the outlawed Kurdistan People’s Party (KPP), as well as being a member of FETO, the Fethullah Gülen Terrorist Organization, as President Erdogan liked to call it.
In short, it soon became apparent that Brunson had become enmeshed in Erdogan’s web of terror following the abortive coup. Because Brunson was an American citizen, his wife Norine made repeated appeals to the Trump administration to intercede on his behalf.
In March 2017, then Secretary of State Rex Tillerson visited Turkey where he met with senior officials, including Erdogan himself. He also had a 20-minute meeting with Norine, who expressed her gratitude on Facebook for the chance to discuss her husband’s incarceration.
Although a State Department spokesman would not confirm whether Tillerson had discussed the case of Andrew Brunson in his talks with Turkish officials, there was at least one good outcome from his visit. On 25 July 2018, Brunson was released from prison and held under house arrest.
Presidential Fireworks
After Rex Tillerson had returned to the United States following his visit to Turkey, the US position regarding the continued captivity of pastor Brunson was clearly expressed by John R. Bass, the US Ambassador to Turkey, who had this to say on the matter:
“He appears to be held simply because he’s an American citizen who as a man of faith was in contact with a range of people in this country who he was trying to help, in keeping with his faith”.
And Mike Pompeo, who had replaced Tillerson as Secretary of State, followed this up with a statement of his own. “We have seen no credible evidence against Mr. Brunson and call on Turkish authorities to resolve this case immediately in a transparent and fair manner”.
It did not take long for President Trump to weigh in with a tweet of his own.
“Pastor Andrew Brunson, a fine gentleman and Christian leader in the United States, is on trial and being persecuted in Turkey for no reason. They call him a Spy, but I am more a Spy than he is. Hopefully he will be allowed to come home to his beautiful family where he belongs!”
Trump then followed this up with a tweet that was copied to Erdogan’s personal account, saying: “A total disgrace that Turkey will not release a respected U.S. Pastor, Andrew Brunson, from prison. He has been held hostage far too long”.
Trump went on to say that the US would impose “large sanctions” on Turkey if they did not comply. This threat triggered an immediate response from the Turkish authorities. The Turkish Foreign Minister Mevlut Cavusoglu issued a tweet of his own, saying:
“No one dictates to Turkey. We will never tolerate threats from anybody. Rule of law is for everyone; no exception”.
A spokesman for the Foreign Ministry, Hami Aksoy, said that the American threats were “unacceptable”, and that “it is impossible to accept the U.S. Administration’s threatening messages, which totally disregard our alliance and friendly relations between our countries”.
Never one to back away from a fight, President Trump followed this up by demonstrating that his words were no idle threat, and by issuing the following tweet on 10 August 2018:
“I have just authorized a doubling of Tariffs on Steel and Aluminum with respect to Turkey as their currency, the Turkish Lira, slides rapidly downward against our very strong Dollar! Aluminum will now be 20% and Steel 50%”.
President Erdogan responded by announcing that pastor Brunson would not be released, and that countervailing tariffs would be levied on a variety of US imports, including cars, tobacco and alcoholic drinks, and that Turkey would in future boycott all American electronic goods.
All of this prompted Asli Aydintasbas, a fellow of the European Council on Foreign Relations, to wonder where this outburst between two combustible presidents would lead:
“The combination of the personalities of Mr. Erdogan and Mr. Trump leave everyone guessing as to the outcome. It is possible that, in seven or eight months, Brunson will be sitting in his home in North Carolina, Atilla will be back in Turkey, and Trump will be raving about Erdogan on Twitter once again.”
Ms. Aydintasbas was referring here to a proposed deal to exchange Andrew Brunson for Mehmet Hakan Atilla, a Turkish banker who had been convicted by an American court and was now in a US prison. However, she went on to warn:
“But it is also possible that Turkey will become the next Venezuela, clashing with the West and dealing with a dire economic downturn. No one can be sure.”
West Versus East
The North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO) was founded shortly after the end of the second world war. It was founded at a time when the cold war was at its peak, and the Soviet Union was swallowing up surrounding countries and subjecting them to communist rule.
NATO was a defensive pact signed by twelve countries. It was formed to defend themselves against future Soviet aggression. Article Five of this treaty stated that an attack on any single member state would be regarded as an attack on them all and would be met with armed force if necessary.
Although the original pact involved the United States and Canada, together with ten allied countries in western Europe, it has grown over the years to embrace 29-member states. All of them are located in the west, with the exception of one country, and that is Turkey.
Turkey joined NATO in February 1952. Its membership was of primary importance because of its location. It not only flanked the Soviet Union, but it also controlled access to the Black Sea where the Soviet navy was based, through the narrow strait known as the Dardanelles.
Over the years Turkey has remained a staunch member of NATO, and at one stage even considered applying for membership of the European Union. The Incirlik Air Base on its southern border provided NATO with a vital launching pad for its bombing attacks on ISIS in Syria in 2016.
Outside of the United States, Turkey has by far the largest number of active troops among all the member nations that make up NATO today. In fact, its army is greater than that of the UK, France, Germany, Italy and Spain combined. It continues to be a crucial bulwark against Russian aggression.
You would think that President Trump might have stopped to consider the likely consequences before launching his economic sanctions against the Turkish government, simply to secure the release of Protestant pastor Andrew Brunson. Instead, it has merely strengthened their resolve to defy him.
For whatever the fate of these two clerics may happen to be, the outcome of this contest of wills is bound to be the same. It will drive Turkey away from the West and into the arms of the Russians, exactly as the Old Testament prophet Ezekiel predicted over two thousand years ago.
Allan, Signs of the Times, September 7, 2018, 10:53 am
Q: How have comets affected the earth in the past?
A: Many comets have passed close to the earth within the recorded memory of your ancient people. All of them have produced dramatic effects upon the surface of the earth, including hurricanes, earthquakes, tidal waves and volcanic eruptions.
Although the sight of a comet in the night sky may be rare today, there was a time in your past when new comets appeared every few days. Some of them were even bright enough to be seen during the day. In the early days of the Roman Empire more than fifty comets were seen in a single year.
Most of the comets that have passed close to the earth have been smaller than the earth. Some of them have been equal in size like the comet in the days of Moses, while some have been even larger.
When these gigantic comets have passed close to the earth the gravitational interaction between these bodies have caused mountains to rise, land masses to sink below the waves, and entire seas to be displaced. They have even changed the orbit of the earth itself.
Q: How has the orbit of the earth changed?
A: The length of your year has not always been as it is now. It has changed many times in the history of humanity on earth.
These changes were a constant source of alarm among early societies as they not only changed the times of the seasons, but they also made it necessary to alter the calendar itself. This was why ancient man was so obsessed with observing the motions of the sun, the moon and the planets.
According to your present calendar the earth takes just over 365 days to travel around the sun. But there was a time not that long ago when the year was 360 days. Not only is this not generally known by your astronomers, but recorded evidence bearing this out has been ignored by your scholars.
References to a year of 360 days in length can be found in the ancient records of India, Persia, Babylon, Chaldea, Assyria, Egypt and China. The early Greeks and Romans also wrote about a time when the year lasted 360 days, as did the Incas and the Mayas.
Scientists and scholars of today prefer to believe that the astronomical records of these ancient societies were wrong, rather than consider the possibility that the present orbit of the earth might not be as stable as they have been taught.
In yet earlier times the orbit of the earth around the sun was shorter still. In fact, it has changed many times. Not only has the path of the earth around the sun changed as a result of close encounters with comets, but these encounters have also led to changes in the axis of the earth.
Q: What do you mean by a change in the axis of the earth?
A: If you look up at the sky at night you will notice that there is a point in the sky around which all the stars seem to move.
In the northern hemisphere this point is close to the star called Polaris in the constellation of the Little Bear. In the southern hemisphere there is no actual star at this point, but it is close to the group of stars that form the Southern Cross.
Your astronomers believe that the axis of the earth has not changed since the planet was created. But less than 4,000 years ago the axis of the earth was different from what it is today, and the northern axis of the earth pointed towards the constellation of the Great Bear.
This shift caused the earth to tilt on its axis. Lands that once were at the top of the world were suddenly displaced to more temperate regions, while lands that previously enjoyed a mild climate suddenly found themselves moved into the polar regions.
This sudden change in the axis of the earth took place within a matter of hours. That is why the carcasses of animals like woolly mammoths, that once lived in temperate regions of the world, have been found buried under polar ice with food that only grows in temperate climates still undigested in their stomachs.
This shift in the axis of the earth was so swift that these animals did not even have time to digest their food before they became victims of the cold.
Your scientists do not think such rapid changes in the axis of the earth are possible, as they believe that this would lead to the immediate extinction of all life on earth. Yet such a change has not only happened, but it has happened within the recorded history of mankind.
Not long after Moses had led the children of Israel out of Egypt, the same comet that was the cause of the plagues returned to trouble mankind again. This time the comet caused the entire earth to tilt on its axis. This shift in the axis of the earth was not only witnessed by people at the time, but they also lived to tell the story.
The description of this event was recorded in the Book of Joshua:
“And it came to pass, as they fled from before Israel, and were going down to Bethhoron, that the Lord cast down great stones from heaven upon them unto Azekah, and they died: they were more which died with hailstones than they whom the children of Israel slew with the sword.”
“Then spake Joshua to the Lord in the day when the Lord delivered up the Amorites before the children of Israel, and he said in the sight of Israel, Sun, stand thou still upon Gibeon; and thou, Moon, in the valley of Ajalon.”
“And the sun stood still, and the moon stayed, until the people had avenged themselves upon their enemies. Is not this written in the book of Jasher? So the sun stood still in the midst of heaven, and hasted not to go down about a whole day.” (Joshua 10: 11-13)
So according to the story told by Joshua, at a time when the earth was once again being bombarded by fiery meteorites, the sun stood still for a period of “about a whole day”.
On the other side of the ocean, the people of the Yucatan had a tradition that was recorded in the “Annals of Cuauhtitlan”. According to this tradition, there was a great catastrophe in the distant past that caused a prolonged period of darkness, and a night that did not end for eighteen hours.
Q: Will there be another change in the axis of the earth?
A: Yes. It is necessary to bring about a correction in the axis of the earth, so that it can fulfill the promise of the new golden age on earth. The present axis of the earth is out of alignment with the forces radiating from the great Central Sun around which your solar system revolves.
Once the poles of the earth have been correctly aligned, this will allow the incoming forces from the Central Sun to be balanced directly over the receiving centers of the earth.
When this change takes place those who are on the spiritual path of life will be infused with healing energies that will radiate throughout their physical bodies. This will bring a greater sense of understanding of their true purpose in life, and a greater sense of kinship with those who share the path with them.
This change in the axis of the earth will also lead to dramatic changes on the surface of the earth and in the heavens. As recorded in the Book of Revelation, the coming golden age on earth will bring “a new earth, and a new heaven”.
Those who fear that the cataclysms caused by the close encounter with this comet will lead to the destruction of all life on earth need not worry. This will not be the end of the world. But it will be the end of the “old world”.
It will also be the beginning of a “new earth”. The earth will be “made new” by the changes caused by the comet. The death throes of the dying age will be the birth pangs of the glorious new age that has for so long been predicted.
Because the axis of the earth will have changed, those who look into the skies in the new age will see a “new heaven”. They will see changes in the stars because when the poles shift, the polar star changes with it, as well as the positions of the constellations of the zodiac.
Q: What will happen when the poles shift?
A: There will be dramatic changes in both the Arctic and Antarctic regions of the world when the earth tilts on its axis, as well as in many other parts of the world. These changes will take place suddenly, as the American psychic Edgar Cayce foretold in 1934.
Once the axis of the earth shifts and the earth begins to tilt, the continent of Antarctica will move into a more temperate latitude from where it is today. Antarctica will once again become a habitable land in the New Age that is about to unfold on earth.
Antarctica was not always buried under the ice. It was once the home of a thriving culture before the last axis shift. The same catastrophe that caused the mammoths to be displaced from their temperate lands to the frozen regions of the north, caused the people of Antarctica to be buried under ice at the bottom of the world.
Explorers who visit the land that was once known as Antarctica in the coming age will no doubt be surprised to find evidence of previous human habitation, as well as the ruins of great civilisation boasting magnificent cities and temples.
When Antarctica moves to a more temperate latitude similar changes will be taking place in the northern hemisphere. The land of Canada will shift to a more southerly latitude, and those parts of Canada that now lie buried under ice will become places of great beauty in the coming age.
Q: What other changes will take place on earth?
A: The entire surface of the earth will be changed. The shapes of the continents themselves will change. Some land masses will sink below the seas. Others will rise from the deep. The earth will be transformed when the seas rage and the mountains again “skip like young lambs”.
To understand why these changes must take place and why certain lands will be affected more than others, it is necessary to remember what “karmic cleansing” means and why it happens.
When thoughts of negativity lead to acts of violence and death, these negative vibrations become linked with those places on earth where these deadly acts occurred.
In the higher dimensions of life this negativity becomes imprinted on these places, and this negative influence remains for long periods of time. These negative vibrations then continue to harm the people who live there until they are removed.
People who are psychically gifted will know from personal experience how certain places like ancient battlefields still harbour powerful negative influences. The purpose of karmic cleansing is to purify these places so that the negative influences associated with them are permanently erased.
When these negative vibrations grow to the point where they affect large parts of the earth, they can only be removed by means of global transformation. Only by means of global cleansing can those people who inherit the “new earth” live free from the negative influences of the past.
Nature has many ways to cleanse the earth. In past ages it has used the forces of fire, wind, water and ice to purify the earth. But the most common way is by water.
When parts of the land become sufficiently contaminated by the negativity caused by continuing acts of violence, hatred and oppression, these lands are cleansed by sinking beneath the waves. It is the action of water over many thousands of years of time that gradually washes away the mental stains of the past.
Sometimes this cleansing process can be achieved by burying the land under ice for long periods of time, or by means of hurricanes or through the purifying effects of fire. In the coming cleansing that is about to take place on the earth, all of these forces will be used.
The agent for all the changes that will take place on earth will be the comet referred to in the Book of Revelation as “Wormwood”. The asteroid that emerges from the tail of this comet will be the “great mountain burning with fire” that will plunge into the sea. The devastation caused by these two bodies will create “a new earth and a new heaven”.
Q: How big will the “great mountain” be that falls into the sea?
A: Although the comet that is coming will be as large as the earth, the rock that will fall into the sea will be tiny by comparison. Yet it will still be large enough to cause great devastation on the earth. In the Book of Revelation, John calls this asteroid a “great mountain”.
“And the second angel sounded, and as it were a great mountain burning with fire was cast into the sea.” (Revelation 8: 8)
By an interesting coincidence, Nostradamus used the same words that appear in the Bible (great mountain) in a quatrain that he wrote about a future asteroid that would strike the earth.
“The great mountain, seven stadia round,After peace, war, famine, inundation.It will spread far, drowning great countries,Even those of great age and mighty foundations.” (Century One: 69)
Nostradamus gives the size of this “great mountain” as “seven stadia round”. The “stadium” was a unit of measurement used by the Greeks and Romans. “Seven stadia round” would make this asteroid nearly a mile wide.
An asteroid of this size traveling at a speed of many thousands of miles an hour would cause global devastation, especially if it were to crash into the ocean.
Note: Those readers interested in learning more about this asteroid and where it will strike, should refer to Part Six of The Day of the Lord.
Allan, Questions and Answers, August 24, 2018, 9:49 am
Q: Could this comet have also caused the parting of the Red Sea?
A: Yes. The comet that was responsible for the plagues that descended on Egypt, causing Pharaoh to order the Israelites to be set free, also produced the miracle that saved them from Pharaoh’s charioteers that had been ordered to pursue them.
These charioteers caught up with them on the shores of the Red Sea.
It may seem strange that a body of water that is today coloured blue-green should be called the “Red Sea”. But when Moses arrived at the shore of this sea, the waters actually were red, due to the red dust of the comet, which is why it became known as the Red Sea.
The parting of the Red Sea not only saved the children of Israel by providing them with a way of escape from the advancing forces of Pharaoh, but it also led to the complete annihilation of Pharaoh’s charioteers, which must have seemed like a divine miracle at the time.
For it was at this very moment that the earth and the nucleus of the comet reached their closest point. Being of a similar size to the earth the comet had an enormous tidal effect on the sea below. It caused the waters of the Red Sea to be temporarily drawn back, exposing the seabed below.
This temporary parting of the waters of the Red Sea allowed the fleeing Israelites to cross safely over the exposed seabed before the tidal effect collapsed, causing the waters to rush back and drown the Egyptian army as they tried to cross.
The plagues described in the Book of Exodus were not just confined to Egypt and the Red Sea. They affected the entire planet. The events that happened on the earth at the time of the exodus of the Israelites from Egypt were also recorded in the Old Testament of the Bible in Psalm 77.
“Thou art the God that doest wonders: thou hast declared thy strength among the people.
Thou hast with thine arm redeemed thy people, the sons of Jacob and Joseph. Selah.
The waters saw thee, O God, the waters saw thee; they were afraid: the depths also were troubled.
The clouds poured out water: the skies sent out a sound: thine arrows also went abroad.
The voice of thy thunder was in the heaven: the lightnings lightened the world: the earth trembled and shook.
Thy way is in the sea, and thy path in the great waters, and thy footsteps are not known.
Thou leddest thy people like flock by the hand of Moses and Aaron.” (Psalm 77: 14-20)
While this shaking of the earth was taking place in Egypt, accompanied by thundering and lightning and “arrows” raining down from the skies, similar events were taking place elsewhere, as recorded in other ancient records like the Babylonian Epic of Gilgamesh, and the Pahlavi Texts of ancient Persia.
Q: Why should a comet have come along at just the right time to save the Israelites?
A: All of history unfolds according to a plan, just like the great cosmic plan that is now unfolding on the earth. The events that affect the history of nations are as much a part of destiny as the events that guide the lives of individuals.
The day when Moses was drawn to the burning bush on Mount Horeb and heard a voice telling him of his destined path was one of these moments. So was the coming of the comet at just the right moment to rescue the children of Israel out of Egypt.
The events that happened some 3,500 years ago find an echo in the events that are destined to unfold on the earth in the coming years. For the place where Moses led the children of Israel is the same place where the final events that mark the ending of the present era on earth will unfold.
Once again, these events will be heralded by fire in the sky. For just as a comet saved the Israelites in the days of Moses, so another comet will return as a harbinger of the new golden age on earth. This new comet will be the cause of the karmic cleansing that will transform this planet.
Although this is not yet known to your astronomers, a comet similar in size to the earth is now heading towards your sun from the direction of the star Vega.
After this comet passes around the sun its path will cross the orbit of the earth. This close encounter will once again bring cataclysmic changes in its wake. But it will also bring salvation to the people of the Promised Land, as has been foretold by your prophets and recorded in the Book of Revelation.
Q: What does the Book of Revelation say about a comet?
A: In his Book of Revelation, the disciple John described a series of visions that he experienced showing the events that would occur on the earth during the days leading up to the return of Jesus. They involved seven angels and seven trumpets. As he wrote:
“And I saw the seven angels which stood before God; and to them were given seven trumpets.” (Revelation 8:2)
John then described what would happen when the first angel sounded his trumpet.
“The first angel sounded, and there followed hail and fire mingled with blood, and they were cast upon the earth: and the third part of trees was burnt up, and all the green grass was burnt up.” (Revelation 8:7)
Once more we have a familiar story. Just as happened in the days of Moses a very large comet will approach the sun. When this comet passes around the sun and begins its journey back into space, its path will cross the orbit of the earth.
And once again the tail of the comet will be in front of the nucleus of the comet, due to the forces generated by the sun.
Because this comet is composed of iron, its dust will also be coloured red. When this red dust reaches the atmosphere of the earth it will fall to the surface in great quantities. When these red dust particles mix with water, it will look like blood and become thick and muddy and be harmful to drink.
As the head of the comet comes closer to the earth the particles in the tail of the comet will grow larger. The red dust will give way to gravel particles. When these gravel particles reach the outer atmosphere of the earth they will become white hot with friction.
These glowing particles will strike the ground in a shower of fiery meteorites. These meteorites will appear like “hail and fire mingled with blood”.
This fiery hail will devastate the entire surface of the planet. It will not only set fire to the grassy plains but will burn up the forests as well. The damage caused by this shower of meteorites will cause “a third part of them to be burnt up”.
Then the second trumpet of the Book of Revelation will sound.
“And the second angel sounded, and as it were a great mountain burning with fire was cast into the sea: and the third part of the sea became blood; and the third part of the creatures which were in the sea, and had life, died; and the third part of the ships were destroyed.” (Revelation: 8:8-9)
When the second angel sounds his trumpet, a burning meteorite from this comet will enter the atmosphere and plunge into the sea. The destructive impact of this asteroid will be immense. It will set off a chain of tidal waves that will swamp coastal cities all around the earth.
The devastation caused by this impact in the sea will kill “a third part of the creatures in the sea”. It will also create havoc with the shipping fleets of the world, as they are smashed by tsunamis that crash into ports and harbours around the world. “A third part” of all the ships in the sea will be destroyed.
“And the third angel sounded, and there fell a great star from heaven, burning as it were a lamp, and it fell upon the third part of the rivers, and upon the fountains of waters; And the name of the star is called Wormwood: and the third part of the waters became wormwood; and many men died of the waters, because they were made bitter.” (Revelation 8: 10-11)
The third trumpet refers to the comet itself, which the Bible calls “Wormwood”. It will appear in the skies of earth “burning as it were a lamp”. And it is the dust in the tail of this comet that will contaminate the waters of rivers, lakes and reservoirs.
And just as in the time of Moses, those who try to drink the water contaminated by dust from the comet will find that it not only has a bitter taste, just like the wormwood plant, but that it will also prove fatal as well. Many people will die from drinking poisoned water.
“And the fourth angel sounded, and the third part of the of the sun was smitten, and the third part of the moon, and the third part of the stars; so as the third part of them was darkened, and the day shone not for a third part of it, and the night likewise.” (Revelation 8: 12)
As the nucleus or head of the comet makes its closest approach to the earth, the enormous dust cloud that surrounds it will blot out the sun, the moon and the stars for a period of three days and three nights, just as occurred in Egypt in the time of Moses.
“And the Lord said unto Moses, stretch out thine hand toward heaven, that there may be darkness over the land of Egypt, even darkness which may be felt. And Moses stretched forth his hand toward heaven: and there was a thick darkness in all the land of Egypt three days.” (Exodus 10:20-22)
The sights that will be seen in the heavens as this comet approaches the earth will be so alarming that they will cause everyone’s hearts to quake in fear. Entire nations will be gripped with terror. As described by Jesus in the gospel of St. Luke:
“And there shall be signs in the sun, and in the moon, and in the stars; and upon the earth distress of nations with perplexity; the sea and the waves roaring; Men’s hearts failing them for fear, and for looking after those things which are coming on the earth: for the powers of heaven shall be shaken.” (Luke 21:25-26)
As a result of this close encounter with this comet, there will be cataclysmic changes upon the face of the earth. The shapes of the continents themselves will be changed as existing lands are swallowed up and new lands rise out of the ocean. Entirely new mountain ranges will be created.
It will be like the time of Moses, when “the sea fled, the mountains skipped like rams, and the little hills like lambs”.
Allan, Questions and Answers, August 10, 2018, 10:35 am
The key to understanding the coming karmic cleansing of the earth lies hidden in the past. For the same source that caused the devastation of the past will return to fulfill its appointed purpose in the future that is about to unfold upon the earth.
Q: What do you mean by this?
A: The things that are about to happen on earth are directly linked to events that occurred some 3,500 years ago. This was the time when the Hebrew people were being held captive as slaves in the land of Egypt.
The book of Exodus in the Bible tells the story of how Moses was drawn to the sight of a burning bush. When he approached it, he heard a voice that identified itself as the God of Abraham, Isaac and Jacob. This voice told Moses that he had been chosen to lead the children of Israel out of Egypt.
Q: What does this have to do with coming events?
A: When Moses confronted Pharaoh and demanded that he let the people go, Pharaoh refused. Moses then told him that if he did not set the captives free, a series of plagues would afflict the land of Egypt.
The ten plagues that descended upon the people of Egypt are described in the following verses of the Book of Exodus:
“Behold, I will smite with the rod that is in mine hand upon the waters which are in the river, and they shall be turned to blood. And the fish that is in the river shall die, and the river shall stink; and the Egyptians shall lothe to drink of the water of the river.” (7:17-18)
“And the lord spake unto Moses, go unto Pharaoh, and say unto him, Thus saith the lord, let my people go, that they may serve me. And if thou refuse to let them go, behold, I will smite all thy borders with frogs: And the river shall bring forth frogs abundantly.” (8:1-3)
“And the Lord said unto Moses, say unto Aaron, stretch out thy rod, and smite the dust of the land, that it may become lice throughout all the land of Egypt.” (8:16)
“Thus saith the Lord, let my people go, that they may serve me. Else, if thou wilt not let my people go, behold, I will send swarms of flies upon thee, and upon thy servants, and upon thy people, and into thy houses.” (8:20-21)
“For if thou refuse to let them go, and wilt hold them still, behold the hand of the Lord is upon thy cattle which is in the field, upon the horses, upon the asses, upon the camels, upon the oxen, and upon the sheep: there shall be a very grievous murrain.” (9:2-3)
“And the Lord said unto Moses and unto Aaron, take to you handfuls of ashes of the furnace, and let Moses sprinkle it toward the heaven in the sight of Pharaoh. And it shall become small dust in all the land of Egypt, and shall be a boil breaking forth with blains upon man, and upon beast, throughout all the land of Egypt.” (9:8-9)
“And the Lord said unto Moses, stretch forth thine hand toward heaven, that there may be hail in all the land of Egypt, upon man, and upon beast, and upon every herb of the field, throughout the land of Egypt.” (9:22)
“And Moses stretched forth his rod toward heaven: and the Lord sent thunder and hail, and the fire ran along the ground; and the Lord rained hail upon the land of Egypt. So there was hail, and fire mingled with the hail, very grievous, such as there was none like it in all the land of Egypt since it became a nation.” (9:23-24)
“And the flax and the barley was smitten: for the barley was in the ear, and the flax was bolled. But the wheat and the rye were not smitten: for they were not grown up.” (9:31-32)
“If thou refuse to let my people go, behold, tomorrow will I bring the locusts into thy coast. And they shall cover the face of the earth, that one cannot be able to see the earth: and they shall eat the residue of that which is escaped, which remaineth unto you from the hail, and shall eat every tree which groweth for you out of the field.” (10:4-5)
“But the Lord hardened Pharaoh’s heart, so that he would not let the children of Israel go. And the Lord said unto Moses, stretch out thine hand toward heaven, that there may be darkness over the land of Egypt, even darkness which may be felt. And Moses stretched forth his hand toward heaven: and there was a thick darkness in all the land of Egypt three days.” (10:20-22)
“And the Lord said unto Moses, yet will I bring one plague more upon Pharaoh, and upon Egypt; afterwards he will let you go hence: when he shall let you go, he shall surely thrust you out hence altogether.” (11:1)
“And Moses said, thus saith the lord, about midnight will I go out in the midst of Egypt: and all the firstborn in the land of Egypt shall die.” (11:4-5)
“And it came to pass, that at midnight the Lord smote all the firstborn in the land of Egypt, from the firstborn of Pharaoh that sat on his throne unto the firstborn of the captive that was in the dungeon, and all the firstborn of cattle.” (12:29)
“And Pharaoh rose up in the night, he, and all his servants, and all the Egyptians; and there was a great cry in Egypt; for there was not a house where there was not one dead.” (12:30)
“And he called for Moses and Aaron by night, and said, rise up, and get you forth from among my people, both ye and the children of Israel; and go, serve the Lord, as ye have said. Also take your flocks and your herds, as ye have said, and be gone.” (12:31-32)
Q: What happened in Egypt to cause all these plagues?
A: The answer lies in the sequence of the plagues themselves. The first plague was “blood” falling from the sky which polluted the rivers and the drinking water. This was followed by an outbreak of frogs, lice and flies. Then came the “murrain”, which was an infectious disease that killed the livestock.
The sixth plague was a strange dust that caused boils and blisters to break out on the skin of people and animals. Then came thunder and hail, and fire that ran along the ground, destroying the crops in the field. This was followed by a vast swarm of locusts that destroyed the crops that had survived the hail.
Finally, there came a strange darkness that covered the entire land of Egypt. It not only darkened the sky, but it was a darkness that could be felt as well. According to the Bible, this darkness lasted for a period of three days.
The final plague caused Pharaoh to decide to release the slaves. It was a disaster that struck in the middle of the night, causing death throughout all the land of Egypt on a scale that left no family untouched, from the house of Pharaoh to the captives in their dungeons.
Most Biblical scholars interpret the story of the plagues of Egypt as a series of miracles performed by Moses and authorized by God as part of his plan to deliver the children of Israel out of bondage in Egypt.
These scholars have probably never considered the possibility that the plagues that descended upon Egypt might not have been supernatural miracles at all, but rather the natural consequences of a close encounter between the earth and a large comet.
Q: How could a comet cause all these different plagues?
A: Comets are bodies of rock and dust that orbit the sun. When a comet approaches the sun, the core or nucleus of the comet becomes heated by the sun and releases streams of incandescent gas and dust.
The pressure of the solar wind causes streams of gas and dust to form a tail behind the nucleus of the comet. This luminous tail can extend many millions of miles into space, depending on the size and nature of the nucleus of the comet.
Due to the pressure of the solar wind, the tail of a comet always points away from the sun. So once the nucleus has passed around the sun and begins its journey back into outer space, the tail of the comet now goes in front of the comet and not behind it.
Q: How does this explain the plagues at the time of Moses?
A: The comet that approached the earth at the time of Moses was very large, and had an extremely long tail consisting of gas, dust and other particles. Because the nucleus of the comet contained iron, the dust in the tail of the comet was red in colour.
As this comet was heading away from the sun it happened to cross the orbit of the earth. Because the tail of the comet was now travelling in front of the nucleus, the first sign that people living on the earth had of the approaching comet, was a stream of tiny particles of red dust entering the atmosphere.
As these red dust particles descended upon the earth, they turned the surfaces of rivers, lakes and seas red in colour. This made it seem like the rivers and the drinking water were turning into “blood”. It was these red dust particles that polluted the water and made it unfit to drink.
This contaminated water then caused the fish to die. Their dead carcasses then began to decompose causing the rivers to “stink”. To escape from the foul water, the frogs abandoned the rivers and made their way onto the land and into the houses of the Egyptians, causing the second plague.
As the earth continued to pass through the tail of the comet, the red dust that now coated the surface of the planet caused an infestation of lice, followed by immense swarms of flies. It also caused a variety of skin irritations, boils and blisters that afflicted people and animals alike.
The lice and flies then combined to spread the outbreaks of disease that infected the Egyptian cattle, horses, camels, donkeys, sheep and goats, causing large numbers of them to die.
As the earth plunged deeper into the tail of the comet, the particles of reddish dust now gave way to gravel particles. These incandescent particles fell to earth in a dense shower of burning meteorites that looked like hail but were hot like fire. When they landed they “ran along the ground”.
These flaming meteorites not only struck people and animals, but they devastated the crops as well. This fiery hail “smote every herb and broke every tree in the field”. Although standing crops like flax and barley were damaged, others like wheat and rye were unaffected because “they were not grown up”.
The remaining crops were then eaten by an enormous swarm of locusts brought on by a “the strong east wind” that was so large that it darkened the sky. When the locusts were done, “there remained not any green thing in the trees, or in the herbs of the field, through all the land of Egypt.”
The ninth plague was a thick darkness that engulfed the whole of Egypt for three days. The source of this darkness was the Coma, or inky, black, gaseous envelope that surrounded the nucleus of the comet, that caused the air to become so thick that breathing became laboured and the very air itself seemed to stick in the throat. This was a darkness “that could be felt”.
The final plague came in the middle of the night, causing death and destruction throughout all the land of Egypt. Your Bible scholars have long wondered what this agent of death might have been, even though the answer can be plainly seen in the words of Psalm 77.
“The voice of thy thunder was in the heaven: the lightnings lightened the world: the earth trembled and shook. Thy way is in the sea, and thy path in the great waters, and thy footsteps are not known. Thou leddest thy people like flock by the hand of Moses and Aaron.” (Psalm 77: 14-20)
This instrument of death was a mighty earthquake which shook the entire land of Egypt. It was caused by the gravitational pull of the huge nucleus of the comet passing close to the earth. But why did this earthquake appear to act selectively, by harming the Egyptians and sparing the Israelites?
Because the houses of the Egyptians were made of heavy blocks of stone, this earthquake in the middle of the night caused all of their stone houses to collapse, crushing many of the people who were sleeping inside. According to the Bible, only the homes of the children of Israel were spared.
The reason why the plague of death “passed over” the children of Israel was because, being slaves, they did not live in houses made of stone, but in dwellings made of mud and reeds. Their houses were able to withstand the shaking of the ground, allowing them to be spared.
Allan, Questions and Answers, July 26, 2018, 9:53 am
A: Yes, they did. But the records of these civilizations have been lost, or rather, they have been hidden until that time when you are ready to learn the true history of life on the earth. When this moment comes, you will find that the actual history of humanity is very different from what you have been taught in your schools and universities.
Q: How does this vary from what we know today?
A: Your understanding of history is based on three assumptions. The first assumption is that the solar system has always existed in its present form, and that the number of planets and their orbits around the sun have always been as you see them now.
The second assumption is that the earth has evolved in a uniform way, and that the geological changes that have taken place have done so by means of small changes over vast periods of time. Also, that the forces that have changed the surface of the earth in the past are the same forces that operate on the earth today.
The third assumption is that humanity has evolved on this planet from original cave-dwellers in Africa to the sophisticated culture that exists on earth today in a linear growth from the simple to the complex, and that your modern technological civilization is the highest form of culture that has ever existed on the earth.
Because all these assumptions are incorrect, the history of humanity that is taught in the schools of the new age will be very different from what is taught today.
Q: Why are these assumptions incorrect?
A: These assumptions are incorrect because your knowledge of history is so short, and because your scholars have allowed their preconceived ideas to blind them from recognizing the evidence of the past that still survives on earth.
The records of these ancient civilizations still exist, and they will be rediscovered in the coming age. When they are, they will become the basis for a new understanding of history.
This problem of the ignorance of history is not new. It has affected many civilizations in the past. In fact, this ignorance has helped to shield societies from the horrors of the past, allowing them to develop without the psychological trauma which the memory of previous catastrophes would inevitably have produced.
Q: Why have catastrophes happened in the past?
A: These catastrophes have occurred whenever societies have reached a level of development where they have become a threat to themselves and to other forms of life on the planet. This is what happened to the people of Tolemac. It has also happened to many other cultures as well.
Q: How have ancient cultures been destroyed?
A: All cultures on the earth develop in similar ways, and go through similar stages of growth, maturity and decay. Some cultures last for relatively long periods of time, while others disappear after just a few centuries. The reasons for these variations depend on the nature of the people involved and the character of their societies.
Their destruction may be the result of conquest and war, or through such circumstances as famine or disease. In other cases, societies may be destroyed by various forces of nature such as hurricanes, earthquakes, volcanic eruptions, tidal waves and floods. They may even be destroyed by asteroids or comets.
In different ways, so many ancient civilizations have met their end.
Your historians know of many ancient civilizations. In Europe and Asia there have been the empires of Rome, Greece, Troy, Persia, Assyria and Chaldea. Africa has witnessed the great dynasties of the Pharaohs. India has seen the Mauryan and Gupta empires. There were the Shang, Zhou and Qin dynasties of China.
In central America there have been the Mayas, Olmecs, Aztecs and the Toltecs. In South America, the Inca empire stretched from Ecuador to Chile. All of these great kingdoms, dynasties and empires have now vanished from the world stage, only to be replaced by the dominant countries that you see on earth today.
But there have been other empires in the distant past that are not known to your historians. These empires have passed away seemingly without trace. They were the empires of Atlantis, located on islands in the Atlantic Ocean beyond the Pillars of Hercules, Paititi in central America, and the continent of Lemuria in the Pacific Ocean.
These lost civilizations had a history that extended back hundreds of thousands of years. The history and records of these lost civilizations have been secretly hidden in places of safekeeping, and their hiding places will be revealed in the coming age to allow humanity to learn the true history of their past.
Q: Where are these ancient records kept?
A: When the ancient priests of Atlantis and Lemuria knew that their islands were destined to sink beneath the sea, they made elaborate plans to preserve the records of their history, culture and scientific achievements in secret places where they would be protected for future generations in the coming golden age.
Some of these records have been saved in retreats in remote mountain regions. Some have been buried in secret chambers below the ground. Others have been preserved in tunnels deep below the surface of the earth, as was the case with the civilization of Paititi.
Q: Where was the civilization of Paititi?
A: While the lost civilizations of Atlantis and Lemuria live on in legend, little is known today about the civilization of Paititi, which existed in South America in the Amazon basin of Brazil. Although this civilization co-existed with its more famous neighbours in the Atlantic and Pacific oceans, it was in some ways even more advanced.
The great cities of Paititi were more imposing, and their system of construction using huge blocks of stone was unequalled in the ancient world. Their sacred science enabled their builders to cut vast blocks of stone by means of rays of light, and then position these stones, some of which weighed hundreds of tons, by means of the harmonic frequencies of sound.
It was in this way that they created monuments of gigantic size that can still be seen on earth today.
It was this secret knowledge that was given to the people of Atlantis, who used it in the construction of their own cities. Before the civilization of Paititi was finally overcome by disaster, their scientific knowledge was passed on to a select few. These few became mentors to the peoples of Tolemac, and it was this knowledge that enabled the Tolemac culture to reach unrivalled levels of accomplishment.
The civilization of Paititi differs from those of Atlantis and Lemuria in one significant way. Whereas the islands of Atlantis and Lemuria were both destroyed by earthquakes and sank below the waves, the cities of Paititi have never been under water.
Their cities remain relatively intact, while their records are preserved in underground libraries that still survive to this day. They are protected by the dense Amazonian jungle that now shields them from modern eyes. Tantalizing rumors of lost cities have drawn explorers into the interior of Brazil for centuries.
The Spanish conquerors heard of these legends of vast hoards of gold that were said to exist in a lost city of Thirty Citadels that lay hidden somewhere in the impenetrable jungle of the Mato Grosso. They braved many perils in their quest for these cities, and the blazing crystals of white light that were said to shine within them.
Although they searched the jungle for many years, their efforts were in vain. Modern explorers have been equally unsuccessful. Until that time when the world is ready to rediscover their lost science, their secrets will remain protected by poisonous reptiles and hostile Indian tribes, who are the modern guardians of this ancient knowledge.
The builders of Paititi also built a system of tunnels that honeycomb the region. These tunnels were not only used for transport and communication, but also for storing their precious objects and artifacts. When the earthquakes that will herald the coming of the new age cause large sections of the earth to be displaced, they will cause these tunnels to be revealed.
Those who venture into these tunnels will find a treasure beyond description. Not only will there be statues, artifacts and objects of solid gold, but examples of the tools that allowed the builders of Paititi to perform their amazing technical feats. In that day, mankind will lose its hunger for gold.
What awaits them on that morning of discovery will be a treasure more precious than gold or jewels. Hidden within these tunnels will be keys to the understanding of the deepest secrets of the universe. Mother earth will finally bring forth from her womb the knowledge that she has carefully guarded for thousands of years.
Q: What happened to the ancient knowledge of Atlantis?
A: When it became apparent to the Hierophants of Atlantis that their culture was doomed, and that their islands were about to sink beneath the waves, their sacred records, technology and artifacts were taken to various places of refuge where they would be preserved until humanity would once again be worthy custodians of this knowledge.
One of the main refuges they chose was in the land you call Egypt, close to the Nile delta.
Your historians have often wondered how the civilization of Egypt came to flourish at such a high level of accomplishment without any apparent evidence of previous development in the region. It was as if the culture of the Pharaohs appeared suddenly and in full bloom. Few historians today realize that this culture came from Atlantis.
To protect the sacred wisdom of Atlantis, these Hierophants used the knowledge of construction gained from Paititi to create massive stone edifices that would be capable of resisting the ravages of nature for thousands of years. An example of this was the Great Pyramid, accompanied by the Sphinx.
The secret records of Atlantis were hidden beneath the Sphinx as well as inside the pyramid itself. Although a few of the chambers inside the pyramid are known to your historians, other secret rooms have not yet been found. They will remain hidden until the Great Day of Telling, at the start of the golden age.
The American seer Edgar Cayce predicted that a “Hall of Records” would be found beneath the Sphinx. Inside this hall of records would be found tablets, artifacts and gold related to the lost civilization of Atlantis. He predicted that these records would also include a detailed history of human life on earth.
While many people today know about this prophecy, all attempts to find this buried hall of records have so far failed. Once again it will take the intervention of natural disasters in the form of gigantic earthquakes to reveal these secret hiding places to the world.
Q: What happened to the ancient knowledge of Lemuria?
A: Lemuria was a vast continent in the Pacific Ocean that existed for many hundreds of thousands of years. It was the motherland of human civilization, and lasted longer than any other. But even this golden age of humanity finally fell victim to the forces of evil and was destroyed.
When the time came for the people of Lemuria to face the same consequences of their actions that confront men and women today, the continent on which they lived broke up over many years into several smaller islands. But as the destruction continued, there came a day when the last of these islands was swallowed up by the sea.
Whereas the initial destruction of Lemuria began about 30,000 years ago, the final portion of the land submerged about the same time as the destruction of Atlantis about 12,500 years ago. While Atlantis and Lemuria were breaking up, other catastrophes were taking place all over the earth.
It was at this time that the Andes mountains in South America were being created, as well as the Sierra mountains of North America. Cities that once were located by the sea were suddenly thrust thousands of feet above sea level. One of these was a colonial port which had previously enjoyed a mild tropical climate.
Within the space of a few hours the entire city was lifted to a height of some 12,500 feet, where it survives to this day on a desolate wind-swept plain. Modern historians call the ruins of this city by the name of Tiahuanaco. It is located near Lake Titicaca which was also created at this time.
It was here, high in the Andes mountains near the newly formed lake, that the Guardians of Wisdom from Lemuria brought their records and their sacred technology. They created a refuge in a remote mountain valley where their lost wisdom could be preserved. The centerpiece of this retreat was the legendary golden Sun Disc of Mu.
Back in the motherland, this Sun Disc had been held by ropes of purest gold in a temple dedicated to the Divine Light. This circular golden disc was not made of ordinary gold. It was made of transmuted gold which gave the disc a translucent appearance. It almost seemed as if you could see through it.
Like the Ark of the Covenant that was created many thousands of years later by the Israelites, the Sun Disc of Mu was not just an object of beauty and veneration. It was also a scientific instrument. When this disc was struck, it produced various harmonic vibrations which could be used for various purposes such as healing.
These vibrations could also be used to allow trained people to leave their physical bodies and travel in cosmic space. It was in this way that the priests of Lemuria were able to communicate with the inhabitants of the stars. But if used in a negative way, this disc was also capable of generating devastating earthquakes.
The Incas who came to Peru established an advanced and highly spiritual civilization on top of the ruins of what once had been the great colonial empire of Lemuria. The remnants of their fortresses that were built from gigantic blocks of stone can still be seen today at places like Ollantaytambo and Sacsayhuaman.
The Incas built their own cities and temples on top of these megalithic ruins, including their capital city Cuzco. They also discovered and rebuilt the ancient network of tunnels that had been built in ancient times to link these fortresses together.
The central focus of Inca worship was the temple in Cuzco that was dedicated to the Sun God Inti. They called this temple Coricancha, or Garden of Gold, as it contained life-sized statues of people, animals, plants and flowers that were made of solid gold. The walls and floors of this temple were also covered in sheets of gold.
The Incas knew of ancient legends telling how selected guardians had removed the golden Sun Disc of Mu shortly before the doomed continent of Lemuria was destroyed and brought it to a place of safety somewhere in the Andes mountains. But although they searched for this Disc for many years, they were never able to find it.
However, once their spiritual evolution had progressed to the point where they could use it for the benefit of all the people, as it had originally been used in the motherland of Lemuria, this golden Sun Disc was presented to the ruling Inca by the guardians. It was installed in the Temple of the Sun in Cuzco.
This disc was hung from golden cords attached to niches in the walls that can still be seen to this day. However, once the Incas realised that the Spanish conquistadors were motivated by the lust for gold, this Disc was taken through underground tunnels beneath the Coricancha to a place of safety, along with all their other sacred relics.
Although the Spanish invaders succeeded in ransacking the Temple of the Sun, they could never find its golden treasure. Since that time, many others have searched in vain for its fabled wealth. They will continue to remain hidden until such time as the world has been cleansed of its evil, and is ready to rediscover them.
When that day dawns, men and women of earth will once again witness this golden Disc as it reflects the glorious rays of the morning sun, and listen to its tones of exquisite harmony, as once again it draws toward it all those in search of understanding of the Everlasting Light of true spiritual awareness.
Allan, Questions and Answers, July 12, 2018, 1:57 pm
Q: What will the records of these ancient civilisations reveal?
A: When the records of these ancient civilizations are finally revealed in the coming age, they will tell a very different story of the history of the earth than is understood today by your scientists and historians.
Not only do your historians have no knowledge of Paititi, Atlantis or Lemuria, or of the even older civilizations that preceded them, but your scientists are unaware of the catastrophes that destroyed these civilizations and ravaged the earth in the past.
The students of your schools and universities are taught that the earth is a stable planet that has slowly evolved over long eons of geological time. They are also taught that the earth has always followed a stable orbit around the sun. These comforting ideas are about to be rudely shattered.
The historical records of the ancients will tell a history of the earth that has been repeatedly devastated by cataclysm. Although some of these disasters have been caused by tidal waves, floods, earthquakes and hurricanes, many others have been caused by fire in the sky.
Q: What do you mean by fire in the sky?
A: When the true history of the earth is told, there will be some disturbing changes to the traditional ideas held on earth today. These ancient records will reveal:
That the rotation of the earth around the sun has been repeatedly disturbed within the recorded history of humanity.
That the axis of the earth has changed from time to time.
That the length of the year has not always been the same.
That the sun has not always risen in the east. During some of the past eras on earth it has risen in the west.
That the cause of many of these changes has been the influence of comets and asteroids.
Ancient man was acutely aware of just how fragile life on earth has been, for the descriptions of past disasters were not only part of their literary record, but some of the events described in their sacred books had occurred within the living memory of those who had written about them.
It is very different today. Modern scientists and historians have been lulled into a false sense of security due to the relative stability of the earth over the last two and a half thousand years.
So even though many ancient books speak clearly of devastating events that occurred in the past, historians of today dismiss them as mere allegories, rather than descriptions of events that actually happened to the earth.
Q: What are some of these ancient books?
A: The ancient books of China (Shu-king Chronicles), India (The Puranas, Vedas, Visuddhi-Magga), Persia (The Zend-Avesta), as well as the inscribed tablets of the Sumerian culture (Epic of Gilgamesh), speak of tumultuous times on earth. The Popul-Vuh of the Mayas echo these stories.
The Psalms of the Bible are filled with descriptions of past global catastrophes, as can be seen from the following examples:
“Then the earth shook and trembled; The foundations also of the hills moved and were shaken, because he was wroth. There went up a smoke out of his nostrils, and fire out of his mouth devoured: coals were kindled by it. He bowed the heavens also and came down: And darkness was under his feet. And he rode upon a cherub, and did fly: Yea, he did fly upon the wings of the wind. He made darkness his secret place; His pavilion round about him were dark waters and thick clouds of the skies. At the brightness that was before him his thick clouds passed, hail stones and coals of fire. The Lord also thundered in the heavens, and the Highest gave his voice; hail stones and coals of fire. Yea, he sent out his arrows and scattered them; And he shot out lightnings, and discomfited them. Then the channels of waters were seen, And the foundations of the world were discovered at thy rebuke, O Lord, at the blast of the breath of thy nostrils.”
(Psalm 18: 7-15)
“God is our refuge and strength, A very present help in trouble. Therefore will we not fear, Though the earth be removed, And though the mountains be carried into the midst of the sea; Though the waters thereof roar and be troubled, Though the mountains shake with the swelling thereof.”
(Psalm 46: 1-3)
“The Lord reigneth; let the earth rejoice; Let the multitude of isles be glad thereof. Clouds and darkness are round about him: Righteousness and judgment are the habitation of his throne. A fire goeth before him, and burneth up his enemies round about. His lightnings enlightened the world: The earth saw, and trembled. The hills melted like wax at the presence of the Lord.”
(Psalm 97: 1-5)
“When Israel went out of Egypt, The house of Jacob from a people of strange language; Judah was his sanctuary, and Israel his dominion. The sea saw it and fled: Jordan was driven back. The mountains skipped like rams, and the little hills like lambs”.
(Psalm 114: 1-4)
World-wide catastrophes that cause hills to melt like wax and mountains to skip like rams are not the sort of things that are taught in modern history. Devastation on that scale would require forces far greater than simple earthquakes or volcanic eruptions, fearful though these may be.
Q: Has the earth been affected by comets in the past?
A: According to the wisdom of the ancients, the earth has repeatedly been affected by close encounters with comets. The comets that have appeared in the skies of earth over the last thousand years or so have been distant and have produced little more than night-time illumination.
Modern humanity has lost its fear of comets. But in the centuries before the birth of the Christ, comets appeared much more frequently in the skies of earth. Some of them were extremely large, and some of them passed extremely close to the earth.
These close encounters with comets devastated the landscape of earth. They caused seas to rise and fall, new mountains to form, and entire continents to sink below the waves. One of these encounters became the foundation of the Greek legend of Phaeton.
According to this legend, Phaeton the son of Helios, the Greek god of the Sun, asked his father for a favour. To prove his manhood, the young Phaeton asked if he might be allowed to drive his father’s sun-chariot across the sky for just one day. Helios granted his son this request.
But as the young Phaeton took hold of the reins, he could not control the powerful steeds that pulled the chariot of the sun. The chariot plunged out of control. It came too close to the ground, causing the sun to scorch large parts of the earth.
Realizing the danger of the situation, Zeus, ruler of the gods, hurled a thunderbolt at Phaeton, killing him instantly, thus sparing the people of earth from complete destruction.
This story of Phaeton remains one of the best-known legends in ancient mythology. Although modern scholars treat the story as a fanciful myth, few of them grasp the truth that lies behind the legend, that in earlier times the earth had a close encounter with a large comet.
As the orbits of these two bodies passed close to one another, the tremendous electro-magnetic forces generated between them caused a mighty thunderbolt to strike the earth. It was this that gave rise to the legendary story described by the Greeks.
Q: Why did ancient societies focus on eclipses and solstices of the Sun?
Ancient man knew that encounters with comets in the past had led to changes in the axis and rotation of the earth, as well as its orbit around the Sun and the resulting changes in the length of the year. They therefore constantly watched the heavens for signs of any new cosmic intruders.
Modern historians wonder why so many ancient cultures all around the world held ceremonies associated with specific times of the year, such as eclipses and solstices. They still do not realize that these ceremonies provided these societies with vital clues about their future safety and survival.
Archaeological ruins can be found all over the planet of temples and stone monuments that are aligned with the cardinal directions of the earth. These sites have also been traditionally linked with ritual ceremonies held at the time of winter and summer solstices.
One of the best examples of these can be found at the citadel of the ancient Incan fortress of Machu Picchu. The Incas referred to this as the Intihuatana rock, which in the local Quechua language, meant “the hitching post of the Sun”. Archaeologists today still do not understand the meaning of this term.
As the time of each solstice approached, the Incan priests observed the path of the Sun as it tracked across the sky by means of the shadows cast by the Sun on these stones. They carved special niches in these stones to show the points at which the Sun’s movement should begin to reverse itself.
So as the day of the summer or winter solstice approached, the Incan priests watched anxiously to see if the shadow cast by the Sun reversed its path across the sky on the appointed day of the solstice, and that it did indeed remain “hitched to its post”.
For if the movements of the Sun did not match the times of these solstices, the priests would know that the orbit of the earth had changed, and that devastating events might soon occur upon the earth. They also knew that the seasons and the times for planting crops would be changed as well.
Similar systems can be found in other societies that lived on earth at that time. Each had their own way of tracking the movements of the Sun and the planets, and each successive solstice was approached with a similar sense of dread, in case the portents in the Sun should be unfavourable.
However, a favorable result would be cause for great celebrations among the people, as it meant that they were safe for the time being from heavenly upheaval leading to destruction on the earth, and that their seasons for planting crops remained unchanged.
Although societies like the Aztecs and the Maya held similar ceremonies for the same reason, they considered the Sun to be a war-like deity that needed to be constantly appeased, and that the way to protect the earth from the ravages of cosmic intruders was to conduct regular human sacrifices.
The tragedy of these gruesome rituals was that once they had been found to be effective on one occasion, they were considered necessary for all future occasions. So their ceremonies became bloody sacrifices involving virgins or young men of prowess, as well as captives from military campaigns.
Similar rituals were held in Europe at places like Stonehenge and Woodhenge. These circles served a similar purpose, and that was to plot the path of the sun according to its previously recorded movements, to ensure that there was continued stability in the heavens.
In ancient Egypt, tall stone obelisks were used to track the path of the Sun at times of the midsummer and midwinter solstice. The shadows cast by these obelisks were used to check whether there had been any changes in the movement of the Sun which might lead to imminent earth changes.
The true meaning of these ancient stone monuments will never be understood by scientists and historians, until they come to realise that the earth has suffered repeated catastrophes caused by comets and asteroids that have happened to cross the orbit of the earth in the distant past.
Unfortunately, scientists of today remain convinced that the earth has always followed its existing course around the Sun, and that the length of the year has always been the same, and that human civilisations have never been destroyed by encounters with celestial objects from space.
They would do well to remember the words recorded by Plato in his work titled Timaeus, that were told by an old Egyptian priest to the Greek philosopher Solon:
“There have been and will be many different calamities to destroy mankind, the greatest of them by fire and water, lesser ones by countless other means”.
“Your own story of how Phaeton, child of the sun, harnessed his father’s chariot, but was unable to guide it along his father’s course and so burnt up things on the earth and was himself destroyed by a thunderbolt, is a mythical version of the truth that there is at long intervals a variation in the course of the heavenly bodies and a consequent widespread destruction by fire of things on the earth”.
Allan, Questions and Answers, June 25, 2018, 1:31 pm
Answer: We are your elder brothers on the Path of Returning to Everlasting Light.
Q: Why are you here?
A: Where you are today, we were yesterday. Where we are today, you will be tomorrow. The earth on which you live was also our Mother. She nurtured us until we were ready to claim our Cosmic Birthright.
Your earth was once our home. We too once greeted the dawn with gladness and watched the sun gild the morning sky. We too once walked the sands of earth and felt the tropic breezes on our cheeks. We too once looked at the evening sky and gazed with wonder at the stars.
Because we once lived on this earth, and are bound in love with those who live on it now, we have undertaken a vow to return to you at this time, to share our story with you, and to help those of you that would listen.
Q: How can you help us?
A: We can help you by describing the last days of Tolemac, and by explaining the words of your clear-eyed men and women of history and your Holy Books of prophecy.
Q: What happened during the last days of Tolemac?
A: Before your recorded history, in lost legends of time, there existed a land that was home to a great culture known as Tolemac. It was located in what is now Central America. In its culture, Tolemac represented the flower of human learning.
In art, music and literature, it led the world. Its stone cities were of surpassing beauty. In technology, its scientists used knowledge that even today is unknown to your civilization.
Yet despite our great accomplishments over many centuries, with the passage of time our men and women grew corrupt and began to follow the left-hand path of life. As has been the case with so many other cultures that have lived upon the earth, the people of Tolemac began to pursue pleasure and indulgence.
Economy gave way to excess and honesty gave way to expediency. Our merchants became motivated by avarice and greed. Those in authority used their power to exploit and oppress others.
Our wise men tried to stem this tide of corruption, but their voices were stifled. Our arenas were used for public games where those who lost were put to death. Our priests turned to superstition and magic to mislead the people.
Our sacred ceremonies became debased and were turned instead into mass orgies involving human sacrifice.
It was at this time that our elder brothers came to those few who would listen, to warn them of coming catastrophes. Although our holy books had warned us of the consequences of our corrupt way of life, most people refused to listen.
Those few who had the courage to confront those in authority were publicly tortured and killed.
Inevitably, there came a time when the people of Tolemac had to face the consequences of their actions. Great earthquakes fractured the land and hurricane winds destroyed their dwellings. Finally, there came the Great Day of Telling that had been predicted by our elder brothers.
Whereas the great civilization of Lemuria had taken many years before it was destroyed, and Atlantis had sunk beneath the waves within the course of a single night and a day, the final destruction of Tolemac took just thirteen hours. Entire cities were swallowed up by the ocean.
Today the ruins of the cities of Tolemac lie on the seabed off the island you call Cuba.
Although your holy books have often spoken of the events that are about to unfold upon the earth, and your own prophets have warned you of the times that are to come, their words are not easy to understand. Only those with special training and insight can understand their meaning.
We are here to tell you about these things in simple words, so that everyone, no matter how degraded they may seem to others, will be able to understand what is happening to the earth and why these things are happening at this time.
Q: What is happening to the earth?
A: We want you to know that everything that is now happening on your planet is part of a plan. This is the great Cosmic Plan that will lead you into the coming golden age.
The moment is at hand when the earth will take the greatest evolutionary step that humanity will ever witness. Never again in the history of earth will there be changes as profound as those which now await you.
For you have reached that point in your history when many will face the same conditions that occurred on that far-off day in Tolemac, when the earth shook, the waters rose, the land fell, and the people cried out in disbelief and fear that they would be destroyed.
We want you to go forward to meet these changes with joy and understanding, rather than in fear and denial.
For if you surround yourselves with love, and consciously project this love to others, these changes will not harm you. But if you surround yourself with fear, you will attract the very thing that you fear, and it can destroy you.
The evolution of life is a journey that spans many lifetimes. It is a journey towards ever higher levels of consciousness, until the soul at last reaches the Divine State. This is the purpose of all human living and the meaning of the great adventure that is life.
Every person living on the earth today is on that Path of Returning to Everlasting Light. This Light is the divine light that shines within every person as well as every living creature on the earth. This divine light is your most precious possession.
It is the “I Am” sensation that is always with you in the center of your being.
If you could learn to meditate, and focus your attention on this “I Am” sensation for extended periods of time, you would find that it would draw you in. Your consciousness would then be flooded with the light of the divine and you would experience a peace that passes all understanding.
You would then not only discover your own divine nature, but would know that all of creation is divine, and that you are one with all life. This has been the teaching of your holy books and the testimony of your holy men and women throughout history.
Q: What does this have to do with the age of Aquarius?
A: The ancient priests of Tolemac knew that space was not empty but was filled with dynamic fields of energy. They knew that as the solar system moved through space, it would be impacted by these different fields of energy. They also knew that these fields of energy would change with every passing age.
They knew that the energy fields through which the solar system would pass during the age of Aquarius would be totally different from those it had passed through in the previous age of Pisces.
These new fields of energy would not only affect those people living on the earth at that time, they would also influence the events that would happen to them.
When the earth entered into the age of Aquarius, our priests knew that the whole of the solar system would be changed by these new frequencies of energy, and that these changes would affect the earth as well as the entire solar system. In fact, it would do more.
Not only would the solar system be subjected to cosmic radiation of a much higher frequency, but the earth itself would be totally transformed by the higher energies coming from the space into which it was now moving.
This increased rate of vibration will profoundly affect everything in the solar system, whether it be physical, mental or spiritual. It will not only transform the earth, it will also bring about a new golden age of humanity.
Q: What will this golden age be like?
A: The new age that is about to unfold on earth will be beautiful beyond telling. It will not just be an age of harmony and beauty on the earth. It will be an age when men and women will come to know their true calling. They will not just be custodians of the earth, but of all intelligent life as well.
There is life and intelligence in all forms, as ancient man knew. Man is not the only thinking being living on the earth. All forms of life, including elements and minerals, fishes, animals and birds have inherent intelligence. Man is their keeper and their elder brother.
When only love is manifested on your planet all things caused by negation will pass away and earth will once again become a place of surpassing beauty. Nature will no longer need to defend itself against the harsh thoughts of mankind. The cactus and the rose will lose their thorns.
Your weather will be completely changed. When peace reigns in the hearts of men and women, the earth too will reflect this harmony. Gentle showers of multi-coloured rain will fall only as needed. The wild storms of the past will never trouble you again.
Because there is life and intelligence in every element, people will learn how to create tools and machinery that utilise this intelligence. So, if part of a vehicle or equipment should happen to be damaged, it will automatically repair itself.
The art of healing will also be transformed. Physicians will use colour, sound and light to heal their patients. Using specialized equipment, doctors will not only be able to repair damaged organs. They will also be able to heal broken bones instantly, and even grow new human limbs.
Your cities will be transformed. No longer will they be built in haphazard fashion as before. Future cities will be built in harmony with the forces of energy that flow through the planet, to take advantage of locations where these energy centres exist.
When your cities are properly aligned, you will be able to draw on natural sources of energy to provide heat, light and power. Because this source of energy will be free for all to use, every person will be able to light and heat their homes as they wish.
Knowledge and wisdom will make great strides in the coming age. The true history of your planet will be revealed at last. Those same disasters that caused earlier libraries and treasures to be hidden, will now cause them to be found. The lost records of Atlantis, Lemuria and other civilisations, will be rediscovered.
Those who survive to inherit the new world that is about to flourish on the earth will come to know a life that is beyond the imagination of modern man. But first they will need to prove that they are worthy. They will need to survive the Great Initiation spoken of in your holy books.
Allan, Questions and Answers, June 14, 2018, 3:44 pm
My name is Mark Stevens. I am speaking today with Allan Colston. He is the author of The Last Days of Tolemac, which is a book dealing with prophecy and other end-time events.
For those listeners who may be new to this topic, this is another in the series “Signs of the Times”. Welcome to the Podcast Allan.
Thanks Mark, it’s good to be with you again.
Mark: We have talked about many different subjects over the last few years, and I was wondering what you would like to talk about today?
Well Mark, I thought for a change we could play a version of the game twenty questions. I will ask you a question, and then when you answer, I will comment on that answer. Only this time I would like to do something that I haven’t done before.
Mark: And what is that?
I am going to embed in my comments a series of links to my Blog, so that those readers of my Blog who would like further information can follow these links. Does that make sense to you?
Mark: Sounds like a great idea. So what is your first question?
My first question is, who is or was James W. Loewen?
Mark: Well that’s an easy one to answer. I haven’t the faintest idea.
I’m not surprised Mark. Most people have probably never heard of him, which is a pity, because he deserves to be better known than he is. The James Loewen I am referring to is an American author. He is 76 years old, and as far as I am aware, still has an office at the University of Vermont. (See link)
Loewen grew up in Decatur, Illinois, and was educated at MacArthur High School where he was awarded a National Merit Scholarship. After graduating from school in 1960, he attended Carleton College in Northfield, Minnesota. He then went on to earn a PhD in Sociology from Harvard University.
It was while he was teaching at Tougaloo College, a black college in Mississippi, that he became aware that the history taught to black students about events occurring at the time of the Civil War in America, was very different from that taught elsewhere in the country.
It was this discovery that led him to spend two years at the Smithsonian Institution in Washington, where he studied and compared twelve different history textbooks which were widely used throughout the United States at that time.
He subsequently published the results of this research in 1995 under the title: Lies My Teacher Told Me: Everything Your American History Textbook Got Wrong. The book went on to become a bestseller, and Loewen has since become an acclaimed sociologist, historian and author.
Loewen has travelled the world giving lectures publicising history, or to be more precise, the propagation of historical ideas that have proven to be biased, or even plumb wrong. These lectures were published in a new book in 2005, under the title Everything You’ve Been Taught Is Wrong.
In these lectures, Loewen has not just confined himself to the subject of American history, but to Archaeology and Prehistory as well. And this brings me to my next question Mark. How old is human civilisation? What did they teach you in school about this?
Mark: I was taught that human civilisation began about 5,000 years ago in Mesopotamia, with the Sumerian or Akkadian culture. And that this time frame more or less coincided with the rise of the pharaohs of ancient Egypt.
That’s pretty much what I was taught as well, Mark. And this is where it gets interesting, because this is not just what was taught in schools when we were growing up. This is also what is being taught in leading universities to this day. In fact, it is even more insidious than James Loewen imagined.
If you were to be accepted for a PhD degree at one of the leading Ivy League universities in America today, and you chose for your thesis something related to the earliest human civilisation, you would fail if you did not adhere to this accepted timeline.
This is not just a question of there being no evidence of prior civilisations on the earth that date back before the time of the Sumerians, or the earliest dynastic rulers of Egypt. Evidence of earlier civilisations than these not only exists, but it has existed for centuries.
This evidence has not just been ignored, it has been deliberately and systematically suppressed. You might think that this sounds like some bizarre conspiratorial plot. But it just happens to be the actual state of advanced education today, and it exists in all the countries of the world.
And I am not just referring here to human history, but to every discipline of science as well. And to understand the reason why this situation exists, we need to investigate the fundamental philosophy of science. And that brings me to my next question. Who was Thomas Kuhn?
Mark: Again, I must admit that I have no idea.
Thomas Kuhn was another graduate of Harvard University. When he died in 1996, he was recognised not only as an accomplished physicist, but as one of the world’s leading philosophers of science. His best-known work was his book titled The Structure of Scientific Revolutions, first published in 1962. (See link)
Kuhn studied the history of science from its beginnings in the 16th century with the discoveries of men like Copernicus and Galileo, up to the modern era. What he found was that science had developed in a way that was very different from the way that was taught in schools and universities.
Instead of linear progress, in which one scientific discovery led naturally to the next, he found that scientific development had followed a similar course to the social and political upheavals of those years, in which steady development was punctuated by sudden outbreaks of dramatic change.
Kuhn called these transformations scientific revolutions, and he popularised the use of the term “paradigm” to describe them. He defined a scientific paradigm as “the entire constellation of beliefs, values, techniques, and so on shared by members of a given community”.
Paradigms according to Kuhn, were scientific revolutions which altered the entire perspectives of their times, being “universally recognised scientific achievements that for a time provided model problems and solutions to a community of practitioners.”
He found, for example, that each new scientific revolution did more than build upon the theories of its predecessors, for each completely changed the foundations of the past. As each new paradigm became entrenched, so it was necessary not only to reconstruct past theory, but also to re-evaluate past fact.
So, for example, the Polish mathematician and astronomer Nicolaus Copernicus did not discover facts which were unknown to those trained in the Ptolemaic school of astronomy. What he did was to explain these facts in a completely new way.
It was his brilliant and revolutionary insight which enabled subsequent generations of astronomers to add a wealth of information about celestial dynamics, and to explain this information in ways which overcame the problems inherent in the old Ptolemaic system of astronomy.
Other examples of these intellectual giants were Sir Isaac Newton, the British physicist James Maxwell, and Albert Einstein. These men revolutionised the theoretical constructs of their times, in ways which had profound implications for future scientific research and development.
A new paradigm was not therefore just an incremental advance on what was previously known. Instead, it demonstrated a complete revision of the past. It also provided new avenues for solving the anomalies of the past and opened up new vistas for potential exploration.
The key insight provided by Kuhn was that each new scientific revolution was followed by a period of “normal science”, in which scientists trained in the new paradigm were content to function within that paradigm, without realising that they had become trapped within the confines of that paradigm.
And that is where we find ourselves today. Scientists everywhere, no matter what discipline they practise, have unwittingly become bound by the constraints of the current paradigm. And anyone who tries to challenge this, faces excommunication by their peers. They are forced to become outcasts.
As I said, this applies to every known discipline of science. To illustrate my point, let me begin by asking you about the fundamental basics of life on this planet. What were you taught about the origin of the different species that populate the earth? How did these different species come about?
Mark: That’s easy. As Darwin discovered, life first began as simple single-cell creatures that slowly evolved over time into the myriad species that we see under the seas and on the earth today.
Exactly Mark. That’s what I was taught as well. But even though his theory has become the foundation of modern Biology and is taught in all the universities of the world, and is believed to have proven beyond doubt, there’s just one small problem. There is not the slightest evidence to support it. (See link)
When Darwin published his book On The Origin Of Species in 1859, he presented his theory of biological change as a result of what he called “natural selection”. And although he did not conceive of this idea himself, he explained his theory in the following way.
All life is faced with a struggle to survive. And in this battle, some die and some survive. According to Darwin, the reason that some survived was because the were “naturally selected”. In other words, their bodies adapted better to the changing conditions of the world. Those who didn’t, died.
As he explained, these biological changes happened very slowly, which was why we didn’t notice them in our lifetimes. However, he expressed his confidence that, even though he personally was unable to find evidence of these changes in the fossil record, they would be found by others.
The problem is, that in the century and a half since his book was published, no one else has been able to find evidence of these morphological changes either. In fact, biologists have been unable to find evidence of any one species slowly changing over time into another separate species.
And when they tried this experiment in the laboratory, by inducing biological mutations in species that reproduced very rapidly, like fruit flies, scientists were unable to persuade them to change into a separate species, as Darwin’s theory of macro-biological change predicted.
But worse was to follow, for what the fossil record actually shows is that over 90% of all the species that have ever lived on the earth have emerged suddenly in the fossil record, and then remained in that same form until they finally disappeared from the fossil record, again equally suddenly.
So although it is obvious that creatures within a particular species can change as a result of selective breeding, as can be seen with any species that has become domesticated, there is as yet no evidence that these changes lead, by fine gradations, to any species that is completely different.
There are, however, still more problems associated with the traditional theory of evolution. As Darwin himself admitted, his elegant theory was confounded by certain complex organs such as the eye and ear, which he referred to as “organs of extreme perfection”.
If we take the human eye as an example, in order for a person to see effectively, a number of different things need to happen simultaneously and in harmony. The eye has to be kept clear and moist, as a result of the activity of the eyelids and tear glands.
The light which enters the eye has to be focused by a lens precisely upon the retina at the back of the eye-ball. The amount of light which enters the eye must also be carefully controlled by the variable aperture of the iris. If any one of these interdependent functions is faulty, the person is unable to see.
Likewise, in the human ear, rhythmic variations in outer pressure must be matched by equivalent movements of a flexible eardrum. This eardrum is in turn attached to a set of tiny bones located in the middle ear, all of which have to act in unison in order to hear properly.
So for humans to see or hear at all, every part must relate perfectly to every other part. If there is a breakdown at any point in this process, nothing is ultimately seen or heard. And this applies to all species that have reached a certain stage of physical development.
The difficulty that confronted Darwin was all too obvious. If these organs of extreme perfection had themselves evolved through a variety of stages, then how was it possible for a species to survive while these changes were taking place? For as one of his critics has remarked:
“The transparent cornea of our eye could hardly have evolved through progressive trial and error by natural selection. You can either see through it or you can’t. Such an innovation has to be right the first time, or else it just doesn’t happen again, because the blind owner gets eaten.”
Darwin’s essential thesis was that every species survived because of its ability to evolve physically in beneficial ways. But if survival depended on changes of such complexity that they could not possibly be transmitted in a single generation, then existence would effectively be terminated.
Darwin’s response to this difficulty was a splendid piece of intellectual sophistry. He merely drew attention to a succession of different types of eyes, ranging from the simple to the complex, and pointed out that variations in eyes could be inherited.
Then presto! By inferential deduction, it could safely be assumed that the simple eye had evolved into the complex through the process of natural selection, even though the method whereby it did so remained, in his words, “insuperable by our imagination.”
So to summarise, evolutionists have blindly accepted Darwin’s theory for well over a century. Yet although everyone agrees that different species have evolved in form from the simple to the complex, there is not a shred of evidence to prove that this happened in the way that Darwin has described.
And that brings me to another question Mark, that is closely linked with Darwin’s theory of evolution through the process of natural selection. Who was Charles Lyell?
Mark: Well at last we have a name that I can relate to. I seem to recall that he was a Scotsman who was associated with the modern ideas about geology.
Well done Mark. As you say, he was a 19th century Scottish geologist who was the author of the book Principles of Geology, which is the foundation of modern geology as taught in schools and universities around the world. In fact, his work was fundamental to Darwin’s theory. (See link)
The central argument of Lyell’s book was that the present is the key to the past, as well as the doctrine of uniformity, or uniformitarianism as we know it today. What that means is that the forces of nature that sculpt our world today are the same as those that operated in the distant past.
One of the reasons why Darwin’s theory of evolution was embraced so quickly and so readily by the scientific community, was because it not only embodied the work of Lyell, but that it validated it as well. Lyell said that all geological change was the result of minute changes over vast spans of time.
And Darwin’s theory of natural selection was based on a similar idea, that different species evolved by means of equally minute changes in form, which we call mutations, which took place too slowly for the eye to notice. In other words, they needed enormous periods of time to achieve their purpose.
But when it came to providing evidence in support of his theory, Lyell ran into the same problem that Darwin did. The sad fact was that the evidence that did exist at that time, in the form of fossils embedded in geological strata, not only did not support his theory, but plainly disproved it.
This embarrassing fact was so obvious that Lyell pointed it out himself in his book. In the 12th edition of Principles of Geology he wrote:
“It has been truly observed that when we arrange the known fossiliferous formations in chronological order, they constitute a broken and defective series.”
“These violations of continuity are so common as to constitute in most regions the rule rather than the exception, and they have been considered by many geologists as conclusive in favour of sudden revolutions in the inanimate and animate world.”
Lyell’s response to this was hardly believable. He said that the reason why other geologists were unable to find evidence in geological strata of the processes that he described in his book, was because they were stupid. And not only that, but that they were unaware of their own stupidity.
You probably think I’m joking Mark, but this is what he wrote in Principles: “It appeared clear that the earlier geologists had not only a scant acquaintance with existing changes (caused by wind, flowing water, etc.), but they were singularly unconscious of the amount of their ignorance.”
You would think that modern scholars would have seen through this subterfuge by now. But it gets worse. The idea that changes in the surface of the earth have primarily been the result of forces of nature that operate slowly and imperceptibly, has also been incorporated into the paradigms of History and Archeology.
References to cataclysmic events that can still be found in the historical records of ancient societies are ignored by scholars today. And structural ruins that bear testimony to catastrophic changes in the recent past of humanity, continue to be ignored by archeologists.
They are ignored because the idea of catastrophic change within the recent history of the earth has now been officially expunged from the current paradigm of science. Those few brave souls who still try to challenge that view are condemned to being mere voices crying in the wilderness.
So there you have it. Historians ignore the evidence of catastrophic events that have occurred in recent times in the history of the earth, because to do otherwise would offend the theory of Uniformitarianism, which has now become part of the official dogma of science.
And talking of dogma Mark, let me ask you a question about another of the fundamental beliefs that are embedded in the official paradigm of science as taught in all our schools and universities today. It is about Cosmology, the queen of the sciences. How did the universe begin?
Mark: Well that’s an easy one. It began with the Big Bang.
Once again, you’re right on the button with what establishment science would have you believe. And once again, the only problem with this elaborate theory is that it is based on a false assumption. However, that doesn’t bother them, so it continues to be taught in schools and universities. (See link)
The prevailing cosmological model is that all the matter and energy that now fills the universe was flung out from a primordial explosion, and that everything we see in the sky today is the result of that initial explosion. This theory has come to be known as the “Big Bang” theory.
It was the American astronomer Edwin Hubble who played a significant role in the development of this theory. Based on his study of galactic red-shifts in the 1920’s, he concluded that separate galaxies were drifting apart from one another, and that as a result, the universe was expanding.
Once the idea of an expanding universe had become accepted, it was easy to imagine this process in reverse. In other words, based on the rate at which the universe was expanding, astronomers could go back in time and calculate that this explosion took place roughly fourteen billion years ago.
The problem with the Big Bang theory, however, as I just indicated, was that the entire theory rested upon an incorrect interpretation of a phenomenon that was well-known to astronomers at the time. This phenomenon was referred to as the “galactic red-shift”.
Hubble believed that the perceived “red-shift” of distant galaxies was a “Doppler effect”.
It was the Austrian physicist Christian Doppler who showed that a moving source of sound changed its pitch when it passed a stationary observer. Its frequency increased when it approached the observer, and decreased when it moved away. This principle had become known as the Doppler effect.
Because light also travelled in waves, Hubble assumed that it travelled through space in the same way as sound. He found that the waves of light appeared to increase in frequency whenever a source of light moved towards an observer, and to decrease in frequency whenever it moved away.
While this effect was hardly noticeable at low speeds, it became very pronounced when a source of light was moving away at a speed approaching the speed of light. If the light source was receding at high speed, it would move to the left, or red side, of the visible spectrum.
Hubble believed that as galaxies receded from the earth, their light would shift towards the red end of the visible spectrum. And the extent of this shift would show how fast they were receding, and how far they were from the earth. And this was the basis of what became known as “Hubble’s Law”.
But by a strange twist of fate, Hubble’s law, which now forms the basis of the whole theory of the Big Bang, was challenged by Halton Arp, who once served as an assistant to Edwin Hubble while he was conducting his research at the Mount Wilson Observatory in California.
It all started off innocently enough when Arp published his Atlas of Peculiar Galaxies in 1966. It was only some years later that he realized that several of the objects illustrated in his Atlas also appeared on the published list of recognized quasars.
Arp noticed was that some of these “peculiar” galaxies had much smaller red-shifts than the quasars associated with them. It was obvious that these differentials could not be explained by the so-called Doppler effect, nor to any movement of the objects themselves.
He published his findings in the “Astrophysical Journal”, which was the leading publication in its field at the time, hoping to attract the attention of fellow astronomers. Unfortunately, what followed was yet another travesty in the long, sad saga of science.
What Arp had done was unforgivable. He had dared to challenge the established paradigm of science, by having the audacity to provide evidence that Hubble’s law was wrong, and that the entire theory of the Big Bang was invalid.
Arp was shunned by his colleagues and asked to change to another line of research. When he failed to do so, he was denied further use of the Palomar Observatory for his research. Despite being a long-standing Fellow of the Carnegie Institution of Washington, he lost his job and was forced to leave America.
So that brings me to another question that forms part of the paradigm of modern science, Mark. Why is the sun hot?
Mark: You’re kidding me of course. The sun is hot because the nuclear reaction inside the sun generates intense heat, which then radiates outward into space in all directions.
Well done Mark. Score one for the academic establishment, and zero for scientific truth. What you just said is exactly what continues to be taught in schools and universities everywhere. It just so happens that this is not only wrong, but that even a child can see why it is wrong. (See link)
Based on spectrographic analysis, our sun has been found to consist primarily of hydrogen, while the rest is mostly helium. Small amounts of heavier elements such as oxygen, carbon, neon and iron have also been found.
Our sun is thought to have been formed about four and a half billion years ago as a result of the gravitational collapse of a large molecular cloud that existed at the time of the formation of the solar system.
Being at the centre of this gravitational collapse, the sun became increasingly hot until a process of thermonuclear fusion began spontaneously. It was this process of converting hydrogen nuclei into helium that was thought to be the source of its heat and light.
All this remained well and good until the beginning of the space age, when scientists were at last able to send probes to the sun, as well as satellites that orbited the sun, and send back information about the sun that was never previously available.
What this showed was that there was something seriously wrong with their historical model. For if the sun truly was a nuclear reactor, converting hydrogen atoms into helium through a process of thermonuclear fusion, then there should be a simple temperature gradient emanating from the sun.
In other words, the temperatures should get cooler the further away you travel from the surface of the sun. But what the space probes revealed was the exact opposite. It is actually hotter.
For example, although the temperature at the surface of the sun is about 4,400 degrees K, scientists found that at the top of the Chromosphere the temperature rises to about 20,000 degrees K. And further out at the Corona, it again jumps dramatically to about two million degrees Kelvin.
Every schoolchild knows that in this universe a source of heat does not get hotter the further away you go. So when the facts contradict theory, then it is a good idea to re-evaluate the theory. But that is not what academics have done. They have preferred to stay with the old paradigm.
But not all astrophysicists have been prepared to toe the line. Some brave souls who have risked ostracism by their peers have banded together to propose an entirely new paradigm, one that is not based on gravity, but on electromagnetism. They call this paradigm the “electric universe”. (See link)
Mark: Well Allan, I learn something new from you every time we chat. But before we end this Podcast, I want to go back to your question about the age of human civilisation. You never said what you think about this.
Well if you go by ancient texts that are stored away in various museums around the world, you will find that human civilisation goes back tens of thousands, if not hundreds of thousands of years, dating back to the earliest Adamic race and the civilisation of Lemuria. (See link)
But the conventional dogma is that even though the earth is a little over four billion years old, human civilisation only began about five thousand years ago. We have also been taught that the planets in our solar system have remained unchanged ever since they were first created.
All of this is of course a myth, as any historian could show within a few days of serious research. But as I have said before, to do so would be to go against the scientific paradigm of uniformitarianism, and anyone who tried to do so would quickly find themselves rejected by their peers.
It was Immanuel Velikovsky who shocked the world of science in 1950 with the publication of his book Worlds in Collision. In this book he produced evidence showing that Venus had a close encounter with the earth around the 15th century BC, and that it threatened the earth again some 52 years later.
The gravitational effects of these encounters forced Venus into a new orbit which then brought it into a collision path with Mars. These close encounters led to Mars being thrown into a new orbit, where it had a series of disastrous encounters with the earth. (See link)
According to Velikovsky, the actual history of the earth was very different from what geologists like Lyall had portrayed. He quoted legends, myths and stories describing times when dwellings were destroyed and the earth was convulsed by natural disasters which had their source in space.
While the nature and number of these disasters varied, these legends indicated that entire civilisations had vanished as a result of these encounters. And, as Plato himself described, our world has repeatedly changed its axis, as well as its orbit around the sun. (See link)
But even though their civilisations may have disappeared, in some cases parts of their architecture have survived, such as the sphinx on the Giza plateau which, as Boston University professor Dr. Robert Schoch believes, may have been built as far back as 10,000 years ago. (See link)
But the existence of so many other megalithic ruins around the world suggest that there may well have been a global civilisation centred on the island of Atlantis that was destroyed by a world-wide cataclysm around 10,500 BC, as described by Plato in his dialogue entitled Critias.
The gigantic stone statues on Easter Island called Moai, some of which weigh fifty tons or more, are considered by conventional archaeologists to have been carved by the Polynesian inhabitants, even though no other examples exist of similar statues carved by Polynesians elsewhere.
They lie at odd angles all around the island, with their bodies covered in sand and debris, and only their heads protruding. To any open-minded observer, it is obvious that they were carved before the soil and debris arrived, most probably by a series of devastating tsunamis. (See link)
Other stone ruins buried beneath tons of soil and debris have been found at a height of over 12,000 feet on the Bolivian altiplano, at a place called Tiwanaku, together with nearby megalithic ruins at Puma Punku. Again, it seems obvious that whatever existed there originally was destroyed by a series of natural disasters.(See link)
Also in South America, this time at Marcahuasi in Peru, can be found a giant stone image of a human head 80 feet high that the locals call Peca Gasha. This location is filled with other strange carvings that are suggestive of animals that have never lived in South America. (See link)
And talking of images of creatures unknown to modern archaeologists, there are the enigmatic stone carvings that were discovered about twenty years ago in Turkey at a place called Göbekli Tepe. (See Link)Again, these ruins had been buried under a hillside of soil and debris that had hidden them for centuries.
These megalithic ruins contain T-shaped stone pillars twenty feet tall that weigh up to ten tons each. Again, whatever civilisation was responsible for building these structures, seems to have vanished without trace in a series of disasters that buried them under a sea of sand and mud.
Finally, anyone interested in learning about the true history of the solar system should look at the video Symbols of an Alien Sky.(See link) And anyone wanting to know more about the real history of human civilisation should listen to this discussion with Dr. Robert Schoch. (See Link)
Based on the foregoing Mark, it is clear that what we have been taught in our schools and universities does not reflect the latest discoveries of science, and no longer provides valid answers to the questions I have raised. So my final question to you is this, and you don’t have to answer it.
Will the next scientific revolution that Thomas Kuhn wrote about come before our civilisation is wiped out by the next cataclysm, or as a result of it?
Mark: Yes, I think I’ll leave that topic to another time. Anyway, this has been a fascinating discussion. I want to thank you Allan for the unique way you have presented your ideas. It certainly gives me much to think about, and I’m sure our listeners will agree as well.
You have been listening to Allan Colston, author of the book The Last Days of Tolemac. Do join us for our next Podcast, which will be another in the series titled “Signs of the Times”. Allan Colston can be reached at tolemac@shaw.ca
Allan, AUDIO, Everything You've Been Taught Is Wrong, April 21, 2018, 2:19 pm
My name is Mark Stevens. I am talking today with Allan Colston. He is the author of The Last Days of Tolemac, which is a book dealing with prophecy and other end-time events.
For those listeners who may be new to this topic, this is another in the series “Signs of the Times”. Welcome to the Podcast Allan.
Thanks Mark, it’s great to chat to you again.
Mark: In many of our past conversations I have begun by asking the questions, leaving you to provide the answers. I was wondering if I could do the same this time as well.
Certainly Mark, what did you have in mind?
Mark: Throughout history there have been people who have predicted future events. Some of these predictions have come true and some have not. So my question to you is this. If some are right and some are wrong, then how can we trust prophecy?
Well you raise an interesting question Mark. As you say, there have always been people who have made predictions about what would happen in the future. And while some of their predictions have proven to be true, many others have turned out to be false.
But I think we need to be clear about the real issue here. There is a fundamental difference between prophecy and prediction, especially when it relates to the Bible. Biblical prophecy is based on the words of people who are considered to have been inspired by God.
Prediction, on the other hand, relates to intellectual analysis, which is always subject to the beliefs, biases and limitations of the individual concerned. So does your question relate to the prophecies themselves, or to the people who have interpreted these prophecies?
Mark: You are right Allan. My concern is rather that so many people who claim to be Biblical experts, seem to have vastly different interpretations about what these prophecies mean.
And that is why Jesus warned his followers that they needed to be wise as serpents, so that they did not fall prey to false Christs, and those who would try to deceive them, particularly during the “end times” in which we are now living.
And you are certainly not alone in this. The entire Christian church is riven with factions who have their own versions of end-time events. You have only to look at the “rapture”. While some think this will happen before the tribulation, others are convinced it will happen during, or even after.
Ultimately, it all boils down to your own personal judgement. Although you may be confronted by many different interpretations of end-time prophecy, if you are serious about the subject, then you have to make up your own mind about what to believe and what not to believe.
But it goes deeper than this. When it comes to the prophecies themselves, much of what is included in the Bible is cloaked in symbolism which makes interpretation extremely difficult. And nowhere is this more true than in the book of Revelation written by St. John.
Mark: Why is that Allan?
While John was in exile on the island of Patmos, he experienced a series of visions which related to the time leading up to the return of the Christ. The challenges that he faced in recording these visions were not unlike the problem that we would face if we tried to describe a vivid dream.
Even though John may have seen exactly what would happen at the time of the end, that did not mean that he was able to interpret what he saw. After all, he was the son of a fisherman, and was hardly equipped to describe life as we experience it today.
He had no understanding of modern astronomy or astronomical terminology, that would help us to understand what he was trying to describe. And he certainly had no idea about modern warfare, involving artillery, tanks, missiles, fighter jets and helicopter gunships.
So when he writes of “locusts with faces of men, hair of women, teeth of lions and tails like unto scorpions”, it is clear that he is doing his best to describe modern armaments operated by human beings. So it is no surprise that people today struggle to interpret what he wrote.
So apart from Jesus, who only spoke of the events leading up to his return in very broad terms, if we want to get a better idea of what will happen in the future, we are forced to rely on the words of St. John and Old Testament prophets who lived around 2,500 years ago.
However, there is one other person that we can turn to who lived closer to us in time, having been born around five hundred years ago. But although he wrote extensively about end-time events, he is perhaps even harder to understand than St. John. Do you know who I am referring to Mark?
Mark: I would have to hazard a guess. Are you thinking of Martin Luther by any chance?
Not quite Mark, although he did live at the same time as Luther. The man’s name was Michel de Nostredame, although we know him better by his Latin name of Nostradamus. While many people are familiar with his name, very few have taken the trouble to study his work.
Nostradamus was an interesting guy. He was a devoted Catholic and remained so for his entire life. The problem was that he used a method of divining the future that brought him into conflict with the forces of the Inquisition, which could easily have led to his death at the stake.
So in order to avoid being prosecuted as a magician, he adopted the strategy of writing down his predictions in a series of four-line verses called quatrains. But he didn’t stop there. His verses were also filled with anagrams, confusing names and other linguistic riddles.
Nostradamus chose these stratagems deliberately, so as to obscure their meaning and ensure that they would only be understood after careful analysis and investigation, and that their meaning would almost never be obvious to the casual reader.
It is worth noting that Nostradamus didn’t consider himself to be an infallible prophet, but only as an accomplished and diligent scholar who strove to acquire insight and understanding into the inscrutable ways of God. But the reason I mention him Mark, is because of something else that he wrote.
Mark: What are you referring to Allan?
Most people think that Nostradamus only wrote in riddles, and that his quatrains were the only record of his prophecies. They forget that we also have copies of letters that he wrote at the time. One of these was to his son César, and another was addressed to Henry, “Second King of France”.
In these letters he wrote explicitly in prose about the events that he predicted would occur in the “latter days” spoken of in the Bible. And it is these passages that seem to me to be worth noting as we try to understand the events that may shortly come to pass. Here are some examples:
“The Old and New Testaments shall be forbidden and burned, after which the Antichrist shall be the infernal prince; and for the last time all the Christian countries shall tremble and also because of the unfaithful ones.”
“For twenty-five years there shall be wars and battles still more ruinous, and towns, villages, castles and other buildings shall be burned, laid waste or destroyed, with a great flood of the blood of young girls, married women, violated widows, suckling infants thrown against the walls of towns, dashed thus and bruised.”
“And so many misfortunes will be provoked by Satan, Prince of Darkness, that almost all the planet will be in chaos and laid waste.”
“Christ’s sanctuary will no longer be trampled by the feet of the unfaithful ones coming from Russia, the world approaching a great conflagration, although my calculations in my prophecies do not cover the whole course of time, – which goes far further.”
“After this time, which men will find long, the peace of the earth will be renewed through the coming of the Golden Age. God the creator, hearing the affliction of his people, shall order Satan to be bound and cast into the abyss of Hell, into the deepest pit.”
“Thus shall commence a universal peace with God and men, and Satan shall remain bound for about a thousand years, which will bring greater strength to the power of the Church; and then he will once again be released.”
The purpose of the prophecies of Nostradamus was to bring hope to mankind. Despite the litany of disasters that have already occurred, and the calamities that still await, mankind is on the threshold of the most enlightened age in the history of the earth.
The words of Nostradamus remain a beacon of hope in the dark days that lie ahead. He speaks to all humanity, and bids them open their eyes to the unfolding glory that is their destiny. His words echo down the centuries.
“The peace of the earth shall be renewed. For according to the celestial signs the Golden Age shall return…… There will be a universal peace among men and the Church of Jesus Christ be delivered from all tribulation.”
Mark: That is quite remarkable Allan. I had no idea about any of this.
What I find remarkable about this myself is that Nostradamus, by his own admission, was not a divinely inspired prophet. Instead, he arrived at his own prophetic insights as a result of what he calls “his calculations”, which we know were based on astrology and the ancient art of “magic”.
And what he is talking about here is quite literally the end of the world as we know it, and the beginning of a new Golden Age which will be characterised by universal peace and the end of all tribulation. And his conclusions almost exactly match those recorded in the visions of St. John.
This suggests to me that the events that are now unfolding in the world are part of some pre-ordained plan. You will recall that in a previous Podcast I quoted from the words of the Oracle of Tolemac, who said, and I quote:
“We want you to know that everything that is happening on your planet at this time is part of a plan. This is the great Cosmic Plan that will lead you into the coming golden age”.
And if Nostradamus was somehow able to discern this plan for himself, it suggests that others may have been able to do so as well. In fact, it reminds me of an ancient Egyptian scroll written in hieroglyphics that was attributed to Hermes. Have you heard of it by any chance, Mark?
Mark: No, I haven’t. What did it have to say?
Well first I need to go into the origin and background of the scroll itself. Shortly after the death of Alexander the Great in 323BC, Egypt was ruled for almost three hundred years by a succession of Hellenistic kings beginning with Ptolemy the first.
It was at this time that Greek scholars began to study ancient hieroglyphic texts that dated back to the earliest days of Egyptian civilisation. One of these was known as the Book of Thoth, named after Thoth, the legendary sage of ancient Egypt whom the Greeks called Hermes.
The Book of Thoth was considered to be the most sacred text of the Arcanum Mystery School. It was said to have been kept in a golden box in the inner sanctuary of the temple at Karnak, and that only the highest Initiate was permitted to have access to it.
The part of this book that I am referring to is known as “Asclepius”, and is a dialogue between Thoth (Hermes) and his disciple Asclepius. It explains the Egyptian view of God, as well as cosmology, time, the cycles of life, destiny and the nature of the world.
However, the part that is relevant here is a prophecy that has come to be known as “The Lament of Hermes”. Although this is a prophecy in which Thoth (or the Greek God Hermes) describes the end of Egyptian civilisation, it also carries uncanny overtones on what is happening in the world today.
As I said, the original text was recorded in Egyptian hieroglyphics, from which it was first translated into Greek, and then Latin and then English. Although there are several versions of the English translation, the one that I prefer reads as follows:
The Lament of Hermes
“Do you not know, Asclepius, that Egypt is an image of heaven or, to be more precise, that everything governed and moved in heaven came down to Egypt and was transferred there? If truth were told, our land is the temple of the whole world.
“And yet, since it befits the wise to know all things in advance, of this you must not remain ignorant: a time will come when it will appear that the Egyptians paid respect to divinity with faithful mind and painstaking reverence – to no purpose.
“All their holy worship will be disappointed and perish without effect, for divinity will return from Earth to Heaven, and Egypt will be abandoned. The land that was the seat of reverence will be widowed by the powers and left destitute of their presence.
“When foreigners occupy the land and territory, not only will reverence fall into neglect but, even harder, a prohibition under penalty prescribed by law (so-called) will be enacted against reverence, fidelity and divine worship. Then this most holy land, seat of shrines and temples, will be filled completely with tombs and corpses.
“Indeed, 0 Egypt, Egypt, of your reverent deeds only stories will survive, and they will be incredible to your children! Only words cut in stone will survive to tell your faithful works, and the Scythian or Indian or some such neighbour barbarian will dwell in Egypt. Indeed.
“As sad as this was, this was not the end of it. Why weep, O Asclepius? Egypt will be carried away to worse things than this; she will be polluted with yet graver crimes.
“She, hitherto most holy, who so much loved the gods, only country of the Earth where the gods made their home in return for her devotion, she who taught men holiness and piety, will give example of the most atrocious cruelty, in that hour, weary of life, men will no longer regard the world as worthy object of their admiration and reverence.
“This All, which is a good thing, the best that can be seen in the past, the present and the future, will be in danger of perishing; men will esteem it a burden; and then they will despise and no longer cherish this whole of the universe, incomparable work of God, glorious construction, good creation made up of an infinite diversity of forms, instrument of the will of God who, without envy, pours forth his favour on all his work, in which is assembled in one whole, in a harmonious diversity, all that can be seen that is worthy of reverence, praise and love.
“For darkness will be preferred to light; it will be thought better to die than to live; none will raise his eyes towards heaven; the pious man will be thought mad, the impious, wise; the frenzied will be thought brave, the worst criminal a good man.
“The soul and all the beliefs attached to it, according to which the soul is immortal by nature or foresees that it can obtain immortality as I have taught you – this will be laughed at and thought nonsense.
“And believe me, it will be considered a capital crime under the law to give oneself to the religion of the mind. A new justice will be created and new laws. Nothing holy, nothing pious, nothing worthy of heaven and of the gods who dwell there, will be any more spoken of nor will find credence in the soul.
“Only the evil angels will remain, who will mingle with men, and constrain them by violence – miserable creatures – to all the excesses of criminal audacity, engaging them in wars, brigandage, frauds, and in everything which is contrary to the nature of the soul.
“Then the earth will lose its equilibrium, the sea will no longer be navigable, the heaven will no longer be full of stars, the stars will stop their courses in the heaven.
“Every divine voice will be silenced. The fruits of the Earth will moulder, the soil will be no longer fertile, the air itself will grow thick with a lugubrious torpor. Such will be the old age of the world, irreligion, disorder, confusion of all goods.
“When all these things have come to pass, O Asclepius, then the Lord and Father, the god first in power and the demiurge of the One God, having considered these customs and voluntary crimes, endeavouring by his will, which is the divine will, to bar the way to vices and universal corruption and to correct errors, he will annihilate all malice, either by effacing it in a deluge or by consuming it by fire, or destroying it by pestilential maladies diffused in many places.
“Then he will bring back the world to its first beauty, so that this world may again be worthy of reverence and admiration, and that God also, creator and restorer of so great a work, may be glorified by the men who shall live then in continual hymns of praise and benedictions.
“That is what the rebirth of the world will be: a renewal of all good things, a holy and most solemn restoration of Nature herself, imposed by force in the course of time…and by the will of God.”
So there you have it Mark. A quite remarkable message from a lost world that modern scholars are still trying to understand. In fact, one scholar is on record describing this Lament as “one of the most moving passages of prose I have read from Classical Antiquity”.
Mark: It certainly is Allan. And what is amazing is that although it must have been written many thousands of years ago, it strikes a chord with so much of what we have been discussing lately.
That’s exactly the point I wanted to make Mark, and I am so glad that you picked up on these correlations. What makes this Lament so interesting to me is that it deals with a number of issues that are relevant today that are worth discussing in greater detail.
As you rightly pointed out Mark, this Lament was written many thousands of years ago. It was actually part of what has become known as the Corpus Hermeticum, or the body of teaching associated with the Egyptian God of wisdom Thoth, whom the Greeks revered as the God Hermes.
And the essence of his teaching was the idea that the macrocosm was reflected in the microcosm, and that the key to all the mysteries of life could be expressed in the words “as above, so below”. This meant that everything that we see and sense in life is inextricably linked with the Godhead within.
So according to Hermetic philosophy, God is not some remote entity that exists outside of ourselves, but is an integral part of every person, and that each one of us contains that divine spark of universality and immortality. And our task as people is to glorify God in everything we do.
We also need to remember that the ancient Egyptian religion was intimately bound up with ritual and ceremonial magic, and that the aim of their religious practices was to unite the microcosm (us) with the macrocosm (God). Let me give you an example.
Throughout Egypt we find remnants of statues of various Egyptian Gods. We interpret them today as effigies, or sculptures, dedicated to the worship of that God, much as we find effigies of the Virgin Mary in Catholic churches today. But the Egyptians did not see it this way.
The statues of the Egyptian Gods were not regarded as mere images. Through their ceremonial rituals, they imbued these stone statues with supernatural powers so that they were able to give answers to questions put to them. So in that sense, they actually became alive.
Today, we consider such an idea crazy. And that is precisely what Hermes was referring to in his Lament. He said that there would come a time when this ancient knowledge would be lost, and that the Gods would abandon Egypt and return into heaven. And so it has proved.
Today, little remains of the ancient Egyptian culture but their temples, tombs and corpses. And those who study Egyptology today focus on these ruins, rather than on the immortality of the soul and the fundamental divinity that resides within the heart of humanity.
And, as the Lament explains, when the Gods depart from the earth, only the “evil angels” will remain. They will mingle with men and lead them into every form of criminal activity. In fact, everything that is contrary to the nature of their souls. And that is the state of the world in which we live today.
The spirit of evil is abroad, and has infected almost every aspect of human activity, as drugs, violence, crime, exploitation and greed increasingly contaminate all the countries of the world. And in response, nature is in revolt, as environmental threats surround us on every side.
For as the Lament goes on to predict, “then the earth will lose its equilibrium, the sea will no longer be navigable, the heaven will no longer be full of stars, the stars will stop their courses in the heaven. The fruits of the Earth will moulder, the soil will be no longer fertile”.
Does this ring any bells with you Mark?
Mark: It certainly does. In fact, it matches much of what St. John wrote about in his Book of Revelation.
Exactly, Mark. But fortunately, just like St. John, who writes that after the time of the Great Tribulation leading up to the battle of Armageddon, there will be a new earth and a new heaven followed by a thousand years of peace, we can take heart from the concluding lines of the Lament.
“Then will he bring back the world to its first beauty, so that this world may again be worthy of reverence and admiration, and that God also, creator and restorer of so great a work, may be glorified by the men who shall live then in continual hymns of praise and benedictions.
“That is what the rebirth of the world will be: a renewal of all good things, a holy and most solemn restoration of Nature herself, imposed by force in the course of time…and by the will of God.”
And I, along with all those who are burdened by the sorrows of this world, yearn for that day to dawn.
Mark: I want to thank you Allan for a fascinating discussion, and especially for your insights into the ancient Egyptian way of life. You have given us all a lot to think about as well.
You have been listening to Allan Colston, author of the book The Last Days of Tolemac. Do join us for our next Podcast, which will be another in the series titled “Signs of the Times”.
Allan, AUDIO, The Lament of Hermes, February 21, 2018, 2:45 pm
My name is Mark Stevens. I am talking today with Allan Colston. He is the author of The Last Days of Tolemac, which is a book dealing with prophecy and other end-time events.
For those listeners who may be new to this topic, this is another in the series “Signs of the Times”. Welcome to this Podcast Allan. It’s good to chat to you again.
Thanks Mark.
Mark: In our last conversation, you said that Donald Trump might be the last President of the United States, and that his actions could lead to the destruction of America, and the beginning of the Great Tribulation. Could you tell us a little more about this?
Certainly Mark. I said that the test would be whether he followed through with his election promise to move the U.S. embassy in Israel from its present location in Tel Aviv to the contested city of Jerusalem. And as we all know by now, he went ahead and announced his plan to do so late last year.
Not surprisingly, Trump’s decision was met with fierce opposition, not just from Muslim and Arab countries, but from many western nations as well. In fact, at the United Nations, 128 countries voted to condemn his decision to recognise Jerusalem as the capital of Israel.
While this overwhelming condemnation was entirely predictable and should have been foreseen, the US ambassador to Israel, David Friedman, told The Jerusalem Post that the Palestinian response was “overly emotional”, and that its rhetoric was “ugly, needlessly provocative and anti-Semitic”.
It is clear from the ambassador’s response that Donald Trump either overlooked, or deliberately chose to ignore, the degree to which the city of Jerusalem has become an emotional lightning rod that ignites Muslims and Arabs everywhere.
Furthermore, because he lacks a classical education, Trump had probably never even heard of Pegasus, the pure-white divine stallion of the ancient Greeks, or of its later incarnation in Islamic mythology, where it was referred to as Buraq, the heavenly steed that transported the prophets.
For according to Islamic teaching, it was Buraq that carried Muhammad on his famous night journey to Jerusalem, where he met with earlier prophets (including Jesus), as well as with God (Allah). In fact the Dome of the Rock was built on the Temple Mount in the Old City of Jerusalem to commemorate this very meeting.
For Muslims everywhere therefore, Jerusalem is not just another city. It is integrally tied to one of the most significant events in the life of the prophet. So the decision to move the US embassy to Jerusalem was not just an affront to the Palestinians, it was a direct challenge to all Muslims.
Just to give you an idea about how Muslims feel about this issue Mark, the Supreme Guide of the Muslim Brotherhood in Egypt, Sheik Mohammed Badie, has called for a Jihad (holy war) to liberate Jerusalem from Israeli rule. He had this to say to his followers:
“Jerusalem is Islamic and nobody is entitled to make any concessions about the fate of the city. The Jihad for the recovery of Jerusalem is a duty for all Muslims“. He went on to say: “The liberation of the Holy City will not be done through negotiations, or at the United Nations”.
Another prominent campaigner for the conquest of Jerusalem, has been the Egyptian Imam and television preacher by the name of Safwat Hegazi. Hegazi is on record saying: “Our capital shall not be in Cairo, Mecca or Medina. It shall be Jerusalem with God’s will”.
And to a crowd of his supporters in the Gaza Strip he added: “The United States of the Arabs will be restored. The capital of the Muslim Caliphate will be Jerusalem with God’s will. Our chants shall be: millions of martyrs will march towards Jerusalem”.
So the rallying cry amongst Muslims, not just in Palestine but throughout the entire Middle-East, has long been “Next year in Jerusalem!” Naturally, all of this is lost on Donald Trump. But had he been conversant with Bible prophecy, he would probably have acted with a little more caution.
Mark: What does the Bible have to say about this?
The Bible is full of hints about the things that will come to pass during the end-times Mark, if we know where to look and what to look for. And one of the clearest signs of the time of the end can be found in the writings of the Hebrew prophet Ezekiel.
If anyone doubts the significance of prophecy, they need look no further than Ezekiel. Although he lived six centuries before Jesus was born, at a time when the Jewish people were living in exile in Babylon, he described events that would occur in Israel 2,600 years later with uncanny accuracy.
For example, in Chapter 37 of his book of prophecy as recorded in the Old Testament, Ezekiel predicted that a time would come when the scattered tribes of Israel would return to the land of their forefathers, and that they would become a nation once more. As he wrote:
“And say unto them, thus saith the Lord God: behold, I will take the children of Israel from among the heathen, whither they be gone, and will gather them up on every side, and bring them into their own land: And I will make them one nation in the land upon the mountains of Israel”.
And as you know Mark, this actually happened on May 14, 1948, when the state of Israel came into being, following the adoption of a resolution by the United Nations General Assembly. Ezekiel then went on to predict that in the “latter days”, Israel would be attacked by a “mighty army”.
Mark: Did he say what sort of army this would be?
Yes Mark he did. In chapter 38, Ezekiel explained that this army would consist of a coalition of forces, ranging from Gog in “the north parts” (an obvious reference to Russia), as well as Gomer and Togarmah (places in modern Turkey), together with Persia (Iran), Ethiopia and Libya.
“Therefore, son of man, prophesy and say unto Gog, thus saith the Lord God; in that day when my people of Israel dwelleth safely, shalt thou not know it? And thou shalt come from thy place out of the north parts, thou, and many people with thee, all of them riding upon horses, a great company, and a mighty army.
“And thou shalt come up against my people of Israel, as a cloud to cover the land; it shall be in the latter days, and I will bring thee against my land, that the heathen may know me, when I shall be sanctified in thee, O Gog, before their eyes”.
According to Ezekiel, this vast army would assemble on the borders to the north, south and east of Israel. Their goal would be to eradicate the Jewish state once and for all, and claim the land as their own under a new Caliphate, with Jerusalem as its capital.
What I find significant about this Mark, is that Ezekiel makes it clear that the goal of this mighty army is not to destroy everything in its path with tanks, rockets and artillery, but rather to protect the holy Islamic shrines in Jerusalem, and spare the lives of those Arabs living in Israel at the time.
This also makes a lot of military sense, for Israel would prefer to attack enemy forces on foreign soil rather than inside the country, where there would be far more Jewish casualties. Plus, they would be hard pressed to withstand enemy forces that advanced from all sides at the same time.
But according to Ezekiel, just when all hope seems lost and the entire nation seems doomed, the Jews will be saved by a supernatural event. A comet will appear suddenly in the skies above the earth, causing great earthquakes and destruction throughout the land. For as he goes on to say:
“And it shall come to pass at the same time when Gog shall come against the land of Israel, saith the Lord God, that my fury shall come up in my face. For in my jealousy and in the fire of my wrath have I spoken. Surely in that day there shall be a great shaking in the land of Israel.
“So that the fishes of the sea, and the fowls of the heaven, and the beasts of the field, and all creeping things that creep upon the earth, and all men that are upon the face of the earth, shall shake at my presence. And the mountains shall be thrown down, and the steep places shall fall, and every wall shall fall to the ground”.
Mark: So what will be the fate of those armies surrounding Israel at that time?
According to Ezekiel, the armies that are gathered on the borders of Israel will be caught on the open plains. They will be will be exposed to the full fury of the “hailstones, fire and brimstone” that will descend on them from the skies. As he writes:
“And I will plead against him with pestilence and with blood; and I will rain upon him, and upon his bands, and upon the many people that are with him, an overflowing rain, and great hailstones, fire and brimstone”.
Anyway, as a result of the earthquakes on the land and the aerial bombardment from the skies, the armies that had gathered on the borders of Israel will be decimated. Those few who survive these disasters will either be unable, or unwilling, to pursue their assault.
Ezekiel writes that only “a sixth part” of the invading armies will survive the onslaught of the comet.
“Therefore, thou son of man, prophesy against Gog, and say, thus saith the Lord God; behold, I am against thee, O Gog, the chief prince of Meshech and Tubal: And I will turn thee back, and leave but the sixth part of thee.
“And I will smite the bow out of thy left hand, and will cause thine arrows to fall out of thy right hand. Thou shalt fall upon the mountains of Israel, thou, and all thy bands, and the people that is with thee: I will give thee unto the ravenous birds of every sort, and to the beast of the field to be devoured”.
Ezekiel goes on to write that, after the comet has passed, the countryside will be littered with the wreckage of the armaments and the bodies of the dead. So many people will die on the open plains on the eastern side of the Dead Sea that it will take the Israelis seven months to bury them all.
“And it shall come to pass in that day, that I will give unto Gog a place there of graves in Israel, the valley of the passengers on the east of the sea: and it shall stop the noses of the passengers: and there shall they bury Gog and all his multitude. And seven months shall the house of Israel be burying of them, that they may cleanse the land”.
Throughout chapters 37,38 and 39, Ezekiel paints a graphic picture of a failed military campaign against the state of Israel, and of the devastating losses incurred by the invading armies because of the timely intervention of the comet that is called “Wormwood” in St. John’s book of Revelation.
So Mark, what it all boils down to is this. We know what Ezekiel has predicted. What we need to ask ourselves now, based on what is going on in the region today, is whether there is any chance of such a conflict happening, and if so, whether it could happen soon?
Mark: That’s an intriguing question Allan. You have been studying the situation in the Middle-East for many years. What do you think?
Well Mark, my own hunch is that the scenario described by Ezekiel could most certainly happen. And the way the situation in the Middle-East is deteriorating in this age of Donald Trump, it seems not only possible, but probable. And sooner rather than later. Consider the following factors.
Firstly, the coalition of countries described by Ezekiel already exists. Russia is closely linked with both Iran and Turkey, especially since their major strategic interests all coalesce in Syria. And secondly, rebel forces in places like Libya, Ethiopia and Sudan would quickly join them if called upon to do so.
Because Russia’s Black Sea fleet is based in the port of Sevastopol in Crimea, it suffers from the disadvantage of having to pass through the narrow strait of the Dardanelles before it can reach the open sea. That is why Russia has long sought a naval base located in the Mediterranean.
And since becoming involved in the Syrian conflict at the request of Iran and President al-Assad in 2015, they have done exactly that. They have taken over the Syrian port of Tartous, and are using it as a base for Russian ships. They have also established two permanent air force bases in the country.
Because of its proximity to Israel, Syria has long been of crucial value to Iran. Ever since it became an Islamic Republic in 1979, Iran has committed itself to the goal of the destruction of the Jewish state, and no national occasion passes without reminding its citizens of this fundamental objective.
Up until now, it has done this primarily by funding and providing military equipment to the Hezbollah in Lebanon and Hamas in the Gaza strip, who have already been involved in a series of wars with Israel. And it is through Syria that most of these military supplies are provided.
Although not directly involved in the Syrian civil war up until now, Turkey has nevertheless played a significant part in determining its outcome. At one point it even found itself in conflict with the Russians, when it shot down one of their fighters that strayed into Turkish airspace.
But since that time President Erdogan has mended his friendship with Putin, and just recently signed an accord for Moscow to supply Ankara with the latest S-400 surface-to-air missiles. Turkey also continues to be a harsh critic of President al-Assad of Syria, and actively campaigns to replace him.
Erdogan has also strongly criticized the American decision to move its embassy from Tel Aviv to Jerusalem, telling members of his AK party: “God willing, the day is close when officially, with God’s permission, we will open our embassy in East Jerusalem”.
To summarise then Mark, the three main countries quoted by Ezekiel in this future war with Israel (Russia, Turkey and Iran), are more than capable of doing so. They all have forces close to the Israeli border, and are united in their opposition to recent moves involving the city of Jerusalem.
Although the decision to move the American embassy has the potential to destabilise the entire region, this by itself would not be justification for them to go to war. There would have to be something else – something far more serious – something the Israelis are certainly capable of bringing down upon themselves.
Mark: Why do you say that Allan?
No doubt emboldened by recent American support, the Israeli government has made even more provocative decisions in recent weeks. For example, it has accelerated plans to solidify its control over the city of Jerusalem, in a way that threatens the entire two-state solution to the Palestinian crisis.
In an all-night session, the Knesset (Israeli parliament) passed an amendment to Israel’s Basic Law, stipulating that any attempt to transfer sovereign control of Jerusalem to a foreign power, would now need a supermajority of 80 members out of 120, instead of the previous 61.
And in a move sure to enrage Palestinians even more, this same amendment authorised the Knesset to change the municipal borders of Jerusalem by a simple majority of 61. And if any Palestinian neighbourhood is later removed from city limits, it will still remain under Israeli control.
Just a few days earlier, the Likud Central Committee voted unanimously to apply Israeli law to all Israeli settlements on the West Bank. Although this vote was non-binding, it was a signal that the government might annex those areas of Palestinian land where over 600,000 Israelis now live.
Commenting on this vote the Israeli Minister of Public Security Gilad Erdan gloated: “We will tell the world it does not matter what outsiders say. We will place Israeli sovereignty over towns in Judea and Samaria (the Israeli term for the West Bank), not because of our strength but because of our rights”.
And it is this continual flaunting of Israeli power in the face of Palestinian weakness, that may prove to be the final straw that will one day prompt the enemies of Israel to mount a military campaign against them. And then there is the mysterious Biblical reference to the city of Damascus.
Mark: What does the Bible have to say about that?
Again Mark, the Bible gives us a clue as to what might soon happen in the Middle-East. But this time it is not the Old Testament prophet Ezekiel who is the source, but another Hebrew prophet who lived about two hundred years before him. I am talking here about Isaiah.
Isaiah begins the 17th chapter of his book of prophecy with a simple verse. It consists of just twenty words. Yet they have prompted more debate among Biblical scholars than perhaps any other single sentence. And to this day no one really knows for sure what Isaiah meant. This is what he wrote:
“The burden of Damascus. Behold, Damascus is taken away from being a city and it shall be a ruinous heap”.
While some Biblical historians maintain that this prophecy was fulfilled when Damascus was conquered in 732 B.C. by the Assyrian king Tiglath-Pileser, other scholars insist that this verse must refer to the future, since this Syrian city has been continuously occupied for well over 3,000 years.
In other words, they claim that whatever might have happened in the past, Damascus has never stopped being a city. And it has certainly never been reduced to “a ruinous heap”. So if this verse does refer to the future, then what might cause it to be reduced to a pile of rubble?
This is important Mark, because Isaiah is not just referring here to heavy physical damage, such as we have seen recently in other Syrian cities like Homs and Aleppo, which have been devastated by tanks, artillery and barrel bombs. He is talking here about total annihilation.
Mark: Do you think Damascus might be destroyed by the Israelis, and that is why these countries would decide to go to war?
Well you raise an interesting point Mark. And some preachers have suggested exactly that. In fact, they have even gone so far as to suggest that Damascus will be attacked by Israel, and that the entire city will be wiped out by a nuclear bomb.
One of the most prominent supporters of this idea is the American author Tim McHyde, who now makes his home in Germany. McHyde has devoted the last twenty years of his life to what he calls his “ministry”, which is to reveal the real meaning of Bible prophecy as it relates to the “last days”.
One of the pages of his website carries the title “Isaiah 17: Will Israel Nuke Damascus?” As he explains, although Israel insists that it will never to be the first country to use nuclear weapons, it might be forced to do so if it felt that its survival as a nation was threatened. As he writes:
“Importantly, Israel also has the will to use these weapons. Because Israel’s enemies are so numerous and able to overrun the tiny nation so easily, Israel has adopted a nuclear policy called “The Samson Option”.
“The name comes from the famously strong judge of Israel who took his own life by knocking out the support pillars of the temple he was in to avenge himself on his enemies around him. According to this policy, Israel would nuke the cities of her enemies if she was overrun or about to be defeated. Hitting the leadership of Syria at Damascus would be part of this retaliatory attack”.
Now if the Israeli government ever did decide that the nation’s existence was threatened, and went ahead and destroyed the city of Damascus, I have no doubt that this would lead to war with the Arab nations, especially if they used a nuclear weapon to do so. But I don’t believe they will.
Mark: Why not?
Well Mark, I believe that interpreters of events of the “last days” like Tim McHyde have completely misunderstood the nature and sequence of events that are described in the 17th chapter of the book of Isaiah, and the 38th chapter of the book of Ezekiel.
The reason I say that is because I am convinced that both chapters refer to the same event. Both Ezekiel and Isaiah are describing an event in the future where God’s wrath is visited upon the enemies of Israel, in which their armies are overcome, and the city of Damascus is completely wiped out.
As I see it, the first verse of chapter 17 of the book of Isaiah should read as follows: “Behold the fate of Damascus. It will no longer be a city, just a heap of ruins”. In my view, the destruction of Damascus will not be the cause of this future war, it will be the result of the war – i.e. collateral damage.
And the key to understanding this lies in the meaning of the words “fire, hail and brimstone”. People like Tim McHyde interpret these words as the fall-out from nuclear weapons, whereas Ezekiel makes it perfectly plain that the armies are not destroyed by human action, but by “Divine” intervention.
The words “fire and brimstone” are mentioned fourteen times in the Bible, including six times in the book of Revelation. The most famous example was the destruction of the cities of Sodom and Gomorrah. “Then the LORD rained upon Sodom and Gomorrah brimstone and fire from the LORD out of heaven”. (Genesis 19:24)
In a similar way, Damascus will be destroyed by fiery hailstones raining down upon it from the skies. This “fiery hail”, or what we would call today “incandescent meteorites”, will not only devastate the city with the power of their impact, but will set fire to the surrounding areas as well.
But that is not all. This fiery hail will be accompanied by a mighty earthquake that Ezekiel says will shake the entire land of Israel. And since Damascus is just over thirty miles from the Israeli border, there is every likelihood that it will be devastated by this earthquake as well.
Let me remind you again of the words in chapter 38 of the book of Ezekiel.
“And it shall come to pass at the same time when Gog shall come against the land of Israel, saith the Lord God, that my fury shall come up in my face. …Surely in that day there shall be a great shaking in the land of Israel….And the mountains shall be thrown down, and the steep places shall fall, and every wall shall fall to the ground”.
We need to remember that Damascus is not only a historic city, it is an old city. By that I mean “old” in terms of construction. So if an earthquake is strong enough to cause “mountains to be thrown down”, then buildings made of bricks and mortar will inevitably collapse into “a ruinous heap”.
Mark: Well I must admit Allan, you make a convincing case. So that raises my original question. Do we have any idea when all this will happen?
Well as I said before Mark, the Bible doesn’t give any dates. But there is another clue in prophecy which I think shows that it cannot be more than a few years away. This time the prophecy doesn’t come from the Bible, but from a 12th century Christian saint.
In my Blogpost entitled The Last Pope, I discussed how in the year 1139, a young Irish priest named father Malachy decided to undertake a pilgrimage to Rome to seek an audience with Pope Innocent II. But as soon as he got a glimpse of the Holy City, he fell to the ground in a trance.
During this trance, Malachy had a vision of the future of the Church, starting with his own time, and leading up to the return of the Christ. His vision included a sequence of all the Popes who would reign in Rome up until the time of the end. According to St. Malachy, there would be 112 of them.
According to St. Malachy, the last Pope (Number 112) would be the Pope who would witness the collapse of the Church and the rise to power on the world stage of the man who would come to be known as the Anti-Christ. This would be followed by the return of the Christ.
In describing the last Pope to hold the Office of Peter in the Church of Rome before the return of the Christ, St. Malachy ended his description with these chilling words:
“In extreme persecution, the seat of the Holy Roman Church will be occupied by Peter the Roman, who will feed the sheep through many tribulations, at the end of which the city of seven hills will be destroyed, and the formidable Judge will judge his people. The End”.
Now compare this Mark with the words of the “third secret of Fatima” that I spoke about earlier, that were included in the official version that was released to the public by the Vatican in the year 2000.
“And we saw in an immense light that is God: ‘something similar to how people appear in a mirror when they pass in front of it ‘a Bishop dressed in White ‘we had the impression that it was the Holy Father’. Other Bishops, Priests, men and women Religious going up a steep mountain, at the top of which there was a big Cross of rough-hewn trunks as of a cork-tree with the bark;
“Before reaching there the Holy Father passed through a big city half in ruins and half trembling with halting step, afflicted with pain and sorrow, he prayed for the souls of the corpses he met on his way; having reached the top of the mountain, on his knees at the foot of the big Cross he was killed by a group of soldiers who fired bullets and arrows at him,
“And in the same way there died one after another the other Bishops, Priests, men and women Religious, and various lay people of different ranks and positions. Beneath the two arms of the Cross there were two Angels each with a crystal aspersorium in his hand, in which they gathered up the blood of the Martyrs and with it sprinkled the souls that were making their way to God”.(View Source)
Mark: So how does this help us understand when these things are going to happen?
Well Mark, according to the sequence of Popes quoted by St. Malachy, the present Pope Francis is the 112th Pope. That means that he will be one who will experience “extreme persecution” and endure “many tribulations”. And he will be the one who will see the destruction of Rome, the “city of seven hills”.
And this is where the rubber meets the road, as I like to say. On December 17th of last year, Pope Francis celebrated his 81st birthday. So if he is the last Pope, who has to endure all those things that have been prophesied about him, simple common sense tells us that they would have to start soon.
So there you have it Mark. We now know what to look out for. We know where to look. We know who is going to be involved. So if we are to be guided by the words of Jesus, who told his followers to watch and pray, then this is the time to watch. And this is the time to pray.
Mark: Well Allan, once again I want to thank you for your amazing insight into what is happening in the world today, and how this ties in with Bible prophecy.
You have been listening to Allan Colston, author of the book The Last Days of Tolemac. Do join us for our next Podcast, which will be another in the series titled “Signs of the Times”.
Allan, AUDIO, Signs of the Times, What Time Is It?, January 3, 2018, 4:07 pm
My name is Mark Stevens. I am talking today with Allan Colston. He is the author of The Last Days of Tolemac, which is a book dealing with prophecy and other end-time events.
For those listeners who may be new to this topic, this is another in the series “Signs of the Times”. I’d like to start by welcoming you to this Podcast Allan, and by saying how much I am looking forward to our discussion today.
Thanks very much Mark. The feeling is mutual.
Mark: If you don’t mind, I wondered if we could go back to our last conversation. You will remember that when you said that the world as we know it may be coming to an end, I followed this up with a question.
As I recall, you said that if this really was the case, then why us and why now?
Mark: You have an excellent memory Allan. Anyway, you responded by saying that it was all about time. Now I have a further question to ask you, and that is: “If it is all about time, then what time is it?” Or to put this another way, how close are we to the time of the end?
That’s a great question Mark. In fact there are undoubtedly millions of people all around the planet who would love to know the answer to that question. But before I answer, let me ask you a question of my own. Why do you want to know?
Mark: Well Allan, like so many other people who are alarmed by what they see going on in the world today, I not only want to know how this is all going to end, but also how much time we have left?
Fair enough Mark. But there’s a deeper aspect to my question. Suppose I tell you that we have, say, twenty-six months left before life as we know it will come to an end. What difference will that make? Will this change the way you live your life? Or will it make any difference at all?
Mark: I guess I never really stopped to think about that.
This is a crucially important question Mark. The inescapable fact is that, whatever is about to happen on the earth, is going to happen no matter what we think about it. We cannot change that now. So the vital question then becomes, what can we do to prepare ourselves for what is about to happen?
Mark: Well that depends on what sort of things are going to happen, and where.
Well the good news is that we are not left totally in the dark about this. There are clues about what will happen at the time of the end. These clues lie hidden in the words of prophecy, if we have the wit and the wisdom to find them and follow them.
When I first began these Podcasts with Scott Paton back in 2010, one of the first topics I discussed with him was this question of prophecy, and whether it was wise, or even possible, to know what would happen in the future. This is what I had to say at that time.
Most people who are guided by science tend to believe that life unfolds according to chance, based on forces that can never be understood, let alone predicted. They believe that any attempt to try to predict future events is sheer folly. These people are content to take each day as it comes.
But throughout history, there have been men and women who have claimed to be able to predict future events. This has especially been true within the various religions of the world. These individuals have come to be regarded as divinely inspired, and their predictions have been accepted as the ordained will of God.
We need to remember that prophecy is not simple prediction. And those who claim to be prophets do not do so merely to inform. They are not just telling an interesting story. All true prophecy stands as a warning. And those who hope to benefit from it must be prepared to act on these warnings.
So the purpose of all true prophecy is to inspire understanding, and reduce suffering. And this is the crucial point we need to understand Mark. It is not enough to understand prophecy. We have to be prepared to act on this understanding. Just knowing about it won’t save us from future suffering.
To illustrate my point, do you happen to recall the story that I wrote about in my Blog about Pope John Paul II and the enigmatic third prophecy of Fatima, in which he pointed out the dangers of knowing about what is coming without doing anything about it?
Mark: I can’t say that I do. Perhaps you can refresh my memory.
Well just to recap, the prophecy itself dates back to a series of events that occurred over a century ago, at a place called Cova da Iria, near the village of Fátima in Portugal.
It was on 13th May 1917, when three young shepherd children claimed to have had a vision of a luminous angelic Being “brighter than the sun” whom they considered to be the Virgin Mary. The three children were Lúcia Santos and her two cousins Jacinta and Francisco Marto.
Lúcia was just ten years old when these visionary events began. This same apparition appeared before the three children around noon on the 13th day of each of the next six months. According to Lúcia, this “lady” confided in her and her two cousins, and shared three “secrets” with them.
These secrets have come to be known as the “Three Secrets of Fatima”.
On 13th July, 1917, Lúcia said that the Blessed Mother had told her that her two cousins would die in the near future. This prophecy was fulfilled a short time later when they both succumbed to the Spanish influenza pandemic in 1918, leaving Lúcia as the sole surviving witness.
Not long after the death of her two cousins, Lúcia entered the Convent of St. Dorothy in Tuy, Spain. In March 1948 she left this Convent to join the Carmelite Order of St. Theresa at Coimbra in Portugal, where she continued to live until her death on February 13th, 2005 at the age of 97.
Being a Carmelite Sister, Lúcia Santos was required to observe the customary vow of silence. However, she did write out an account of the events that had occurred to her in 1917, together with a description of the three secrets given to her by the Angelic Being.
The first two secrets were revealed to the world by the Vatican in August 1941. The first secret was said to have been a vision of Hell. The second predicted the end of World War I, and announced that an even greater war would follow unless the people of Russia chose to repent and return to the path of God.
The third and most important secret given to Lúcia was supposed to have been revealed to the world by the Vatican in 1960, supposedly at the direction of the visionary Being herself. However, when the year 1960 arrived, the Church refused to do so.
And this brings me to the point I wanted to make. In October 1980, Pope John Paul II spoke to a select group of Catholics at a meeting in Fulda in Germany. At this meeting he was asked what the third secret contained, and why it had not yet been revealed to the world.
Mark: Do we know what the Pope had to say about this?
Yes Mark we do, because a transcript of that meeting was later published in the German magazine Stimme des Glaubens. This is what Pope John Paul II was reported to have said in answer to this question:
“Given the seriousness of the contents, my predecessors in the Petrine office diplomatically preferred to postpone publication so as not to encourage the world power of Communism to carry out certain moves.
“On the other hand, it should be sufficient for all Christians to know this: if there is a message in which it is written that the oceans will flood whole areas of the earth, and that from one moment to the next millions of people will perish, truly the publication of such a message is no longer something to be so much desired.
“Many wish to know simply from curiosity and a taste for the sensational, but they forget that knowledge also implies responsibility. They only seek the satisfaction of their curiosity, and that is dangerous if at the same time they are not disposed to do something, and if they are convinced that it is impossible to do anything against evil”.
At this point the Pope grasped a Rosary and said: “Here is the remedy against this evil. Pray, pray, and ask for nothing more. Leave everything else to the Mother of God.” The Holy Father was then asked: “What is going to happen to the Church?”
He answered: “We must prepare ourselves to suffer great trials before long, such as will demand of us the readiness to cast away even our lives, and a total dedication to Christ and for Christ.
“With your and my prayer it is possible to mitigate this tribulation, but it is no longer possible to avert it, because only thus can the Church be effectively renewed.
“How many times has the renewal of the Church sprung from blood! This time, too, it will not be otherwise. We must be strong and prepared, and trust in Christ and His Mother, and be very, very assiduous in praying the Rosary.” (View Source)
It is worth repeating the Pope’s words here, when he said that “many wish to know simply from curiosity and a taste for the sensational”. But as he went on to warn, this knowledge also implies responsibility, and this is dangerous “if at the same time they are not disposed to do something”.
So even if we are successful in finding out what is about to happen Mark, this knowledge won’t help us unless it serves also to motivate us to change the way we live our lives. Fortunately, the Bible not only tells us what is going to happen, it also describes what we need to do about it as well.
Mark: What does the Bible have to say about this?
When Jesus was asked by his disciples what signs to look out for in the days leading up to his return, he replied:
“For then shall be great tribulation, such as was not since the beginning of the world to this time, no, nor ever shall be”. (Matthew 24:21) He also warned his disciples to be ready, because this tribulation would come suddenly, “like a thief in the night”. “Therefore be ye also ready. For in such an hour as ye think not the Son of Man cometh”. (Matthew 24:44)
As we can see from these words, Jesus warned his disciples that the end would come suddenly, at a time when no one was expecting it. Many would be unprepared. They would be caught unawares.
Unfortunately, most people in the world today are not ready. They remain completely unaware of the cataclysmic events that will shortly come to pass. They do not realise that they will be witnesses to the terror that is coming, and become the victims of the catastrophes that will follow.
And when these things do begin to happen, they will be the first ones who will cry out in anguish saying, why didn’t anyone warn us?
Jesus urged his followers to watch and pray. They needed to be constantly on guard for the time of the end, and pray always that they may be spared from the devastation of the Great Tribulation.
“And when these things begin to come to pass, then look up, and lift up your heads; for your redemption draweth nigh. And he spake to them a parable; behold the fig tree, and all the trees; when they now shoot forth, ye see and know of your own selves that summer is now nigh at hand.
“So likewise ye, when ye see these things come to pass, know ye that the kingdom of God is nigh at hand. And take heed to yourselves, lest at any time your hearts be overcharged with surfeiting, and drunkenness, and cares of this life, and so that day come upon you unawares.
“For as a snare shall it come on all them that dwell on the face of the whole earth. Watch ye therefore, and pray always, that ye may be accounted worthy to escape all these things that shall come to pass, and to stand before the Son of man.” (Luke 21: 28-36)
Jesus makes it clear that if we are to be counted worthy of escaping these disasters, we first have to live sacred and sober lives, and avoid the excesses of the flesh. And we must never allow the cares and responsibilities of this world to blind us from the warning signs of his return.
And that is why we also have to continually be aware of the events that are unfolding around us, so that we are not taken unawares, especially as Jesus warned his disciples that the great tribulation would come suddenly, “like a thief in the night”.
Mark: So does the Bible give us any clues as to when this might happen, so we can get an idea that to look out for?
Obviously, the Bible does not give us any dates Mark, but it does give us clues about the events that will unfold at that time. And then it is up to us to try to figure out how much time we have left. But based on what I see going on in the world today, I would guess that we only have a few years left.
Mark: Why do you say that Allan?
When Jesus was asked what sort of disasters would take place on the earth at the time of the end, he painted the scene in broad brushstrokes that left little to the imagination, as we can see from verses 10 and 11 of chapter 21 of the gospel of St. Luke:
“Then said he unto them, nation shall rise up against nation, and kingdom against kingdom: And great earthquakes shall be in divers places, and famines, and pestilences; and fearful sights and great signs shall there be from heaven”.
I think you can agree Mark, that many of these signs are already present in the world today, as can be seen from headlines in the daily news. But if Jesus merely outlined these events in general terms, it was his disciple John who spelled out the details in far more graphic terms.
In chapter six of his Book of Revelation, John described a scroll in God’s right hand that was sealed with seven seals. When these seals were opened, four beings were summoned forth to ride upon the world. Each being was seated on a horse of a different colour.
The first rider sat on a white horse. The second on a red horse. Then came a rider on a black horse. The final horseman rode a pale horse. Collectively, these four riders have come to be known in prophecy as “The Four Horsemen of the Apocalypse”.
According to St. John, each of these four riders symbolized a different type of plague that would afflict the earth at the time of the Great Tribulation. The first of these was “pestilence” or disease. Then came war and conquest, followed by famine and death.
But as I have mentioned before Mark, the Bible makes it clear that the seven-year period of tribulation will begin with a single event. That event is described in chapter 8, verse 8, of the Book of Revelation, when “a great mountain burning with fire was cast into the sea”.
Mark: So Allan, what do you think this verse refers to?
Well Mark, as I have explained in my Blog entry titled “The Day of the Lord”, I believe that this “great mountain burning with fire” refers to an asteroid. And for reasons I have described in my Blog, I am convinced that it will strike the ocean just west of the island of Puerto Rico.
The destruction caused by this asteroid will be far greater than any natural disaster in recorded history. To begin with, a succession of gigantic tsunamis will spread out across the open ocean in all directions from the impact site, at a speed of over 500mph (800kph), causing immense loss of life.
The first places to be affected will be Puerto Rico itself, along with all the other islands in the Caribbean. These tsunamis will then swamp all those countries bordering the Gulf of Mexico, as well as the entire East coast of the United States. They will also spread eastwards across the Atlantic ocean.
Countries like Belgium and the Netherlands will be completely engulfed in a matter of minutes, along with low-lying areas of Portugal, Spain, France and Germany. This will be the time when the Pope’s words will come to pass, when millions of people will perish “from one moment to the next”.
It will also bear out the prophecy of Edgar Cayce, when he said: “The earth will be broken up in the western portion of America. The greater portion of Japan must go into the sea. The upper portion of Europe will be changed as in the twinkling of an eye”. (Reading 3976-15)
While the damage to shipping and property along the shores of these coastal regions will be beyond calculation, it will be nothing compared to the number of human casualties, which will rise to many hundreds of millions of people all around the world on that first day alone.
But of course it doesn’t end there. In the immediate aftermath of this catastrophic event, all those hundreds of millions of corpses of the victims will lie rotting in lakes and rivers and on what is left of the land, contaminating the water and leading to vast outbreaks of disease.
For as we have seen recently in the aftermath of hurricanes Harvey, Irma, Jose and Maria, citizens who were forced to drink contaminated water faced a variety of potentially lethal diseases, ranging from cholera, fever and the plague, as well as flesh-eating disease.
For those unfortunate souls who survive this initial disaster, this will seem like the end of the world. But this will not be the end. It will merely be the beginning of seven years of tribulation that will lead to the death of billions of people around the planet. And then there will be the world-wide famine.
Mark: So what do the prophets have to say about that?
Well, as I have already indicated Mark, in chapter 6 of the Book of Revelation, St. John refers to the four horsemen of the apocalypse, saying: “And power was given unto them over the fourth part of the earth, to kill with the sword, and with hunger, and with death, and with the beasts of the earth”.
But we don’t need St. John to tell us that the world is in trouble. The signs of impending famine can be found all over the planet. I am talking here about desertification – the process whereby fertile land becomes desert, as a result of drought, deforestation and bad agricultural practices.
According to an economic analysis published recently by the United Nations Desertification Convention, severe land degradation is now affecting 168 countries around the world. According to this analysis, every year land degradation is wiping out an area three times the size of Switzerland.
And when you add to this the amount of agricultural land that is imperilled by the increase in ultra-violet radiation emanating from the sun that I wrote about in my Blog story about climate change, then you will see that we already have a potential world-wide calamity on our hands.
It also brings to mind some of the graphic quatrains penned by Nostradamus dealing with end-time events, such as:
Century One – Verse 67 The great famine which I sense approaching will often turn (in various areas) then become world-wide. It will be so vast and long lasting that (they) will grab roots from the trees and children from the breast.
Century Two – Verse 62 Mabus will soon die, then will come a terrible destruction of people and animals: Sudden vengeance will be seen, A hundred hands, thirst, famine, when the comet will pass.
Century Two – Verse 91 A great fire will be seen at sunrise, noise and light extending towards the north: Death within the earth, one will hear cries, Death awaits them through war, fire and famine.
Century Three – Verse 19 In Lucca it will rain blood and milk, shortly before a change of leader: Great plague and war, famine and drought will be seen, far from where the prince and ruler dies.
Century Three – Verse 42 A child born with two teeth in his mouth, stones will fall like rain in Tuscany: A few years after no wheat or barley, to satisfy those who faint from hunger.
Century Six – Verse 5 A very great famine caused by pestilence, will extend its length to the arctic pole: Samarobrin one hundred leagues from the hemisphere, They will live without law, free from government.
Mark: I guess we don’t have to be linguistic scholars to understand what Nostradamus was writing about. So that brings me back to my question at the beginning of this Podcast. How close do you think we are to the time of the end?
Well I do have some thoughts about that Mark. As I have pointed out many times in previous discussions, I believe that the Middle East is the powder keg that will light the fires of tribulation. So it is to the Middle East that we need to look for a likely timetable of events.
Back in January of this year, you may recall that we had a conversation entitled “Hail to the Chief”. In that conversation I said that I thought that Donald Trump could well be the last President of the United States, and that his actions could lead to the destruction of America and the beginning of the Great Tribulation.
The test would be whether Trump followed through with his promise to move the U.S. embassy in Israel from its present location in Tel Aviv to the contested city of Jerusalem. And as we all know by now, he went ahead and announced his plan to do this earlier this month.
At the time, I said that if he did so, this would lead to a firestorm of opposition throughout the Arab and Islamic world that would be directed at Israel and America. And that could in turn lead to a unified movement determined to wipe out the nation of Israel once and for all.
We shall have to wait and see whether the predictable outcry from Moslem and Arab nations will lead to the sort of action that the Bible predicts. But what we can say with assurance is that from an end-time prophetic point of view, the countdown has begun.
How much longer we still have to wait depends on a variety of factors. There is much more that I would like to say on this subject Mark, but to do justice to it would take a lot more time, so do you mind if we leave this to our next Podcast?
Mark: Not at all Allan. I appreciate everything that you have said so far, and look forward to our next discussion. You have been listening to Allan Colston, author of the book The Last Days of Tolemac. Do join us for Part Two of our Podcast, which will be another in the series titled “Signs of the Times”.
Allan, AUDIO, Signs of the Times, What Time Is It?, December 13, 2017, 9:27 pm
My name is Mark Stevens. I am talking today with Allan Colston. He is the author of The Last Days of Tolemac, which is a book dealing with prophecy and other end-time events.
For those listeners who may be new to this topic, this is another in the series “Signs of the Times”. Welcome to the Podcast Allan. I am sorry that it has taken me so long to get back to you.
No problem. Good to be with you again Mark.
Mark: You’ll remember that in our last Podcast we talked about end-time events, and whether the world as we know it may be coming to an end. I asked the question: If that really is the case, then why us, and why now?
I recall it well Mark. And I answered by saying that I had a simple answer to your question. Do you remember what I said?
Mark: You said: It’s about time.
That’s correct. So what do you think I meant by that?
Mark: Well Allan, I assumed you were making a joke along the lines of – well it’s about time that God put an end to all the evil in the world.
That’s not a bad assessment of the current world situation Mark. But I wasn’t making a corny comment in passing. I was actually referring to time itself – or more specifically – how we measure time. For example, we measure time by the movements of the earth in space.
We measure the length of a day by the time it takes for the earth to complete a single rotation of its axis, and the length of a year by the time it takes for the earth to complete a full orbit around the sun. From there we further subdivide time into months, days, hours, minutes and seconds.
But ancient cultures didn’t just think of time in terms of months and years. They thought of time in cycles of tens of thousands of years, which they called “ages” and “eras”. And they attached special meanings to these cycles that are quite different from the way we think of time today.
But before I go into these differences in more detail, I need to explain the difference between “esoteric” time and “exoteric” time. Perhaps the best way to do this is to refer to chapter 3 of the gospel of St. John, where the disciple describes a meeting between Jesus and a Pharisee named Nicodemus.
Nicodemus asked Jesus how a man could enter into the kingdom of God. When Jesus replied by saying that no one could see the kingdom of God unless he was born again, Nicodemus expressed amazement, and asked how it was possible for a man to enter again into his mother’s womb.
When it became clear that Nicodemus had no idea what he was talking about, Jesus replied with equal amazement, asking him: “Art thou a master of Israel and knoweth not these things?”. He then went on to make a statement that goes to the heart of my reply to you.
“If I have told you earthly things and ye believe not, how shall ye believe if I tell you of heavenly things”. So what Jesus was saying to Nicodemus was that, if he was unable to understand matters relating to the material world, then how could he expect to understand his answers to spiritual matters.
Because we live in materialistic age which takes no account of non-material things, we pay little heed today to the words of spiritual sages, or even to Shakespeare, who wrote in his play Hamlet: “There are more things in heaven and earth, Horatio, than are dreamed of in your philosophy”.
Why I mention that excerpt from the Bible is that we are accustomed to explaining the things that we see and sense around us in purely material terms. And what Jesus was saying to Nicodemus was that there are other ways of looking at life, and that is in “heavenly” terms.
Within the occult (or hidden) tradition of the world, there is “exoteric” knowledge and there is “esoteric” knowledge. Exoteric knowledge is designed to be understood by the general public, while “esoteric” knowledge is intended only for the select few.
And what I want to discuss in this Podcast Mark, is knowledge that has largely remained hidden from the general public, and has only been divulged to genuine seekers of the truth. So my answer to your question Mark, relates to esoteric time rather than exoteric time.
So let me start by asking you a question of my own. What do you know about the phenomenon of the “precession of the equinoxes”?
Mark: Well I know that it has something to do with astronomy, but I am a little hazy on the details. Perhaps you can fill me in.
Certainly Mark. As you say, the precession of the equinoxes is a term used by astronomers. It describes a cycle of time during which the various constellations that make up the zodiac appear to rotate slowly behind the rising sun at the time of each new spring equinox.
The reason why this phenomenon occurs is because, as it rotates on its axis, the earth has a very slight wobble. It is rather like a spinning top which wobbles slightly from side to side as it spins. And as the earth wobbles, it appears as if the position of the sun is changing in our skies.
What this means is that at the time of the spring equinox, the sun appears to move very slightly westward against the background stars. This movement is very slow, and only completes a full revolution roughly every 26,000 years. The Greeks referred to this cycle of time as a “Platonic” year.
What is truly remarkable about this precession of the equinoxes, is that while modern astronomers have only known about this phenomenon for a few hundred years, ancient cultures have known about it for literally tens of thousands of years.
And although we have no written record describing this precessionary cycle before the Greeks, we know from the writings of Aristotle that ancient cultures not only knew about this phenomenon, but they incorporated this knowledge in the designs of their sacred structures.
According to the mystery schools of Egypt and Babylon, this knowledge was held to be sacred, and was only transmitted by word of mouth, and then only to those who had been initiated into the sacred mysteries which these schools were designed to protect.
These ancient cultures were the first to divide the sky into twelve equal parts, and to christen the constellations that were prominent in each part. These constellations have come down to us today as the twelve signs of the zodiac. And each sign of the zodiac held a secret and sacred meaning.
So according to the time-clock of the precession of the equinoxes, it would take roughly 2,160 years for the earth to move from one sign of the zodiac to another. Each of these segments was called an “age”, and the time it took to complete the entire cycle was referred to as an “era”.
Mark: So how does this relate to what is going on in the world today?
Well Mark, the mystery schools of ancient cultures dating back to the time of Sumeria, taught that the history of the earth could not only be measured in terms of these precessionary cycles or “ages”, but that each age was influenced by those constellations that characterised each zodiacal sign.
Based on this knowledge, and guided by the constellations visible behind the sun at the time of the spring equinox, we know that the “age of Pisces” has recently come to an end, and that we have now entered the “age of Aquarius”. And we can project these cycles of time backwards as well.
The age of Pisces was preceded by the age of Aries (the Ram), and before that came the age of Taurus the Bull, Gemini the Twins, Cancer the Crab and Leo the Lion. And the mystery schools of Egypt taught that the great Sphinx at Giza was constructed in the age of Leo, roughly 12,500 years ago.
According to this esoteric history of time, the last 2,000 years or so have been dominated by the astrological sign of Pisces, represented by the sign of the fishes. Why this is significant, is because it relates to the date on which Jesus was born.
Christians everywhere celebrate the birth of Jesus on the 25th of December each year. This was the date selected by Pope Julius 1, shortly after the Roman Emperor Constantine the Great announced that Christianity would become the official religion of Rome in the 4th century AD.
But there are numerous indicators to suggest that Jesus was not born during the winter, but in the early spring, under the astrological sign of Pisces, which runs from February 19 to March 20. One of these is that early Christians used the sign of the fishes to identify their followers.
Another indicator is that Joseph and Mary travelled to Bethlehem to register for the census ordered by Caesar Augustus, and he would have been unlikely to have issued this decree in the middle of winter, when temperatures often dropped below freezing and the roads were in poor condition.
Also, St. Luke writes in his gospel that when Jesus was born, there were shepherds in the fields watching over their flocks by night. Again, since it is cold and rainy in Judea during the month of December, it is unlikely that shepherds would have been in the fields at that time of year.
But the main reason why Pope Julius chose December 25th as the birth-date of the Christ, was because the time of the mid-winter solstice had long been associated with a popular Pagan festival. So by choosing this date, the Pope was able to replace the old Pagan festival with a new Christian tradition.
As you know Mark, most parts of the world have been using what is known as the Gregorian calendar, which went into effect in October 1582. And according to this calendar, I believe that Jesus was actually born on 25th February.
The reason I say that Mark, is because on that day there was a special alignment of planets in the sky. And it was this alignment of planets which was the focal point of the three wise men from the East mentioned in the Bible.
And what is significant about this date is that a similarly unusual alignment of planets occurred in February 1962. And this was the date when esoteric astrologers had predicted that the age of Pisces would come to an end, and the new age of Aquarius would begin.
Mark: What sort of alignment of planets are you referring to?
Monday, February 5, 1962, was one of the most significant days in the history of the earth. For starters, there was a total eclipse of the sun on that day. And as we have recently seen, the moon blocks out the light of the sun in certain parts of the earth. But that was just the beginning.
There was something else that would not happen again for another 26,000 years. For on that day the sun and moon, together with the planets Mercury, Venus, Mars, Jupiter and Saturn were all grouped together within 16 degrees of one another in the same sign of the zodiac.
The sign they were grouped in was Aquarius. And according to the esoteric tradition, this was not just a transition from one age to another. It represented the end of an era and the beginning of a completely new cycle of life, not just on earth, but in the entire solar system.
So the year 1962 did not just represent the transition from one 2,100 year cycle to another. It represented the end of a 26,000 year “era”, and the beginning of an entirely new era. And this new era would not just be a continuation of the past, but the start of something completely new.
So when you asked me why the earth as we know it might be coming to an end, I answered by saying that it was about time. So do you understand now what I was referring to Mark, and how this relates to climate change?
Mark: I guess I am beginning to get the drift of it. But perhaps you could explain to me again how this relates to climate change.
Certainly Mark. In Part Four of my Blog entry entitled “An Inconvenient Truth”, I mentioned that American investigative journalist Marjorie Tietjen had written an article concerning chemtrails in which she posed the question: “Who is doing this – and why? And how long will they keep doing it?”
She went on to write that on the very day that her article appeared online, she received a long letter from an anonymous source that began with the words “I know what chemtrails are and their purpose”. And in this reply, the anonymous source included the following information.
“As long ago as the early 1940s, some physicists and astronomers began to notice a pattern of change coming over the sun. It did not become more pronounced until the new millennium arrived.
“Scientists, some working for the military or the federal government, began to think the unthinkable: the sun and all the planets were beginning a massive transformation.
“This transformation is unstoppable, potentially catastrophic to life and will most certainly cause the Earth’s environment to experience abrupt changes on a massive scale.
“Because the sun and all the planets together are reacting to this outside phenomenon, it is beginning to be suspected that some trans-dimensional energy in this region of space is interacting with the normal activity of the sun and the planets.
“Hyper-dimensionalism or trans-dimensional energy transference, call it what you will, this phenomenon seems to be at the root of the system-wide disaster unfolding right before our eyes. It is only the beginning, perhaps the beginning of the end”.
So it is clear from this reply that by the latter part of the 20th century, scientists had become aware that the entire solar system was reacting to “some trans-dimensional energy” that was coming from outside the solar system, and that this was “potentially catastrophic to life”.
Now if you don’t mind, Mark, I’d like to compare this with the words of the Oracle of Tolemac that I quoted in my book.
Mark: Sure Allan, carry on.
“The ancient priests of Tolemac knew that space was not empty, but was filled with dynamic fields of energy. They knew that as the solar system moved through space it would constantly come in contact with these different fields of energy.
“They knew that the energy fields through which the solar system would pass during the age of Aquarius would be totally different from those it had encountered in the previous age of Pisces. As a result, the entire earth would be transformed by these new energies.
“The most obvious signs of these new energies would be seen in the weather, as well as in the overall climatic conditions on the earth. Some of these changes would be for the better, while others would be destructive. The very forces of nature would appear to be out of control for a time”.
So Mark, do you see the correlation between these two sources of information, one “exoteric” and the other “esoteric”? And do you see the link between this new “trans-dimensional energy” coming from outer space, and the climatic changes now taking place upon the earth?
Mark: I do now. But why would these changes be destructive?
Perhaps it would be clearer if I referred once again to the words of the Oracle:
“If the past history of the earth had been one of peaceful coexistence and harmony with all forms of life, this passage of earth from the age of Pisces into the age of Aquarius would have been one of great beauty and joy.
“But because the age of Pisces has been dominated by constant cycles of aggression, oppression and war, there must be a “karmic cleansing” before the golden age on earth can begin”.
Mark: So what do you think he means by the words “karmic cleansing”?
Again Mark, let me answer you in the words of the Oracle as they were relayed in my book:
“The entire universe operates under the law of cause and effect. All life is bound by this law. Every action that a person takes in life has a specific result or consequence. This result or consequence is referred to in the East by the name of “Karma”. Positive actions generate positive results and negative actions produce negative results.
“Throughout their lives people are constantly confronted by the results of their actions. If these actions help others, they will be helped in return. If they harm others, they will be harmed in return.
“Every action returns to its source. The path to happiness in life lies in creating happiness in others. Those who are responsible for creating violence, oppression or injustice will reap the consequences of their actions. This is the universal law.
“These karmic consequences may not happen immediately. They may take many years to appear. In some cases they may even be carried over into other lifetimes.
“But whether it is in this lifetime or the next all accounts have to be squared before the universal balance is restored. The pathway to Everlasting Light is an evolutionary process. The purpose of life is to teach people, lifetime by lifetime, the consequences of their actions.
“In the history of a planet, the circumstances that occur at any particular stage are the result of the combined actions of all those people living on the planet at that time. Nature usually has long periods of time in which to balance these karmic accounts.
“But there are occasions when these actions need to be balanced in a very short span of time. Because the earth has reached the end of a Great Cycle in the cosmic plan, there needs to be an overall balance of karma before the new age can begin to manifest its divine potential.
“This is what we mean by “karmic cleansing”. We can see the beauty of this plan, for if this cleansing did not take place, the new age would still be bound by the conditions of the past and a new golden age on earth would not be possible”.
How does this cleansing take place?
“This cleansing takes place when a planet releases the negative energies that have been stored in its karmic atmosphere over time. Natural forces such as earthquakes, tornadoes and hurricanes are nature’s way of releasing the negativity that has been built up in the past.
“The “fault lines” that exist in various places on the earth act as receivers for much of this negativity, and earthquakes and volcanic eruptions are the earth’s natural way of releasing this negativity. That is why humanity is responsible for the harmful weather conditions that occur on the earth.
“The new energies that are radiating throughout the solar system are responsible for bringing about this cleansing, so that the earth can begin the new age in balance once more.
“There is so much negative energy that is still locked up in the earth. This negativity has been building up for thousands of years. It must be released before the earth can be healed.
“The people of earth need to understand what is happening to their planet, and why it is happening, because this cleansing will take the form of severe earthquakes, hurricanes and other cataclysmic effects”.
Why is it necessary to undergo all these disasters?
“It is not necessary to undergo all these disasters. If your societies had followed the teachings of the wise men and women of the past, your world would not be in the state it is today and the earth would not have to undergo these catastrophic changes.
“If that had happened then the changes would have been harmonious and beautiful. There would have been no need for these disasters. It is man’s own thinking that is the cause of the consequences that must now unfold upon the earth.
“It is his selfishness, his greed and his callous disregard for the welfare of those who share the world with him that are the causes of these catastrophes. For century after century humanity has suffered because of man’s inhumanity to man. But this will come to an end at last.
“The chaos and disaster that will soon engulf the earth is tragic. But it would be even worse if this suffering was allowed to continue.
“The catastrophes that are to come are not some sort of divine revenge for the evil and injustice that have taken place on earth. They are merely the natural consequences of your own thoughts and actions, and the way you have chosen to live your lives.
“Catastrophe comes so that man may experience the consequences of his actions. If these consequences seem harsh it is because the actions that are the causes of these catastrophes have been equally harsh. But out of this harshness will come great beauty and good.
“For out of these catastrophes will come a new humanity. One that has been chastened and purified. They will inherit the new heaven and the new earth that has been prepared for them. They will be cleansed from the evils of the past, and be free at last to fulfil their divine potential”.
Mark: All that sounds fine Allan, but the process of getting from where we are now to what is coming in the future seems pretty scary to me.
It might seem so Mark, but we should always bear in mind the following words of the Oracle:
“We want you to know that everything that is happening on your planet at this time is part of a plan. This is the great Cosmic Plan that will lead you into the coming golden age.
“The moment is at hand when the earth will take the greatest evolutionary step that humanity will ever witness. Never before in the history of earth will there be changes as profound as those which now await you.
“For you have reached that point in your history when many will face the same conditions that occurred on that far-off day in Tolemac, when the earth shook, the waters rose, the land fell, and the people cried out in terror, for fear that they would be destroyed.
“We want you to go forward to meet these changes with joy and understanding, rather than in fear and denial.
“For if you surround yourselves with love, and consciously project this love to others, these changes will not harm you. But if you surround yourself with fear, you will attract the very thing that you fear, and that can destroy you”.
Mark: Well Allan, I must say that whenever we get together you fill me with alarm. But at the same time you give me so much to think about as well.
You have been listening to Allan Colston, author of the book The Last Days of Tolemac. Do join us for our next Podcast, which will be another in the series titled “Signs of the Times”.
Allan, AUDIO, Signs of the Times, What Time Is It?, October 18, 2017, 10:42 am
My name is Mark Stevens. I am talking today with Allan Colston. He is the author of The Last Days of Tolemac, which is a book dealing with prophecy and other end-time events.
For those listeners who may be new to this topic, this is another in the series “Signs of the Times”. Welcome to this Podcast Allan. I’m delighted to be able to chat to you again.
It’s my pleasure Mark.
Mark: So much has happened since our last Podcast just a few weeks ago about climate change, that I feel like I owe you an apology.
Why is that Mark?
Mark: Well I started off that discussion by asking you whether you really believe that the changes that are taking place in the earth’s climate today are as serious as you make them out to be?
And now, as a result of the devastating hurricanes of the last few weeks, it is obvious that our weather is a far greater hazard than I had ever imagined. So I am sorry that I doubted you.
Well I certainly don’t derive any satisfaction from it all Mark. The graphic scenes shown on TV lately have been absolutely devastating, and my heart goes out to all those who have had to live through these experiences, not only in the United States but in the Caribbean as well.
It’s not just the fact that so many people have been caught up in these disasters. What makes it worse is that for many thousands of those who have lost everything, their time of tribulation predicted in the Bible has already begun, for they will never regain what they have lost.
And it is not as if these extreme hurricanes are rare events that only happen once or twice a century. There now seems every likelihood that these extreme weather events will continue to happen, not just with increasing frequency, but with increasing ferocity. So things may get even worse.
What made hurricanes Harvey, Irma and others so devastating was their size as well as their windspeed. Harvey dumped more rain on the state of Texas than any other hurricane in recorded US history, while Irma was so large that it ultimately covered the entire state of Florida.
And the key factor in both these cases was heat, because the oceans that spawned them were hotter than ever before. Hurricane Irma was formed in tropical waters off the coast of Africa, and from there travelled west into the Caribbean where sea temperatures were 90 degrees or more.
And hurricane Harvey continued to rotate around the Texas coast for days on end, sucking up moisture from the equally hot waters of the Gulf of Mexico, and then dumping it on the city of Houston, which then experienced record floods.
As climatologists are now discovering, the earth’s circulation system is getting hotter, with predictable consequences. As the climate warms, so evaporation rates go up which then leads to increasing precipitation. More moisture is drawn up into the clouds, which then falls as rain.
But not all places are being affected equally. Although the overall temperature of the air may be getting warmer, it is not uniform in the way it affects the planet, since the hotter air over the land is not evaporating as much moisture as the air over the oceans.
So while the humidity on the land rises, often creating intolerable living conditions for people living in those parts of the world as it does so, this does not necessarily lead to rain. Instead, these places often experience extended droughts, as we are already seeing in different parts of the world.
So the reality is that hurricanes like Harvey and Irma may not just happen once or twice in a lifetime. Instead they may become routine in years to come. And the periodic droughts that scour the land may soon turn entire food-growing areas of the world into dustbowls.
And this of course just brings us back to the same basic equation. The earth and the oceans are getting hotter because the sun is getting hotter. And as we discussed in our previous Podcast, the sun is getting hotter because of increased cosmic radiation coming from beyond the solar system.
Mark: When you put it like that, I can see why you wrote in your Blog that the earth is threatened with extinction. But I still can’t get my head around the idea that the entire history of mankind could suddenly come to an end.
Surely you don’t think that our entire civilization might become extinct, after thousands of years of progress, from cavemen up to the scientific age in which we live today?
Actually Mark, I do. And the reason I say that is because it has it has happened before. And not just once, but many times. This may come as a shock to many people. Entire civilizations have disappeared without trace. After all, we have only to look at the Bible to find evidence of this.
In the 7th verse of chapter 6 of the book of Genesis, we read how the Lord said: “I will destroy man whom I have created from the face of the earth, both man, and beast, and the creeping thing, and the fowls of the air, for it repenteth me that I have made them.”
And what strikes me as particularly pertinent is the reason the Bible gives why God did this. “And God saw that the wickedness of man was great in the earth, and every imagination of the thoughts of his heart was only evil continually”. Ring any bells Mark?
While most people tend to treat the Biblical account of a world-wide flood as a fanciful legend, more and more evidence is emerging to suggest that this is exactly what took place many thousands of years ago. This evidence is now being found in every corner of the world.
Our scholars and scientists are taught that the first stirrings of civilization began in Mesopotamia some six thousand years ago, and yet we find megalithic structures all over the world that were obviously built many thousands of years before that.
Elsewhere on my Blog I have referred to the work of Boston geologist Robert Schoch indicating that the body of the sphinx in Egypt shows signs of erosion that could only have been caused by prolonged exposure to water. He believes that the sphinx is at least 11,000 years old.
Even Darwin was confronted with evidence of global catastrophe when he wrote in his Journal of Researches: “Certainly, no fact in the long history of the world is so startling as the wide and repeated exterminations of its inhabitants. What, then, has exterminated so many species and whole genera?
“The mind at first is irresistibly hurried into the belief of some great catastrophe; but thus to destroy animals, both large and small, in Southern Patagonia, in Brazil, on the Cordillera of Peru, in North America up to Behring’s Straits, we must shake the entire framework of the globe.”
Despite clear fossil evidence of animals, both large and small, that had been wiped out from Southern Patagonia all the way up to the Bering Straits, Darwin could not bring himself to believe that “the entire framework of the globe” could have been shaken by a world-wide catastrophe.
Yet if he had continued his journey to Easter Island in the central Pacific Ocean, he would have seen huge stone effigies called Moai that were buried up to their necks in sand, that was clearly deposited by some ancient flood long after these statues were carved.
And then there are the ancient megalithic ruins of Gobekli Tepe in Turkey, and Puma Punku in Bolivia. Both of these sites were also covered by soil that had been deposited over them at some time in the distant past, indicating that they too had once been overcome by a giant flood.
All of this points to the fact that some unimaginable disaster engulfed the world about 13,000 years ago, leaving nothing but stray stone remnants of the cultures that had created them, and of whom we know virtually nothing. However, later cultures did leave some tantalising written records.
Mark: What sort of records are you referring to?
The idea that the earth has undergone a succession of catastrophic upheavals was not limited to the Jews, the Greeks and the Egyptians. In central America, the Maya had legends of their own describing times when the earth was convulsed by cosmic encounters.
While these stories vary in the number of ages that have come and gone, they all agree that at periodic intervals various disasters have assailed the earth causing widespread destruction. The agents of this destruction have been earthquakes, hurricanes and floods, as well as “fire from the sky”.
The Chinese believed that there had been ten different ages from the beginning of the world up to the time of Confucius. They referred to these vanished ages as Kis, and their ancient encyclopedia described these past eras in the following words:
“In a general convulsion of nature, the sea is carried out of its bed, mountains spring out of the ground, rivers change their course, human beings and everything are ruined, and the ancient traces effaced”.
The sacred Hindu book Bhagavata Purana called these past ages Kalpas or Yugas, and indicated that there had been four previous ages of mankind, and that each of these different ages had ended as a result of a different kind of catastrophe.
The ancient Buddhist scripture called the Visuddhi-Magga, which was written about 430 BC, described these different kinds of catastrophe as follows: “There are three destructions: the destruction by water, the destruction by fire, and the destruction by wind”.
Even the Greeks had an extinction story of their own. According to their mythology, Phaeton asked his father Helios, the sun god, if he could drive the chariot of the sun across the sky. Unfortunately, he drove it too close to the earth, causing his father to kill him with a thunderbolt.
In a passage recorded by Plato in his essay entitled Timaeus, when the Athenian statesman Solon visited Egypt some six hundred years before the birth of Christ, an elderly priest said to him:
“Oh Solon, Solon, you Greeks are all children, and there is no such thing as an old Greek. You are all young in mind. You have no belief rooted in the old tradition and no knowledge hoary with age. And the reason is this. There have been and will be many different calamities to destroy mankind, the greatest of them by fire and water, lesser ones by countless other means.
“Your own story of how Phaeton, child of the sun, harnessed his father’s chariot, but was unable to guide it along his father’s course and so burnt up things on earth and was himself destroyed by a thunderbolt, is a mythical version of the truth that there is at long intervals a variation in the course of the heavenly bodies and a consequent widespread destruction by fire of things on the earth”.
But that’s not all Mark. Another famous Greek, this time Herodotus, who has been called the “Father of History”, visited Egypt for himself and recorded his own conversations that he had with various Egyptian priests. This is what he wrote in his Second Book of History:
“The priests asserted that within historical ages and since Egypt became a kingdom, four times in this period (so they told me) the sun rose contrary to his wont; twice he rose where he now sets, and twice he set where he now rises.”
Mark: Well done Allan, I must congratulate you on your knowledge of ancient literature. I had no idea about all this.
Well Mark, I have to concede that everything I know about this comes from Immanuel Velikovsky. He was the great Jewish scholar who devoted years of his life to researching the historical texts of many ancient cultures, and they tell a very different story from what we are taught today.
But the reason I bring this up is because there appears to be a sinister parallel between what was recorded in ancient times, and what we are observing in our skies today. Not only is something very strange happening to our sun, but to the axis of the earth as well.
For if those Egyptian priests who spoke to Herodotus were correct, and the sun actually did change its course and rise in the west instead of the east, this could only mean that, at some point within the living memory of humanity, the earth flipped upside down. And not once, but several times!
In other words, the earth turned on its axis by 180º – something that modern astronomers believe to be impossible. But just suppose that those ancient Egyptian priests were correct and the earth did flip on its axis. And if it happened then, could it also happen now?
As every child is taught in school today, the earth does not spin vertically on its own axis. It tilts to one side, and it is this tilt that accounts for the different seasons that we experience on the earth. And for the last several thousand years, this angle of tilt has remained pretty much the same.
Today the earth’s axis is tilted roughly 23.5 degrees from the plane of its orbit around the sun. So from the point of view of people on the earth, the sun appears to move between the tropic of Cancer in the north, and the tropic of Capricorn in the south.
However, this angle of tilt does change slightly over time, and over a period of about 41,000 years it varies between 22.1 and 24.5 degrees. However, this tiny correction could never cause the sun to appear to change its course and rise in the west instead of the east, as the Egyptian priests claimed.
But this is where things become, as I say, a little sinister Mark, because I keep coming across reports that suggest that the axis of the earth may be changing. And although these changes may be small for now, they could become a lot greater in the days to come.
Mark: What sort of changes are you talking about?
Well Mark, you won’t find any mention of this in the press, and certainly nothing about it in any scientific reports. But people who have lived in the same location for many years are beginning to report things that don’t seem quite right.
As I have mentioned before, if you want to know what is really going on in the world today, it is often more instructive to listen to ordinary citizens than the Government. And the best place to do this is to check out the comments on YouTube videos dealing with changes in the sun.
I have made a habit of doing this ever since I became interested in the subject of axial tilt. Here are a few examples of what people have been reporting lately about changes they have noticed in the path of the sun. I am quoting them exactly as they were written.
I’m in Upstate N.Y. I’ve lived in the same home for 45 years. My kitchen windows face due north. The Sun now sets shining into my north facing windows. Noticed it last year a little, but now it’s very noticeable!
I’m in Southern Michigan and have been noticing the changes in the sun location as well as the stars. The Earth is tilting to the South. That would likely be the reason for the melting of the North Pole as well. Not necessarily global warming, but a global shifting of the poles.
Down in New Zealand (North Island) it is the same – rising in north-east and setting NNW! Back room gets no sun as it is lying south! Solar panels were put up in 2015 (Dec) and don’t make power like they used to, even with it being winter! Nothing normal. Blinds on the east were made to shade – sun doesn’t shine on true east now!
I live up in Northern Michigan on Torch lake, and things are way off. It’s been very cold and way too much precipitation. My north deck now gets sun all day. We also had to move our solar panels from the south side of our house to the north side. Things are definitely changing.
I live in NW Indiana and I have followed the signs of the times and events of the days for several years now. I am certain that the sun is setting much farther north than in years past.
Am in Lower Michigan Battle Creek area. The Sun surely has been rising and setting so far North that the North side of my house now gets sun on it. I usually have to power-wash the moss off it because the sun never hit it. Not this year.
Here in UK Somerset we used to watch the sunsets from our back garden for as long as I can remember, but now the sunsets are only visible from the front of the house [north]!!
This is true for me too. I’m in Grandview Missouri. I’ve noticed that sun is setting way far to the north, like in northwest instead of west.
The Inuit in the Arctic have been saying this for the last few years. I watch the sun set into the Pacific Ocean from Costa Rica and the sun now sets a solid 30 degrees further north than it did 10 years ago. At its most northern set on the June 21st solstice it would set into the ocean from off the point of Playa Coyote. Now when it sets on this date it now touches the horizon on land a full 30 degrees further north than it used to.
Mark: This does sound suspicious Allan, but we can’t draw any significant conclusions from a few comments on YouTube.
Quite right Mark. However, if these comments indicate that the sun really is following a different path in the sky, then it could only be because the axial tilt of the earth is changing. And there does seem to be scientific evidence that this is happening.
About a year ago, NASA scientists reported that the axis of the earth appeared to be shifting. According to University of Tasmania geodesist Matt King, NASA found that the axis had shifted dramatically from its long-term path, first in 2005, and then again in 2012.
These scientists concluded that the reason for this was that global warming was causing hundreds of billions of tons of ice to melt, particularly in Greenland and the Arctic ocean, and that this loss rate was two to three times more than it had been between 2003 and 2009.
This differential in the weight of ice at the geographical North and South poles was causing the axis of the earth to wobble. And although the extent of this wobble was still relatively small, no one could predict what might happen in the years to come.
I am reminded here of an episode I heard on the popular late-night radio talk show “Coast to Coast AM” several years back, in which listeners were invited to submit examples of any dreams or visions they had about the future. George D. in Vancouver, B.C. had this to say:
“I see the obliquity of Earth’s axis changing due to the melting of polar ice, shifting trillions upon trillions of tons of earth’s mass towards the equator, which causes the continental plates to shift”. He then went on to add:
“An abrupt ending to Mid-Eastern wars and current global conflicts occurs – due to massive earthquakes as the continental plates shift from their present location. Many nations and islands will be obliterated. Food shortages and lack of fresh water will escalate, affecting all people on earth”.
Remember, the authorities are not telling us what is really going on. As I have pointed out on my Blog, they routinely understate the intensity of UV radiation so as not to alarm the public. Could something similar be happening with changes in the axis of the earth?
But if you don’t mind Mark, I’d like to go back to the beginning of my article on climate change titled “An Inconvenient Truth”. I quoted the words of Richard Leakey, the renowned Kenyan paleoanthropologist, who had this to say about the environmental crisis facing the world.
Mark: Certainly. What did he have to say?
“If you look at the fossil record, the thing that strikes you is that extinction is the most common phenomena. Extinction is always driven by environmental change, and environmental change is always driven by climate change.”
Leakey went on to say that, according to the fossil record, over 95% of all the species that have ever lived upon the earth have become extinct. And the cause of all these deaths has been a succession of what he calls “extinction level events”.
So according to Leakey, while climate change may signal impending changes on the earth, it is the actual “extinction level event” that leads to all the casualties. And most often, these extinction events are caused by “fire from the sky”.
And this is where Bible prophecy comes in. For the Bible not only predicts the climate and environmental changes that we are seeing on the earth today, but it also describes an extinction level event that would destroy a large proportion of life on this planet.
In the 8th chapter of his Book of Revelation, St. John wrote:
“And the third angel sounded, and there fell a great star from heaven, burning as it were a lamp, and it fell upon the third part of the rivers, and upon the fountains of waters; and the name of the star is called Wormwood; and the third part of the waters became wormwood; and many men died of the waters, because they were made bitter”.
And ever since that time, Biblical scholars have debated what it was that St. John was describing. The key for me Mark, is the fact that he describes this “great star from heaven” as “burning like a lamp”. In other words, it was glowing in the sky before it fell to earth.
This description makes it likely that Wormwood is a comet, especially since this interpretation is shared by mystics like Nostradamus, Edgar Cayce, Mother Shipton and St. Hildegard. And if it is a comet, it would also explain all the other plagues described in the Book of Revelation.
Finally Mark, it is worth noting again the words of Jesus regarding events that will take place in the skies above the earth during the period leading up to his return, as recorded in chapter 21 verses 25 and 26 of St. Luke’s gospel.
“And there shall be signs in the sun, and in the moon, and in the stars; and upon the earth distress of nations, with perplexity; the sea and the waves roaring; Men’s hearts failing them for fear, and looking after those things which are coming on the earth; for the powers of heaven shall be shaken”.
The part that really stands out for me in this quotation is the reference to “men’s hearts failing them for fear”. What do you suppose Jesus was referring to that would cause men’s hearts to fail them with fear? Maybe the following story will provide us with a clue.
Remember when I referred to the radio talk show “Coast to Coast AM” earlier, in which listeners were invited to call in about any dreams or visions which they had about the future. Well, there was another caller from Canada named Lawrie. This is what he had to say.
“Back in 1995 I had this dream of this big huge planet-like sphere in the night sky and it was pulsing and very bright. We knew it was the end of our world as we know it.
“It was kind of scary, yet most amazing and we were in awe, and this entity was so huge and powerful that you just accepted it. The whole event was so real. It’s like the whole world came together to look up at this thing and we all realized that there was no stopping this”.
Mark: That certainly is an interesting story. But I still can’t accept that the world as we know it might be coming to an end. And even if it is, I have a simple question. Why us, and why now?
Well Mark, I should make it clear that the world itself is not ending. It will carry on. But our cycle of civilization is definitely coming to an end. And out of the ruins of our civilization there will arise another that is more glorious than anything we can imagine.
But in answer to your simple question, I have a simple answer. It’s about time. That might sound trite, but it goes to the heart of why these events are happening at this time. Anyway, I will explain what I mean by that comment in more detail during our next conversation.
Mark: I appreciate everything that you have discussed today, and look forward to hearing your answer to my question. You have been listening to Allan Colston, author of the book The Last Days of Tolemac. Do join us for our next Podcast, which will be another in the series titled “Signs of the Times”.
Allan, AUDIO, Signs of the Times, The Tilting Axis, September 18, 2017, 11:31 am
My name is Mark Stevens. I am talking today with Allan Colston. He is the author of The Last Days of Tolemac,which is a book dealing with prophecy and other end-time events.
For those listeners who may be new to this topic, this is another in the series “Signs of the Times”. So Allan, let me start by welcoming you to this Podcast. How have you been keeping?
Pretty well thanks. Keeping myself busy doing research and writing various articles that appear on my Blog. As I am sure you are aware Mark, we are certainly living in turbulent times.
Mark: I’m glad you mentioned that. I just finished reading your Blog dealing with climate change, and my head is still spinning from some of the issues that you raised. Can we spend some time talking about them?
Certainly Mark. Where would you like to begin?
Mark: Well I guess my first question is, do you really think that the changes that are taking place in the earth’s climate are as serious as you make them out to be?
Absolutely Mark. But before we get into that we need to be clear about the fact that there are two completely different scenarios that are unfolding at this time. The first is what most people on the planet THINK is going on, and the second is what is REALLY going on.
Let’s start off by talking about what people THINK is going on. As I pointed out in my Blog, the world owes a tremendous debt of gratitude to Al Gore. He was the first prominent American to publicize the problem of climate change in his documentary entitled An Inconvenient Truth.
Up until 2006 when his movie was released, the attitude of the public was that climate change was a problem that was too big for any individual to solve, and therefore needed to be dealt with at government level by those countries that were the biggest polluters.
Although Rachel Carson can probably be called the true founder of the environmental movement through the publication of her book Silent Spring in 1962, it was Al Gore who focussed public attention directly on the problem of climate change.
He personalised this issue by pointing out that every individual contributed to this problem, and therefore bore a moral responsibility for changing their own behaviour in ways that would reduce their carbon footprint, and thus improve their own environment.
And since that time, an entirely new movement has emerged, and that is the so-called “green” revolution. Now I am not referring to the global movement of the 1960’s that was designed to increase agricultural production as a way of dealing with the threat of widespread famine.
I am talking about the growing movement, particularly within Western societies, towards “clean and green” technology, as well as a desire to align activities according to the needs of the environment, rather than at the expense of the environment. Much of this can also be attributed to Al Gore.
His view, which has subsequently been adopted by 195 countries that were signatories to the Paris Accord in November, 2016, is that burning fossil fuels have led to a dramatic increase in carbon dioxide in our atmosphere, and that this is to blame for the “greenhouse effect” that is heating the planet.
Today most climatologists believe that humanity is to blame for global warming, and that unless we change our behaviour, the world is going to get hotter and hotter. The unfortunate truth is that while they are correct about the consequences, they are completely wrong in their diagnosis.
Mark: So are you saying that these scientists don’t understand the real cause of climate change?
Exactly. But what is worse Mark, is that because global warming is NOT caused by human activity, NOTHING that these scientists do to reduce the use of carbon fuels is going to have the slightest effect in improving the situation on the surface of the earth.
That doesn’t mean that greenhouse gases don’t pose a problem for society. They do. They pollute the atmosphere and cause all sorts of diseases and lung problems. For these reasons alone it is worth limiting the use of carbon-based fuel. But this has nothing to do with global warming.
The fact is that greenhouse gases are a POLLUTION problem. And while anything that we can do to improve the environment by reducing the amount of pollutants in our air and water is admirable, this by itself will do nothing to solve the problem of global warming.
The sad fact is that most people are completely unaware of the true cause of climate change. And the reason this is sad Mark, is because the authorities who know that mankind is not to blame, also know that if the truth ever became known, it would cause widespread panic all over the world.
That is why the Secret Government has gone to such extreme lengths to keep the truth hidden. They know that international efforts like the Paris Accord help to deflect public attention away from the real cause of climate change, as well as what they themselves are doing about it.
Mark: So tell me Allan, what is the real cause of climate change?
Well Mark, the reason why I devoted so much space to this in my Blog, is because I feel strongly that no matter how bad things may happen to be, we all have an inalienable right to know what is REALLY going on in the world, even if certain authorities would prefer to hide the truth from us.
Obviously, they have their own agenda, which is to preserve law and order and prevent mass panic. And while one cannot argue against this, I feel an equally strong case can be made for making the truth available to all those who seek, so that they can make an informed choice about how to respond.
This is where the rubber meets the road. If I tell you what I know and you start sharing this information with other people, then before long the news will spread and the authorities will have no way of controlling the outcome. Hence their determination to hide the truth at all costs.
So by talking about this on a public forum Mark, we will inevitably attract the attention of those whose task is to silence whistle-blowers. And as I have already shown on my Blog, the consequences of doing so can be deadly.
But the reason that I am doing this now is because it fulfills ancient Bible prophecy. When the disciples asked Jesus what signs would signal the time of his return, his reply was recorded in verses 25- 26 of chapter 21 of the gospel of St. Luke:
“And there shall be signs in the sun, and in the moon, and in the stars; and upon the earth distress of nations, with perplexity; the sea and the waves roaring; Men’s hearts failing them for fear, and looking after those things which are coming on the earth; for the powers of heaven shall be shaken”.
Jesus made it plain that when the time of his return drew near, there would be “signs in the sun”, and that is exactly what we are experiencing at this time. For according to the anonymous whistle-blower that I quoted in Part Four of my Blog, these changes began to be noticed some seventy years ago.
As far back as the 1940’s, certain physicists and astronomers began to notice a pattern of change coming over the sun. At first these changes were hardly noticeable, but then as the new millennium drew closer, they became more and more pronounced.
From the year 2,000 onwards, the sun’s activity has become increasingly unstable, and this has led to changes on the earth that have become increasingly threatening. But these changes have not been limited to the earth. They have affected other planets in our solar system as well.
Mark: I noticed that you discussed these changes at length in your Blog.
The reason I did so Mark, was to emphasize the fact that all the planets in our solar system are being affected, although each in different ways. In the case of earth, the most dramatic sign is the change in our climate, and the steady increase in global warming.
But the sun is not just a source of heat and light. It not only affects our climate, but it also impacts almost every aspect of life on this planet. It affects human beings as well as every other species that lives upon the earth. And the changes that are occurring are truly alarming.
Climate is just one of the signs of the changes affected by the sun. Scientists have recently discovered that a new mass extinction is underway. Insect and animal migrations are changing all around the planet, as they try to adapt to these new climatic conditions.
Biological mutations have begun to erupt spontaneously within species that have no counterpart in history, and defy conventional explanation. One of the most disturbing examples of this is the discovery that human male sperm counts are dropping precipitously all around the world.
But it is not just male infertility that has been affected, but the entire division of the sexes as well. We no longer have a simple separation of the sexes into male and female, but we are witnessing an explosion of mixed genders, as can be seen from the entire LGBTQ community.
These changes are potentially catastrophic to life, and will almost certainly cause the earth’s environment to experience abrupt changes on a massive scale. Furthermore, this transformation appears to be unstoppable. It is also clear that these changes do not originate on the sun.
Because the sun is affected by this phenomenon along with all the other planets, those scientists who are in the know have concluded that the entire solar system is interacting with some previously unknown trans-dimensional energy that is coming from outer space.
In other words, these changes are being caused by radiation emanating from an area of space that we have never experienced before, as the solar system makes its slow orbit around the centre of our spiral galaxy. And this radiation is causing our sun to become more and more dangerous.
Mark: I noticed that you also wrote about how the sun was becoming hotter, and was emitting higher amounts of dangerous ultraviolet radiation.
That’s right Mark. As I indicated in my Blog, scientists working for the Secret Government have discovered that changes in the climate of our planet, as well as increasing heat on land and in the ocean, are the direct result of increasing energy levels emanating from the sun.
In a nutshell, what this means is that scientific studies have now confirmed that the sun is getting hotter, and that it is also changing colour. Whereas up until about fifty years ago the sun was known for its golden glow, it has now become a white-hot ball in the sky.
And this changing colour has been accompanied by increasing amounts of ultraviolet radiation. Again, as I discussed in my Blog, the earth is being exposed to higher amounts of UV-B and UB-C radiation, which are the most dangerous forms of ultraviolet light.
One of the foremost investigators into this increase in UV radiation is California researcher Dane Wigington. He was one of the first people to buy his own UV meters to test whether the data provided by the authorities was correct. What he found was that it was being grossly understated.
Whereas climatologists agree that UV levels of 11 on the conventional UV index pose extreme risk of harm to human beings, Wigington found that his own measurements indicated that daily levels taken where he lived often reached levels that were far higher than this.
It became clear to him that authorities were routinely underestimating the true UV readings so as not to alarm the public. And the reason they did so, was because the sun was pumping out more and more dangerous UV radiation.
While much of the sun’s ultraviolet light is blocked by the ozone layer that surrounds the earth, recent changes in the ozone layer itself meant that more and more harmful UV rays were now reaching the earth and killing off coral reefs, fishes, and many other species.
As I indicated in my conclusion, the “inconvenient” truth about climate change is that the earth is dying. It is losing its ability to sustain life. Insects are dying. Trees and plants are dying. Birds and animals are dying. And all of this information is being hidden from the public.
Faced with this terrible truth, the Secret Government has responded by instigating one of the most ambitious environmental strategies in the history of the earth. They set about creating a thermal, anti-radiation barrier in the upper atmosphere just below the troposphere.
Mark: That’s something that I wanted to ask you. Is there really a world-wide project involving “chemtrails” that has been secretly going on for years?
Yes Mark, there is. In fact, according to whistle-blowers, this programme began in the United States in 1997. Since then it has spread to all the major industrial countries of the world, and all the while news of this activity has been hidden under a cloak of secrecy.
The programme itself is designed to use high-flying military tanker jets to spread a cocktail of chemicals in the sky, in such a way as to create an aerial shield that is designed to protect the earth from harmful radiation emanating from the sun.
It did not take long for investigators to refer to this cocktail of chemicals in the sky as “chemtrails”, because although they look exactly like ordinary aircraft condensation trails while they are being sprayed, they actually contain a combination of different chemicals.
Analysis of their ingredients by private laboratories confirm that these “chemtrails” consist primarily of particles of Barium, Aluminum Oxide and Carbon Black, as well as smaller amounts of Chromium, Cadmium, Nickel, Ethylene Dibromide and radioactive Thorium.
It is also worth noting that because these particles are heavier than air, and would normally sink quickly to the ground, they are also mixed with various polymers, which help them to remain suspended in the atmosphere for longer periods of time.
It goes without saying that this toxic blend of chemicals sprayed all over the world is a double-edged sword. While it is designed as a desperate attempt to protect the earth by warding off harmful radiation from the sun, it is also bound to harm the immune systems of the sick, the elderly and the young.
It was also recognized that the presence of Aluminum Oxide particles in the air would lead to an increase in the incidence of Alzheimer’s disease. However, this was deemed to be a small price to pay for the attempt to ensure the long-term survival of our civilization.
It was also known that the presence of Aluminum particles in the soil would adversely affect crop yields. In this context, it is interesting to note that the multi-national agrochemical company Monsanto, recently began marketing Aluminum resistant seeds.
And it is not just agricultural crops that are being threatened by this rain of aluminum particles falling from the sky. In forests all around the world, this coating of aluminum particles is causing wildfires to burn hotter and become more destructive than ever before.
Anyway Mark, the question that has always baffled the public is this. At a time when classified and confidential matters are routinely leaked to the press, if there really was a secret Government programme involving chemtrails, then how could they possibly keep this secret year after year?
And the answer to this conundrum is simple. The fact is that this aerosol spraying programme is not being conducted by the regular Government, but by the Secret Government. And they know how to keep secrets. It was a trick they learned and perfected over sixty years ago.
Mark: And that brings me to the key question I’ve been wanting to ask you Allan. Who, or what, is the Secret Government that you keep referring to?
That’s a great question Mark. The usual amusing answer that security personnel like to give is this. I could tell you, but then I would have to kill you in case you turned me in for revealing classified information. Anyway, as I said, it all began soon after the end of the second World War.
In July 1947, a UFO crashed in the desert just outside the town of Roswell, New Mexico. Since that time, investigators have been divided into two camps. Some believe that this was a hoax perpetrated on a gullible public, while others are convinced that something unusual really happened.
What is beyond dispute is that when this came to the attention of President Truman, he formed a special committee to investigate the matter. It consisted of twelve people, made up of leaders of the various branches of the U.S. Military, together with a few select scientists.
When Dwight Eisenhower took over the Presidency from Truman, he expanded this original group of twelve to include laymen as well as leaders of industry, particularly those whose businesses were already involved in top-secret projects.
He also did something which changed the nature of this group from that time onwards. He initiated the concept of “plausible deniability”. This was done so that if news of their clandestine activities ever became public knowledge, he could truthfully say that he knew nothing about it.
Eisenhower arranged for their activities to be financed by a “black” budget that was classified “top-secret”. That meant that this Secret Government could do pretty much anything they wanted, without ever being accountable to Congress. And that is the way it has stayed ever since.
In time President Eisenhower came to regret his earlier decision. He realised that he had let a genie out of the bag that could no longer be constrained. And, in his farewell speech to the nation, he warned people to beware of the growing power of the “Military-Industrial-Complex”.
Because this group of twelve men initially consisted primarily of military leaders, it did not take them long to use military tactics to ensure secrecy and security. They did this by adopting a strategy that had served them well in the second World War. It was the policy of “compartmentalization”.
Operations were conducted on a “need to know” basis. Staff were only told what they needed to know for the task for which they were hired. They were under orders never to talk to others about what they did, even to those who worked alongside of them.
They were also bound by an oath of secrecy, which was policed by specially selected “guardians”, whose job it was to ensure that they never breached security. The penalties for anyone found guilty of revealing classified information were sufficiently harsh to ensure that staff never talked.
Over the years, the range of activities in which this Secret Government has become involved has grown ever larger. According to the CIA whistle-blower Kevin Shipp that I quoted in Part Three, their activities now extend to almost every agency of the Federal Government.
And as Shipp explained, these agencies require all people engaged in classified black budget projects to sign binding secrecy agreements (non-disclosure agreements) as a condition of employment, and that it is these agreements that have served as the ultimate tool in maintaining secrecy.
In addition to their ability to silence possible whistle-blowers from within, the Secret Government has also developed a slick PR campaign to deal with members of the public who asked embarrassing questions about unusual trails in the sky that were obviously not natural.
They used the same technique they had successfully developed all those years earlier when dealing with the subject of UFO’s. They would deny that any such clandestine campaign existed, and then brand all those who asked questions as cranks or “conspiracy theorists”.
“The whole thing is a hoax,” authorities would say when confronted, “and we don’t discuss hoaxes”. They simply dismissed the topic out of hand. And by treating the whole subject as a joke and by ridiculing anyone who tried to get serious answers to serious questions, even the press has been silenced.
But to cut a long story short, when it was discovered that the earth was threatened by harmful radiation coming from the sun, and that it was necessary to undertake a global aerosol dispersal programme, it was easy for the Secret Government to set this up, and ensure complete secrecy.
Mark: It still find it hard to believe that this has been going on for all these years without the public knowing anything about it. By the way, you also wrote about underground and undersea bases. What can you tell us about them?
Well Mark, this is the other side of the coin, so to speak. When it became clear that the world was being threatened by increased levels of cosmic radiation coming from beyond the solar system, scientists like Edward Teller proposed creating an atmospheric shield to protect the earth.
But the effectiveness of this was always going to be problematic. Firstly, no-one knew if this shield would actually be effective. And secondly, even if it was, nobody could predict how long it might be needed. After all, the harmful radiation coming from outer space might continue for centuries.
The most practical solution therefore, was to build underground shelters, especially since many of them already existed from the days of the cold war with the Soviet Union. Besides, new developments like the nuclear-powered subterrene enabled engineers to do in months what previously took years.
So the Secret Government began to build underground shelters all over, or should I say under, the country. Initially, these shelters were built below military bases, but later on they became associated with places with easy public access, like Denver International airport.
According to whistle-blower Phil Schneider, who was one of those employed in building these bases, a new self-contained underground base is being completed every six weeks. So as you can imagine Mark, there are now literally hundreds of these shelters all across America.
Mark: So who do you think are going to be living in these underground shelters?
Well Mark, it’s certainly not going to be you or me. They are being reserved primarily for the military, and for Federal and State officials who would be responsible for the continuation of government. Other people would be approved as needed to maintain equipment and machinery.
These people are given security ID cards which give details on how to access their nearest underground shelter, in the event of a national emergency. And as for the rest of us Mark, we would be left on the surface to fend for ourselves as best we could.
Bear in mind that these shelters would only be used if conditions on the ground became too dangerous, or if climatic conditions generated mass panic, or if the country was faced with some other calamity such as the threat of nuclear war.
Mark: Anyway Allan, before we wrap up, my final question is this. How do you think this is all going to play out? What is going to happen to our planet? Are we all going to die?
Well if I knew the answers to those questions Mark, I would probably already have a lucrative job with the Secret Government. I think it is fair to say that nobody really knows for sure, although there is certainly no shortage of people and organisations who think they have the answer.
Although I am not a prophet, I have studied Bible prophecy for many years, so I can tell you what the Bible has to say on this subject. But I’m afraid it is not going to make you feel any better Mark. In fact, the problems posed by climate change will seem tiny in comparison.
Shortly before Jesus died on the cross, his disciples asked him what signs they should look out for during the “last days” prior to his promised return. What he told them is recorded in the gospels. And then there are the writings of St. John in his Book of Revelation.
Their predictions are a case of “good news” and “bad news”. The “bad news” is that the world will shortly undergo a seven-year period of tribulation, the likes of which it has never experienced before. During this time, most of the people who are alive on the earth today will die.
The agent of this destruction, and the event that will trigger the beginning of the seven years of tribulation, will be an asteroid that will strike the earth. St. John calls this asteroid a “great millstone”, and in the 8th chapter of his Book of Revelation he writes: “And the second angel sounded, and as it were a great mountain burning with fire was cast into the sea”.
As I have pointed out in my Blog, I believe this asteroid will hit the ocean just west of Puerto Rico. The destruction caused by the impact of this asteroid will lead to the death of hundreds of millions of people within a matter of minutes, mainly due to giant Tsunamis generated by the shock waves of this impact, that will devastate coastlines and low-lying areas all around the world.
The great tribulation will end with the battle of Armageddon that is predicted to take place in the valley of Jezreel, close to the town of Megiddo in Israel. This final war will be fought between the forces of the Anti-Christ on the one hand, and the armies of the Prince of the East on the other.
But just when it seems as if the last remnant of humanity will be wiped off the face of the earth, this clash of armies will culminate in the long-awaited return of the Saviour, whose arrival will herald a new golden age, followed by a thousand years of peace, joy and tranquillity.
However, the “good news” of the Bible is that some people will be spared from these disasters. They will be miraculously taken out of their bodies to a place of safety, through a process that has come to be known as the “rapture”. These will be people whom the Bible calls the “chosen ones”.
But even those who miss out on the initial rapture will have a second chance. Those who manage to endure this time of tribulation and keep their faith intact without succumbing to the lure of the teachings of the Anti-Christ, are promised a golden crown upon the Saviour’s return.
Mark: Well Allan, I’d like to thank you for your time, and for all the provocative information you have provided about climate change. You have certainly given me plenty to think about. If there are any listeners out there who would like to know more about the things we have talked about today, feel free to check out the following link.
You have been listening to Allan Colston, author of the book The Last Days of Tolemac. Do join us for our next Podcast, which will be another in the series titled “Signs of the Times”.
Allan, An Inconvenient Truth, AUDIO, Signs of the Times, August 31, 2017, 1:49 pm
So where has this search for the truth about global warming and climate change led us? What started off as an investigation into the science of what was going on in the upper atmosphere of our planet, has taken us on a circuitous journey to secret bases deep below the surface of the earth.
And what began as an innocent enough enquiry into a phenomenon that has captured the attention of all the countries around the globe, has led us into a dark world of government secrecy and classified information that is shrouded in deception, disease and death.
This quest for understanding has taken us from international forums where the subject is widely discussed and openly debated, to hidden chambers where evidence is officially denied as a conspiratorial hoax, and whistleblowers who speak out do so at the risk of their lives.
Yet beneath all this talk of conspiracy and denial, one truth remains self evident. The facts speak for themselves, no matter how much political spin is applied. The threat is real, and the threat is now. The evidence is undeniable, and it keeps on mounting month by month.
Our climate is changing, and changing at a pace that is beyond the control of any government, whether national or international. Extreme weather events are occurring all around the planet, threatening the existence of every species, from fish and birds to human beings themselves.
The Apparent Truth
Faced with this threat, the scientists of the world have come together to try to speak with a single voice on this matter. According to the official NASA website on Global Climate Change there is a consensus among studies published in peer-reviewed scientific journals.
According to NASA, the conclusion of 97% of climate scientists who have actively published reports on this subject is that climate-warming trends over the past century are extremely likely to have been the result of human activity, which is what activists like Al Gore have been preaching for years.
The human activities they refer to are the burning of coal and gas to generate power, as well and the use of carbon-based products to fuel our cars and machinery. It is the burning of these products that create the greenhouse gases that form the atmospheric barrier that traps heat.
And because global warming is believed to be a problem that we ourselves have caused, there has been a growing movement within the international community that has culminated in the Paris Accord on climate change, in which 195 countries have agreed to reduce their use of carbon products.
But behind this apparent unanimity among scientists and nations that human beings are the cause of climate change, and are therefore directly responsible for solving the problem, there has been another sinister and secret campaign that is based on a totally different premise.
The Real Truth
That premise, which is also supported by scientific study, holds that changes in the climate of our planet, as well as the increasing heat on land and in the ocean, are the direct result of energies that are impacting the earth from sources beyond the solar system.
And based on this premise, secret agencies around the world have joined together to embark on a two-fold campaign. One part is designed to create an atmospheric shield around the planet to protect it from incoming radiation, and the other is to build underground and undersea shelters to save a select few from destruction.
The rationale behind the extreme secrecy surrounding this campaign is simple. If the truth about global warming is that the lives of all the people on the planet are at risk, then that truth can never be made public. As the whistleblower known as “Deep Shield” explained:
“Due to the severity of the situation it is mandatory to maintain public calm for as long as possible. The Earth is dying. Humanity is on the road to extinction – without the Shield mankind will die off within 20 to 50 years.
“Most people alive today could live to see this extinction take place. This means that an announcement of the situation we face boils down to telling every man, woman and child on earth that they have no future, they are going to be killed.
“People would panic. There would be economic collapse, the production and movement of goods would collapse. Millions would die in all cities on earth, riots and violence would reduce civilian centers to rubble within days.
“Half of the population in dense metropolitan areas would try to leave the cities seeking ‘safety’ in the rural areas thinking that they would be safe.
“Those left behind in the cities would be at war with their neighbors, fighting for the remaining supplies. We would be telling the world that the world is coming to an end, and even with the Shield the chances of survival are small”.(View Source)
Increasing Cosmic Radiation
So what is the real cause of this threat? The honest answer is that we still do not know. All we can say is that the earth, as well as the entire solar system, is being subjected to significantly increasing amounts of cosmic radiation, as can be seen in the following graph taken from Spaceweather.com
As the above graph clearly indicates, in the short space of two years from March 2015 to May 2017, the amount of cosmic radiation registered by high altitude balloons in the upper atmosphere above California has increased by 13%. The website goes on to say:
“Why are cosmic rays intensifying? The main reason is the sun. Solar storm clouds such as coronal mass ejections (CMEs) sweep aside cosmic rays when they pass by Earth. During Solar Maximum, CMEs are abundant and cosmic rays are held at bay.
“Now, however, the solar cycle is swinging toward Solar Minimum, allowing cosmic rays to return. Another reason could be the weakening of the Earth’s magnetic field, which helps protect us from deep-space radiation”.
As pointed out above, the main reason that cosmic rays are intensifying is the sun. This was also pointed out by Swiss and German scientists as far back as July 2004, according to a report that was published in the British newspaper The Telegraph.
This study was based on research led by Dr. Sami Solanki, director of the renowned Max Planck Institute for Solar System Research in Gottingen, Germany. The conclusion of their study was that the earth was getting hotter because the sun was brighter than at any time in the last 1,000 years.
Although Dr. Solanki indicated that he did not know what was causing the sun to burn brighter, or how long this cycle would last, he did say that he believed that the impact of this intense sunlight on the ozone layer could be affecting the climate more than the sunlight itself.
Ozone Layer
Dr. Solanki’s comment about the effect of this intense sunlight upon the ozone layer goes to the very heart of the problem that is affecting the earth at this time. The reason is because of the nature of the ozone layer, and the function it fulfills in our atmosphere.
The atmosphere of the earth is divided into several layers. The lowest layer, called the troposphere, extends from the surface of the earth to about six miles (10 kms) in altitude. The next layer, called the stratosphere, extends from there up to about thirty miles (50 kms) above the earth.
The ozone layer consists of ozone molecules that are suspended in the upper reaches of the stratosphere. Stratospheric ozone is a naturally occurring gas that helps to filter out ultraviolet (UV) radiation emanating from the sun. It has been called the earth’s sunscreen.
So if the ozone layer is diminished for any reason, as it is now, it allows more UV radiation to reach the earth’s surface. And it is this increased UV radiation that leads to skin cancer, cataracts and other health problems. It also disrupts marine life and reduces crop yields.
But ordinary people do not need scientific studies to tell them that something is seriously wrong with our sun. They can see and sense this as they go about their daily duties. They already know that sunlight feels hotter and that it is easier to get sunburned than before.
One of the easiest ways to find out what ordinary citizens think about the sun, is to scan the comments that can be seen below YouTube videos dealing with the subject of climate change. The following is a selection of what people around the world have been saying recently.
What YouTube Viewers Have to Say
“The Sun burns like the arc from a welder machine. Prickly hot on the skin. When you go outside it’s like living in an overexposed photograph is the only way I can explain it.
“We live in Camp Verde AZ – every year up to this year we have had an increasing number of fire ants in our yard. This year we have not seen even ONE ANT anywhere in the whole yard. Looking for them, we can’t find any. How can ants just not be there anymore? Are they all hiding under ground because of the deadly UV spikes? Are they all dead?
“All I know is that the UV intensity and whiteness of the sun is relatively new, and the climate, the weather, the air quality and other things were completely different when I was a kid, and I’ve lived in the same part of the country for more than sixty years. The changes are undeniable and I do not think it has all been caused by burning fossil fuels.
“I am 48 and I can say for a FACT!! I remember the sun being softer gold with yellow tones. You could look at it for a second. This bright white sun you can’t even glimpse at is not the sun I remember as a kid.
“I’m 43. You are right on about the Sun being white. It’s been like that a few years now. I been photographing the Sun for awhile now. Pictures show a white Sun.
“I’ve been telling my friends & family for at least 5-8 years now – our sunlight seems different. It feels different on my skin. I try to explain to them that it’s subtle, but it’s certainly different.
“When I’m out in the sun, the light hurts my skin in a different way than it ever has in my entire life — I’m now 45. I explain it as though it “feels hotter” — which is a poor description, I know. But it stings in a way that it never has before — a bit more intense, I suppose. It’s so very difficult to articulate… It just feels like the sunlight is more “intense”.
“What makes me say that is the effect that it has on my sensory nerves under my skin. Of course, most people say that I’m nuttier than usual, but I certainly can & I stand by my own claims that the sunlight is different than it’s been during the first 35-38 years of my life.
“I’m from Warren county in SW Ohio. I currently live in Dayton. For the past few years I have definitely felt the sun burning my skin faster than my entire life and it seems to only be getting worse. Crazy weather we’ve been having here in Ohio.
“Something must be up. I just got mild sunburn after 30 minutes outdoors yesterday. This is Winter (Tasmania, Australia). A passer by commented to me that the Sun was too bright, too hot, and much bigger for Winter…and it was not as low on the horizon.
“Notice how the sun doesn’t have a yellow hue any more, bright white!!
“No offense sincerely, but I remember a yellow hued sun growing up. I loved to watch clouds and the sun felt warm – not burning little water blisters on my forearms. Something has affected our star.
“94º today in PA. Something definitely has been going on with the sun for years now. It doesn’t seem so hot out until you get into sunlight. Then it feels like you are being micro-waved. Strange.
“I’m sensitive to the sun. It’s definitely hotter and more intense. I can’t even go out for a minute now without getting really red.
“My dear grandson got a terrible burn today here in Maryland, even though he was covered in sun-block.
“Yes, for we who knew the benign golden Sun, it’s really sad. I can hardly see to drive when the road glares so much under this light. Maybe I need welder’s goggles, it seems to burn and leave after images. You see everybody squinting some days.
“The sun was yellow and sky blue. It was called the golden sun. Remember the children’s song: Mister sun, Mister sun, Mister golden sun, please shine down on me. The sky was also much bluer then.
“Another older guy to testify that the sun used to be yellow. It was possible to look directly at the sun for up to about ten seconds and this was intense but felt purifying. Now the sun’s so bright you’d go blind.
“Adding to an old post. Yes, I’m 57. The sun used to be yellow. As a young (and dumb) kid I used to stare into the sun to see how long I could look at it. It was yellow. The sun used to rise and set in yellow, orange, & red with the red being the color when it was closest to the horizon. Today, it is simply white and almost unbearable to the eyes.
“I think what happened is the ozone just left us, I remember it being yellow. We as kids during the 80s colored in a “Yellow sun” I noticed this shift in 2002 / 2004. Suddenly it was just this crazy white and it gets whiter every year.
The above comments made by ordinary people may seem rambling and mundane, but they go to the essence of the changes that are taking place on the sun. In fact they have unwittingly realised the true cause of global warming and the effect this is having upon the surface of the earth.
The key to understanding global warming is simply this. The earth is getting hotter because the sun is getting hotter. And the hotter the sun gets, the whiter it gets.
The changes that these viewers have described have so far eluded all those climatologists who subscribe to the greenhouse gases explanation of global warming. The truth is that climate change is not the result of people burning fossil fuels. It is because the sun itself has changed.
The Conventional Theory of the Sun
Conventional climatologists suffer from one basic defect which prevents them from understanding the true causes of the changes that are taking place on this planet, and that is their understanding (or should I say “misunderstanding”) of the nature and function of our sun.
All the leading colleges and universities around the world teach a single theory about the origin and nature of the sun, and any student who hopes to graduate and go on to enjoy a career in science is obliged to accept this theory as proven fact.
The conventional view of science is that our sun is a circular star which lies at the centre of our solar system. This star is considered to be roughly 865,000 miles (1,393,000 kilometres) in diameter, with a mass of about 330,000 times the mass of the earth.
As a result of spectrographic analysis, three-quarters of this mass has been found to consist of hydrogen, while the rest of it is made up mostly of helium. Small amounts of heavier elements such as oxygen, carbon, neon and iron have also been found.
Our sun is thought to have formed about four and a half billion years ago, and is considered to have been the result of the gravitational collapse of a large molecular cloud, and it is this cloud that ultimately became the sun with its orbiting planets.
Being at the centre of this gravitational collapse, our sun became increasingly hot and dense until it reached a point when thermonuclear fusion spontaneously occurred. It is this process of nuclear fusion, by converting hydrogen nuclei into helium, that produces its heat and light.
Charles Bruce
All remained well in this neatly organized world of accepted theory until a Scottish astrophysicist by the name of Charles Bruce arrived on the scene. In 1944, Bruce, who was an electrical researcher, astronomer, and expert on the effects of lightning, made an unusual discovery.
He found that the surface of the sun had the same appearance, temperature and spectral analysis as an electric arc. He then went on to make a bold proposition. The sun looked like an electric arc, he said, and had the same characteristics as an electrical arc, because it was an electric arc.
So what Charles Bruce theorised was that the sun was not a nuclear furnace after all. It was in fact an electrical body made up of a large number of arcs in parallel with one another. He explained that our sun, as well as every other star, was actually a sophisticated, though complex, electric light bulb.
Bruce’s idea that the source of the sun’s heat and light was the result of electromagnetic rather than thermonuclear interactions, was laughed at by all the scientific authorities of his time, just as it continues to be rejected to this day.
There was, however, one small problem, and that was that the old theory was devised by scientists before the advent of the space age. And once it became possible to send scientific probes into space to study the properties of the sun, it was clear that the accepted theory of the sun was in trouble.
The problem was that this elegant mathematical theory that had been held so fervently by so many people for so many years, was just not supported by the facts. The evidence proved that every aspect of the existing theory was wrong. In fact, it was so obvious that even a child could see it.
Ralph Juergens
The deficiencies of the traditional theory were exposed some years later when an American civil engineer named Ralph Juergens wrote an article in which he demolished the long accepted theory of the sun. In an unequivocal assessment of the situation, Juergens wrote:
“I can find no way to state this diplomatically, so let me be blunt. The modern astrophysical concept that ascribes the Sun’s energy to thermonuclear reactions deep in the solar interior is contradicted by nearly every observable aspect of the Sun.”
What incensed Juergens at the time was not only that the accepted theory of the sun as a thermonuclear reactor was unable to explain the observed features of the sun, but that the scientists who held so firmly to this theory blithely ignored these features.
The fundamental problem with the existing theory was this. If the sun truly was a nuclear reactor, converting hydrogen atoms into helium through a process of thermonuclear fusion, then there should be a simple temperature gradient between the inner and outer heat of the sun.
In other words, the sun should be hottest at its centre. And the further away one went from the surface of the sun, the cooler it should become. The problem was that the actual temperature readings on which all astrophysicists agreed showed the exact opposite.
The temperature at the surface of the sun is roughly 4,400 degrees Kelvin (7,460ºF). But about four times further away, it rises steadily to about 20,000ºK (35,540ºF) . From there the temperature jumps abruptly to two million degrees Kelvin (3,554,000ºF) in the Corona.
Based on this new data provided by space probes which was the opposite of what the traditional theory predicted, Juergens not only exposed the shortcomings of existing theory, but he went on to propose an entirely new theory of the sun that was founded on electromagnetism.
According to Juergens, the source of the energy that powers the sun comes from space beyond the sun, and this energy is electrical in nature. The sun is therefore the focus of a “coronal glow discharge” that is fed by electric currents coursing throughout the galaxy.
As he wrote in 1972, some years before his death in 1979, in an article entitled Reconciling Celestial Mechanics and Velikovskian Catastrophism:
“The known characteristics of the interplanetary medium suggest not only that the sun and the planets are electrically charged, but that the sun itself is the focus of a cosmic electric discharge – the probable source of all its radiant energy“.(See Electric Sun)
As he went on to clarify, “The sun is electrically powered – the source of the sun’s energy is coming from electric currents in galactic space.” (See Electric Comet)
Today, Juergen’s ideas have been amplified and refined by a growing body of scientists who have aligned themselves with the Thunderbolts Group. They believe that we live in an “Electric Universe”, and that electromagnetism is the fundamental source of all created life.
The Electric Sun
What ordinary people have now come to realise is that our sun has changed. It has become hotter and it has become “whiter”. And as the evidence quoted earlier shows, the earth is being impacted by ever increasing amounts of harmful UV radiation emanating from the sun.
Nevertheless, the key contribution that Juergens has made to this discussion is the idea that the sun is electrically powered, that the brightness of the sun is dependent upon its “coronal glow discharge”, and that this in turn is fed by electric currents coursing throughout the galaxy.
So the reason why the sun now appears hotter and “whiter” is because the area through which the solar system is now travelling is being exposed to more intense radiation, which has changed the sun’s electromagnetic field, and therefore its “coronal glow discharge”.
And as Charles Bruce noted earlier, just like an arc welder’s torch changes colour with the intensity of the current and glows “whiter” as it gets hotter, so changes to the “coronal glow discharge” of the sun are causing it to feel hotter and look “whiter” when we experience it on the earth.
So what common people everywhere are reporting is evidence that these changes to the sun are having devastating effects upon the earth, as evidence mounts of more and more species being harmed by the increasing levels of lethal UVB and UVC radiation.
The “inconvenient” truth about climate change is that the earth is dying. It is losing its ability to support life. Insects are dying. Trees and plants are dying. Birds and animals are dying. How long before our agriculture and crop yields are seriously affected? How much time do we ourselves have left?
This truth is inescapable. It is no longer something that we can merely shrug off as inconsequential. Not only is it a truth that none of us can avoid, but it is one that every one of us must come to terms with as we make the day-to-day decisions about the future conduct of our lives.
Unfortunately, the reality is that very few people today are equipped to handle the devastating truth that the world as we know it is coming to an end. They simply cannot bring themselves to believe that the entire human species could be threatened with extinction.
Yet the evidence is there for all to see. And it is growing more and more evident with every passing year. We are reminded of the movie A Few Good Men, in which the actor Jack Nicholson uttered that memorable line, “You can’t handle the truth!”.
The ultimate question is: Can you?
Allan, An Inconvenient Truth, July 16, 2017, 1:25 pm
In the letter sent to Marjorie Tietjen quoted in Part Four, the anonymous author made the following statement in response to her query about the nature and purpose of the chemtrail jet aerosol programme that is being conducted in the skies above the United States.
“As long ago as the early 1940s, some physicists and astronomers began to notice a pattern of change coming over the sun. It did not become more pronounced until the new millennium arrived.
“During the past four years, from 2000 through 2004, the sun’s activity has become more unpredictable and more obvious. Scientists, some working for the military or the federal government, began to think the unthinkable: the sun and all the planets were beginning a massive transformation.
“This transformation is unstoppable, potentially catastrophic to life and will most certainly cause the Earth’s environment to experience abrupt changes on a massive scale”.
The author went on to say that if the secret global aerosol chemical barrier now being conducted by the military was not successful in mitigating the harmful effects of the increased ultra-violet radiation emanating from the sun, then life on the surface of the earth might soon become impossible.
And because nobody knows how long the current changes in the sun will last, there may come a time when life above the ground will be threatened with extinction, and humanity will have no choice but to seek accommodation underground in order to survive.
The spectre which this would raise for the continuation of life on this planet would be stark indeed. As the author indicated:
“Therefore, millions of people may have to spend the rest of their lives in underground cities — and perhaps their children and grandchildren. Of course, that still leaves billions on the surface of a dying planet. How long those billions will be able to survive, no one knows”.
The Response
So the test as to whether the earth truly is facing an imminent existential threat would be whether those same authorities that are responsible for creating chemtrail barriers in the sky, are also hard at work creating places of safety underground, as the anonymous source described.
“Many who read this are very much aware of the massive underground complexes that have been built in the United States and other countries since World War II.
“Much of the technology was acquired from Nazi engineering projects and during the last 60 years vastly improved upon using more advanced technology and materials.
“The original purpose of most of the underground complexes (many in hollowed out mountains or under the wasteland of parched desert terrain) was for key elements of society and government to survive a nuclear cataclysm. To an extent that is still one of the purposes.
“But all have been modified and more are being constructed around the world at breakneck speed in the event that the system phenomenon is not constrained by the aerosol chemical barrier.”
So if this author is correct, then the same Military-Industrial Complex that is responsible for the global aerosol dispersal programme designed to shield the population on earth from harmful radiation coming from the sun, should also be busy building places of refuge underground.
The question then becomes whether there is any evidence to support this claim.
But before looking for any evidence, we need to be aware that any operation by the secret government to construct underground complexes would inevitably be assigned the highest level of secrecy, and therefore demand the strictest efforts to maintain this secrecy.
So the likelihood of finding whistle-blowers willing to come forward and speak publicly about these underground bases is remote. Nevertheless, there have been a few brave souls who have chosen to research this subject, even though they risk their lives in doing so.
Richard Sauder
Dr. Richard Sauder
The most prominent researcher into the subject of underground, and even undersea bases, has been Dr. Richard Sauder. Hailing from the American state of Virginia, Richard has devoted his life to exploring unusual phenomena, especially those hidden behind an official veil of secrecy.
He was the first person to investigate underground and under-water military bases, by systematically delving into hard-to-find records of government, military and industry on the subject. He subsequently wrote three books outlining what he found.
In this book he outlined how corporate America had been working hand-in-glove with the Pentagon for decades, first planning and then constructing secret underground facilities. He revealed where these bases were located, the tunneling techniques involved, and why they were built.
His second book, published in 2001, was called Underwater and Underground Bases. In this work he revealed documentary evidence of huge, manned bases that had been built offshore, in mid-ocean, and deep beneath the seafloor. Some of which were big enough to house submarines.
This was followed in 2010 by “Hidden in Plain Sight: Beyond the X-Files”. Using a combination of archival research, on-scene-investigation and first-hand interviews, Sauder challenger the reader by asking, and then answering, such questions as:
• Where are the secret underground bases?
• How far down do they go?
• Are there bases underneath the ocean?
• Are there high-speed underground shuttle systems?
• What is going on beneath Washington, D.C.?
Washington D.C.
On the subject of the mysteries that lay beneath the surface of Washington, D.C., Dr Sauder had this to say:
“Most tourists who visit Washington, DC never suspect that a veritable labyrinth lies beneath their feet. They visit the White House without thinking of the secret, deep underground tunnels that radiate out from it to other locations in the city.
“They never suspect the elaborate, subterranean installation buried deep beneath the White House that extends down underground, level after level after level.
“They never have heard of the Top Secret plans in the 1960s to make a secret underground base 3,500 feet below ground, with high speed elevators connecting to the White House, the State Department and the Pentagon, and a high speed, deep underground shuttle connector between the base and the elevators. And that is just a fraction of the subterranean secrets that Washington, DC conceals”.(View Source)
Underground Bases
In his Blog, Dr. Sauder summarises the history of the clandestine underground and undersea construction project in the following words:
“One of the global Shadow Government’s biggest projects over the last several decades has been the construction of numerous Top Secret underground and undersea bases, as well as secret tunnels, all over the world.
“The majority of the world’s population knows very little about this ambitious program, and remains ignorant of what is happening undersea and underground. This has been going on at least since the end of World War II. A lot of it may have started with the Nazi engineers in the Third Reich, but it absolutely did not end with them.
“I provide a great deal of information about these bases in my three books. Because I passed 90% of my life in the USA, my work has a particular focus on that country.
“I reveal many of the major players in this decades-long project, many of the facilities themselves, and some of what is known about the activities that take place in them. It has to be said that a great deal still remains unknown about what is taking place underground and undersea.
“Many governments have contracted with major civil and marine engineering firms to construct massive installations underground and undersea. These bases are found in many countries, including the USA, Russia, China, Switzerland, Norway, Israel, Saudi Arabia, Australia, Canada, Great Britain and more”.
A far as the location of these underground facilities within the United States and around the world, Dr. Sauder has this to say:
“There are many secret underground bases all over the world. The Americans have numerous highly secret underground bases, including at their mysterious UFO research base in Nevada called Area 51.
“Many other nations also have secret underground bases. The Swiss Alps, for example, are said to be tunneled like Swiss cheese! The massive underground base beneath Yamantau Mountain in the southern Ural region of Russia is almost as legendary as Area 51 in the USA.
“The huge, Pine Gap underground facility in the middle of the Australian Outback is equally mysterious. Our planet is home to myriad facilities such as these.
“Many thousands, maybe even millions of people in total, are involved in building, maintaining and operating these highly secretive underground and undersea facilities – and yet the general public is kept completely in the dark as to what happens in them, or even where most of them are located”.
Undersea Bases
With regard to bases constructed underneath the sea, Dr. Sauder commented as follows:
“The technology to construct manned bases down in the bedrock deep beneath the seafloor in mid-ocean has existed for almost half a century now. In 1966 the USSA Navy’s so-called Rock-Site concept revealed that the technical expertise in the petroleum, mining and marine engineering industries made possible the construction of large, permanently manned facilities deep beneath the seafloor, hundreds of miles offshore in mid-ocean.
“In 1968 researchers affiliated with the Stanford Research Institute in California recommended constructing thirty undersea bases, at a projected cost of less than $3 billion dollars. Their report suggested that the deep undersea bases could be multipurpose facilities, for joint industrial, scientific and military use.
“A growing body of evidence indicates that such bases have been built by the Americans, and perhaps by others as well. Bodies of water such as the Gulf of Mexico, the Caribbean Sea, the North Sea, the Bay of Biscay, the Persian Gulf, the Mediterranean Sea, the South China Sea and East China Sea, the coastal waters of the continental shelves worldwide, as well as all other major seas and oceans are all candidate sites for deep, permanently manned bases.
“In fact the technology exists to conduct major industrial and military operations at extreme depths of 20,000 feet in mid-ocean. The major military agencies of the world and civil, petroleum, mining and marine engineering corporations have had the capability to construct these bases for decades.
“Reported or planned uses for these undersea facilities are as clandestine submarine bases, sonar bases, industrial mineral extraction operations (mining), alien bases, nuclear missile bases and scientific research installations. Note that all of these bases are presently clandestine and that there are likely to be other uses, perhaps even more exotic than those listed.
“Marine and civil engineering technology also permit the construction of massive bases in the world’s coastal regions that incorporate elements of both undersea and underground bases. The massive base that the Chinese military has reportedly constructed on Hainan Island is a good example.
“This huge, underground base can accommodate as many as 20 large, nuclear missile firing submarines underground beneath the island. The submarines reportedly do not surface to enter their base. They come and go from the base through multiple underwater tunnels that open directly to the deep sea and lead straight from the secret, underground submarine base.
“In the late Soviet period the Russians were also making a similar facility for their enormous Typhoon class, nuclear missile firing submarines. The Russian base is reported to be on the Kola Peninsula about 150 miles from Murmansk.
“I have been told that the USSA Navy also has built similar underground and undersea submarine bases. The Israeli Navy is reported to have such a base on the Mediterranean coast. Military marine engineering has science-fiction-like capabilities to make huge, deep, undersea and underground tunnels for submarines. Technology in the Black Budget world has far outstripped the reality that we know in our everyday lives”.
Underground Tunnels
When construction first began on these underground bases, it was recognized that none of them would be able to function effectively unless there was a network of underground tunnels to provide fast and efficient transportation between these different bases.
The United States Air Force sponsored research into deep underground construction as early as 1958. This research was carried out by the Rand Corporation. They held symposiums on construction methods and equipment, utility installation, and the use of nuclear explosions to create underground cavities.
In September 1983, Omni magazine published a story on an underground device known as a “Subterrene”. This was a nuclear tunnel-boring machine that had been developed at Los Alamos Laboratories in New Mexico.
This machine was able to penetrate rock deep below the earth and heat it to a state of molten magma, which then cooled after the machine moved on. The result was a tube with a smooth, glazed lining that enabled high-speed shuttles to link these subterranean bases with one another.
Dr. Sauder had this to say about the network of tunnels that linked these underground bases together, as well as the magnetic-levitation system that could propel transportation shuttles beneath the North American continent at speeds in excess of 1,500 mph (2,400 kms per hour).
“Others have alleged the existence of supersonic, underground magnetic levitation (maglev) trains that hurtle through a sprawling, continent-wide, deeply buried tunnel system.
“Can there be such a clandestine, subterranean train system built by the Shadow Government in great secrecy? My research answers a resounding, yes, it is very possible.
“In fact, the open record shows that just such a system was under active research and development all the way back in the 1930s, in the Third Reich of Nazi Germany.
“While it is not known if the Nazis ever built such a secret, maglev, tube shuttle, train network, the stories persist that such a system exists today, that it is very fast, very deep and very secret, for use only by the Shadow Government’s clandestine, compartmentalized projects.
“In my books, I provide documentation from the open technical literature that demonstrates a decades-long, multi-agency research effort into high speed maglev trains”.
Although Dr. Richard Sauder has been the foremost researcher into underground and undersea bases, as well as the supersonic shuttle system of transportation linking them all together, this knowledge has come at a heavy price. For as Kevin Shipp, the former CIA Anti-terrorism Specialist mentioned in Part Three warned, those who choose to reveal highly classified state secrets do so at their peril, for their very lives are at stake. (View source)
Ecuador
On June 12, 2014, Sauder sent a chilling letter to a friend indicating that he was applying for political asylum in Quito, the capital city of Ecuador. In this letter he explained his reasons for doing so.
“I am seeking political refuge in Ecuador, with support from 1) Francis Boyle (international lawyer at U. of Illinois Law School), 2, the World Service Authority in Washington, DC (founded by the late Gary Davis) and 3) the Inter-American Platform for Human Rights, Development and Democracy, here in Quito.
“The principal bases of my petition are 1) my multiple arrests and stints in jail/prison for nonviolent, anti-nuclear peace protests, most recently in 2010 in North Dakota, for which I spent 100 days in jail; 2) my years of blogging on a variety of social and political issues; 3) my two decades of research and writing about the many underground and underwater bases of the military-industrial-espionage complex; and 4) the provisions of the NDAA and the pervasive, global spying.
“I am probably on multiple watch lists because of my anti-nuclear activism, my blogging and my underground and underwater bases and tunnels research and writing. With the NDAA anyone can be abruptly killed or simply plucked off the street. You just vanish. I have noticed human surveillance of myself in Quito in recent months. I don’t know who is doing it.
“I was almost killed a year and a half ago, and spent more than four months in the public hospitals here in Ecuador. It was a close call. Some of my friends think a USA three-letter agency could have been involved. Maybe. I personally have no idea. I am still alive. (View Source)
Richard Sauder’s choice of Ecuador as a place of refuge finds an interesting parallel with another person who has devoted his life to investigating government secrets hidden from the general public. His name is Bill Ryan, co-founder with Kerry Cassidy of Project Camelot.
Together, Ryan and Cassidy recorded a large collection of video interviews with whistleblowers and other informants who were prepared to talk about a variety of secret government programmes, including DUMBs (Deep Underground Military Bases).
Both Cassidy and Ryan have since moved on from Project Camelot. But although Bill Ryan has never stated publicly that he felt that his life was in danger, it is interesting to note that he no longer lives in the United States and now makes his home in a remote corner of Ecuador.
Furthermore, it is hardly a coincidence that Julian Assange, the founder of Wikileaks, sought refuge from prosecution by living in the Ecuadorian Embassy in London, and that Edward Snowden had originally intended to travel to Ecuador to escape the U.S. authorities.
Philip Schneider
Philip Schneider
By far the most significant whistleblower to come forward and reveal inside information about the secret American deep underground network, was Philip Schneider. Schneider was a self-taught geological and structural engineer with both military and aerospace experience.
Schneider was a true patriot. However, his patriotism did not permit him to honour the non-disclosure agreement that all classified government employees have to sign. He said that his ultimate allegiance was to the Constitution of the United States, rather than to any official organization.
It was this zeal that prompted him to begin a series of lecture tours talking about government cover-ups, black budgets, black programme contractors, deep underground bases and many other projects in which he had personally been involved.
In May, 1995, he began a public lecture (show link) at Post Falls, Idaho, with the following words:
“I love the country I am living in more than I love my life, but I would not be standing before you now, risking my life, if I did not believe it was so.
“The first part of this talk is going to concern deep underground military bases and the Black Budget. The Black Budget is a secretive budget that garners 25% of the gross national product of the United States. At least this amount is used in black programs, like those concerned with underground bases.
“Presently (May, 1995), there are 129 deep underground military bases in the United States. They have been building these bases day and night unceasingly since the early 1940s. Some of them were built even earlier than that.
“These bases are basically large cities underground connected by high-speed magneto-levitation trains that have speeds up to Mach 2 (1,500 mph). Several books have been written about this activity.
“Richard Souder, a Ph. D. architect (not to be confused with Richard Sauder mentioned above), has risked his life by talking about this. He worked with a number of government agencies on deep underground military bases. In around where you live in Idaho, there are 11 of them.
“The average depth of these bases is over a mile, and they are again basically whole cities underground. They are all between 2.66 and 4.25 cubic miles in size. They have laser drilling machines that can drill a tunnel seven miles long in one day.
“The Black Projects sidestep the authority of Congress, which as we know is illegal. Right now, the New World Order is depending on these bases. If I had known at the time I was working on them that the NWO was involved, I would not have done it. I was lied to rather extensively.”
Less than eight months after saying these words, Philip Schneider was dead. On January 10, 1996, one of his friends had gone to his apartment in Wilsonville, Oregon, but got no response when he knocked on the door, even though his car was in the parking lot.
Finally, seven days later, he returned with the manager of the apartment complex and a detective from the Clackamas County Sheriff’s office. Inside they found the body of Philip Schneider. They estimated that he had been dead for five to seven days.
The County Coroner’s office initially attributed his death to a stroke. However, in the following days disturbing details about his death began to surface when it became clear that he had not in fact died from a stroke, but that he had been murdered.
A summary of these disturbing details was later revealed by his ex-wife Cynthia Drayer, in a memorandum issued on March 11, 2009, together with pertinent information about Philip’s early life, and the circumstances which had led to their separation.
Denver International Airport
Probably the best example of a secret underground military base that is hidden in plain sight can be found just outside the city of Denver. It is the site of the new international airport. Now Denver didn’t need a new airport. It already had one that had served it perfectly well from 1929 to 1995.
But in 1995 the old Stapleton airport was replaced by a new airport located some 25 miles from downtown. It was called the Denver International Airport (DIA). This new airport was not merely an enlargement of the old airport. It totally dwarfed it in size.
It is in fact twice as large as the next biggest airport in the United States, and second only to the King Fahd Airport in Saudi Arabia. It has the longest public use runway in the U.S.A., with a length of 16,000 feet (4,877 m), and a total land area of 33,531 acres, or 52.4 square miles.
The unusually large size of the new Denver International Airport may have been the first thing to arouse suspicion, but it was the enormous cost over-runs associated with this project that caused many to question its true nature and purpose.
By the time the new airport began operations, the cost of the project had exceeded its initial budget by a staggering $2 billion. Local taxpayers wondered what these inflated costs were spent on, especially as so many features of the new airport have never satisfactorily been explained.
When the airport was officially dedicated on March 19, 1994, a capstone was placed inside the terminal building displaying a Masonic symbol above an inscription referring to the “New World Airport Commission”. But no one has yet been able to identify this organization, or say what it is or does.
One of the most striking features at the entrance of this airport is the 32 feet (9.8 metre) high illuminated statue of a mustang rearing up on its hind legs that greets every visitor arriving at the terminal. It is coloured blue and has bulging veins and glowing red eyes.
Blue Mustang
If the sight of this weird creature was not enough to cause concern, then the story of its creation certainly did. For while working on this statue the sculptor, El Paso born artist Luis Jiménez, was killed when part of it fell on him and severed an artery in his leg.
Disturbing sights can be found inside the terminal building with murals showing militaristic scenes of conquest, involving swords, bayonets and machine guns. There is also a wall feature of a demonic creature climbing out of a suitcase, hardly a reassuring sight for prospective travellers.
The Suitcase Gargoyle
But the controversies associated with this airport do not end with the features inside the terminal building. There is also the mystery of the underground bunkers. When construction began, five large buildings were built on the site.
No sooner had these buildings been completed, when it was announced that they had been positioned incorrectly. And rather than demolish them, as would normally be the case, the authorities decided that they should be buried underground and used as “storage” facilities.
Since that time, a large part of previously unoccupied airport land has been used as a landfill for huge amounts of soil. Where this soil came from has never satisfactorily been explained, but it is certainly indicative of large-scale underground excavation in the area.
There are also many acres of fenced-off areas which have barbed wire pointing inwards, as if to keep things in, as well as small concrete stacks that resemble mini-cooling towers. These rise out of apparent empty ground, and could be used to vent facilities underground.
Another curiosity is that when the airport was first built, it was designed to have a sophisticated underground baggage delivery system. Yet despite the hundreds of millions of dollars spent on this system, it was announced that this had proved to be unworkable, and that it was supposedly “scrapped”.
It is also worth noting that Denver International Airport has four solar farms consisting of 42,358 solar panels spread across 55 acres, that can generate over ten megawatts of power. Some of this is used directly by the airport, while the rest is sold back to the grid.
Because the CIA has relocated the headquarters of its domestic division, responsible for operations within the United States to Denver, many have concluded that the airport could well be the hub of a vast secret network of deep underground bases linked together by tunnels.
Allan, An Inconvenient Truth, July 2, 2017, 12:58 pm
In the previous instalment, I described the occasion when New York area journalist Marjorie Tietjen, who had been researching the subject of chemtrails, received a letter from an anonymous source that began with the words: “I know what chemtrails are and their purpose”.
The writer said that although greenhouse gases generated by burning fossil fuels did indeed contribute to global warming, this was miniscule compared to the real threat confronting humanity, which was the higher amount of cosmic radiation coming from outer space. He (or she) went on to say:
“We don’t know exactly the cause of the phenomenon we are fighting. We don’t know how long it will last or the peak of its intensity. We only know that the Earth, as well as all the other planets and our sun, has become enveloped in an unknown energy field that threatens all stability across the solar system and our very lives”.
In the course of this letter, the writer emphasized the following points:
• Signs that something was seriously wrong only began to be realized in the late 1960s
• These signs included insect and animal migrations, as well as biological mutations
• Climate change is not just affecting the earth. It is affecting the entire solar system
• All the planets are experiencing change, from Mercury all the way out to Pluto
• The chemical composition of the atmosphere of Venus has changed, and that change is accelerating
• Radiation emitted from the gas giants (Jupiter, Saturn, Uranus and Neptune) has intensified
• Chemtrails first appeared in the sky around 1997, although tests had been carried out earlier
• This massive atmospheric aerosol spraying programme began in the United States, but now is world-wide
• Crews that do this spraying fly out of air force bases around the globe using re-fitted Lockheed and Boeing jets
• Chemtrails consist primarily of ionized barium and aluminum oxide particles, as well as carbon black
• Their purpose is to create a thermal, anti-radiation barrier beneath the earth’s troposphere
• This barrier is designed to reflect the damaging incoming radiation back out into space
• Although the aerosol being sprayed will make many people sick, the trade off is the long term survival of humanity
• The pilots who fly these aerosol spraying missions should really be considered heroes, for our continued livelihood is at risk
The scenario described by the writer in this letter sounds like it could have been lifted straight out of a science fiction novel. So the question we have to ask ourselves is: how much of this, if anything, is true? Of course, if you were to ask any conventional climatologist, the answer would be “NIL”.
But for those who care to look behind the curtain of conventional climate thinking, the answer would be very different, In fact there is increasing evidence to suggest that ALL of the points mentioned in the above letter may turn out to be true.
Most people who live on earth know that the earth spins on its axis, and that it takes 24 hours to do so. That means that it is spinning at a rate of about 1,000 miles an hour (1,600 kms per hour). But the earth also moves around the sun, and it takes a year to complete a single circuit.
But although all the planets rotate around the sun, the sun itself is not stationary. It doesn’t simply stay in one place all the time. The sun is also moving. In fact the entire solar system orbits around the centre of the Milky Way galaxy, which of course is also in motion.
Scientists have calculated that the solar system is travelling at a rate of about 828,000 kms per hour (roughly 515,000 miles per hour). Even at that speed it takes about 230 million years for the solar system to complete a circuit around the centre of the Milky Way galaxy.
So what that means is that humanity has only lived on this planet for a tiny fraction of one orbit around the centre of the galaxy, and that every day brings the solar system in contact with a new area of space. And what whistleblowers are telling us is that it is this new area of space that is harming us.
We already know that drastic changes are happening on the earth. So if what these whistleblowers are telling us is true, we should find changes happening on other planets in the solar system, as well as to the sun itself. And there are certainly indications that this is so.
Media Coverage
Back in 2007 the National Geographic News carried an article titled Mars Melt Hinted at Solar, Not Human, Cause for Warming, Scientist Says. The report indicated that data from NASA’s Mars Global Surveyor and Odyssey missions revealed that “ice caps” on Mars had been shrinking.
The scientist concerned was Habibullo Abdussamatov, head of space research at St. Petersburg’s Astronomical Observatory in Russia. He claimed that this data from Mars was evidence that global warming on Earth was being caused by changes in the sun.
Abdussamatov claimed that it was the long-term increase in solar irradiance that was the cause of heating on both the Earth and Mars. Not surprisingly, his claim went over with conventional climatologists like a lead balloon.
Colin Wilson, a planetary physicist at Oxford University said “His views are completely at odds with the mainstream scientific opinion”, while Arthur Evan, a climate scientist at the University of Wisconsin, Madison, added: “The idea just isn’t supported by the theory or observations”.
More recently (December 2015), Space.newscarried an article under the headline Entire solar system is heating up! Scientists blame solar warming. The article carried information that is sufficiently illuminating that it is worth reproducing here.
“Nothing is stable, including the solar system. New evidence suggests the solar system is moving into a new energy zone which is altering the magnetic fields of the planets.
“There is reason to believe Earth is not the only planet in the solar system undergoing climate change, meaning CO2 emissions are not the primary force responsible for the rise in global temperatures.
“Growth of the dark spots in Pluto, reports of auroras on Saturn, polar shifts in Uranus and changes in light intensity of Neptune suggests something very strange is happening in the solar system.
“Many scientists suspect that the solar system has migrated to a region of the galaxy with high energy. We have the illusion that the sun is a nebulous ball of gas fixated in the sky that the rest of the solar system dances around.
“In reality, the sun is one star among many sitting on the outskirts of the Milky Way, hurtling through space. Although the total amount of energy within the universe is conserved, pockets of energy in the Milky Way vary in intensity. The solar system may have rolled into one of these highly active regions.
Sun’s magnetic field increases in strength
“The warming of the entire solar system has been supported by some scientists. One dramatic shift that is taking place is the strength of the sun’s electromagnetic field.
“According to a study by Dr. Michael Lockwood at Rutherford Appleton Laboratory in England, the sun’s magnetic field has increased by 230 percent within the last 100 years. The energetic changes in the sun radiate outward though solar wind, thereby increasing the charge of interstellar space.
Another piece of evidence in favor of solar change is the sudden rise in galactic star dust. Ulysses, a space probe, has been monitoring the amount of star dust flowing through the solar system since 1992. The sun’s magnetic field impacts how much star dust drifts through the solar system. The magnetic field attracts more star dust as it strengthens.
The warming of Pluto
“Another affirmation of solar change comes from Pluto. Pluto resides on the icy outskirts of the solar system near a giant shell of astronomical bodies know as the Oort Cloud. Although Pluto resides in the coolest regions of the solar system, the dwarf planet is heating up.
“Specifically, Pluto’s atmospheric pressure has increased by 300 percent, which is more than any other planet in the solar system. Even more paradoxical, Pluto’s atmosphere is becoming denser as it travels farther away from the sun.
“Due to this, scientists suspect Pluto is at the forefront of a high energy region of the galaxy that the solar system is beginning to reside in.
“There is no doubt that human activity is impacting climate change. Nevertheless, there are other forces outside the solar system that are affecting climate inside the solar system. Whatever the case may be, Earth can expect a rough ride as it travels through foreign warm waters.
Once again, conventional climatologists have rejected these findings with the scorn they feel these conspiratorial theories deserve. There is, however, one fact which none of these climatologists can deny. And that is the presence of silky strands of chemtrails in the sky.
And this is where the claims of the anonymous source quoted earlier gain credence. For he, or she, is not alone in their testimony. Another whistleblower to come forward was a scientist (referred to as “Deep Shield”) living in the Berkeley/Emeryville/Oakland area of California.
Much of what he revealed matches what was included in the mysterious letter sent to Marjorie Tietjen that was quoted in a previous instalment. Again I have chosen to let him speak about issues that are relevant to this subject in his own words.
The Testimony of Deep Shield
“Most of the elements used in the spray are heavier than air, even in their powdered form they are heavier and will sink quickly. Mixing them with the polymers suspends the particles in the atmosphere high above the surface for longer periods of time, therefore in theory we do not need to spray as often or as much material.
“Since the suspended particles eventually do settle into the lowest part of the atmosphere and are inhaled by all life forms on the surface there is an attempt to counter the growth of mold by adding to the mixture mold growth suppressants – some of which may be of biological material.
“Though it would appear that the dispersal rate of the spray is fast, it is actually takes much longer to be an effective shield. There is a desired concentration being sought. One that is thick enough to stem the UV and the Infrared, while being thin enough to allow visible light through.
“A perpetual cloud cover would have disastrous effects on plant life; the food chain thus disrupted would soon collapse. The desired effect wanted is a thin cover that would theoretically create a daytime haze that allows plenty of sunlight while providing protection from UV radiation and also reflect enough infrared to maintain nominal temperatures.
“To insure that the chemicals are not tampered with, they are mixed and sprayed over random nations. This means that chemicals produced in the USA has a good chance of being sprayed over Russia, England and the USA.
“This random spray of material means that no nation would be certain that their chemicals will be sprayed over a nation which they have issues with. Russian planes may be seen in USA skies, but so too will USA planes be seen in Russian skies.
“The canisters used are sealed in a third nation that has no idea where its canister is going. Participating nations have their observers at every station where canister loading is done. All of this to insure that the shield is not used as a weapon.
“To further insure that the shield is not used as a weapon, non participant nations are sprayed by participants who must spray in order to get enough material to maintain their nations shield. It is understood that not spraying is as much a military offense as shooting at them.
“Due to the severity of the situation it is mandatory to maintain public calm for as long as possible. The Earth is dying. Humanity is on the road to extinction – without the Shield mankind will die off with in 20 to 50 years.
“Most people alive today could live to see this extinction take place. This means that an announcement of the situation we face boils down to telling every man, woman and child on earth that they have no future, they are going to be killed.
“People would panic. There would be economic collapse, the production and movement of goods would collapse. Millions would die in all cities on earth, riots and violence would reduce civilian centers to rubble within days.
“Half of the population in dense metropolitan areas would try to leave the cities seeking ‘safety’ in the rural areas thinking that they would be safe.
“Those left behind in the cities would be at war with their neighbors, fighting for the remaining supplies. We would be telling the world that the world is coming to an end, and even with the Shield the chances of survival are small.
“Look at the kinds of material being used, aluminum, barium, titanium, etc. Most are highly reflective; in some instances the material is an absorber of gasses.
“In the case of reflection the desire is to reflect X amount of heat and X amount of UV while still maintaining acceptable (nominal) levels of UV and heat reaching the planet’s surface.
“Life requires a certain amount of both UV and Heat – too much will kill – so will too little. The apparent amount looks like a lot more than what is actually being sprayed per volume of air it is covering.
“Most of the whitening of the sky is not the material per se, but the collection of water vapor, which forms into suspended ice crystals. The introduction of the material causes the water vapor to collect like rain collects on individual particles of dust.
This testimony of “Deep Shield” validates the information given to Marjorie Tietjen, and makes it clear that the underlying purpose of the global aerosol dispersal programme is to protect the earth from cosmic radiation that is impacting the earth from outside of the solar system.
Ultra-violet radiation
And the greatest threat to the survival of humanity at this time is the amount of dangerous ultra-violet radiation that is being emitted by the sun. While much of this radiation is necessary for life on earth to exist, some of it is not. In fact some of it is positively lethal.
Ultra-violet (UV) is electromagnetic radiation with a wavelength shorter than visible light, but longer than X-rays. This means that UV rays are normally invisible to humans. UV radiation is further broken down into three categories: UV-A, UV-B and UV-C.
The sun emits ultra-violet radiation at all wavelengths. Under normal circumstances, half of the solar radiation at the top of the earth’s atmosphere consists of infrared light, which we feel in the form of heat. Of the remainder, 40% is visible light and 10% ultra-violet light.
While much of this ultra-violet light is blocked by the atmosphere before it reaches the earth’s surface, some of it is not. And it is this that can cause problems for human, animal and plant life. UV-B radiation can cause damage to the DNA, while UV-C is the most dangerous form of UV.
And although the authorities vigorously deny this, and will go to extraordinary lengths to hide this knowledge from the general public, it is evident that the amount of harmful ultra-violet radiation now reaching the earth is actually killing off plants, fishes, birds and other species.
One of the foremost investigators of the escalation of ultra-violet radiation around the planet is Dane Wigington. Dane has a background in solar energy, having been an employee of the Bechtel Power Corporation, and now lives in Bella Vista, California.
Dane now spreads news of what is going on in this field through his website geoengineeringwatch.org, and issues regular videos through his YouTube channel.
It is worth noting here that Dane Wigington believes that human beings are to blame for the high levels of UV radiation. He is clearly unaware that this is a problem affecting the entire solar system, and that chemtrails are therefore a response to, rather than the cause of, the UV problem.
Farmers, gardeners and others who spend much of their time outdoors are also reporting alarming developments in the natural world, and the damage that extreme UV radiation has been causing trees, plants, insects and birds, as can be seen from the following videos.
As these videos show, evidence of damage caused by dangerous UV-B and UV-C ultra-violet radiation can be seen almost anywhere one cares to look. Other examples of this are the red stop signs that have been bleached white in states like Michigan, Wisconsin, Indiana, Texas and Alabama.
Furthermore, people report that the sun’s rays feel so much hotter than before, and that it takes far less time to get sunburned. Not only that, but the sun doesn’t even look the same. Instead of the old ball of yellow light, the sun now looks white hot – much like a welder’s arc lamp.
It is obvious that the entire cycle of life on the earth is being threatened, beginning with insects and plants. But how long will it be before we ourselves are affected? This is not a threat that looms in the distant future. It is happening now – at this very moment. We are reminded again of the words of the whistleblower.
“Terrorism, Iraq, Afghanistan, the potential threats of Iran and North Korea, nuclear conflagration — all pale when compared to the dire threat our world is facing right now. That’s right. Now. This instant — not some misty time in the far off future”.
Allan, An Inconvenient Truth, June 19, 2017, 1:38 pm
Marjorie Tietjen is a freelance investigative journalist who lives in the Greater New York area. One of the things she has investigated is the subject of chemtrails. Based on her research, she wrote a short article which appeared in Rense.com entitled Blatant ABC Chemtrail Subliminals.
She began the article with a question that had been bothering her over the years. The question was this.
“What is the main purpose of the extensive chemtrail jet aerosol program and is this operation a permanent necessity? I ask myself these puzzling and frustrating questions over and over again but there seems to be no certain answer”.
In the article she went on to bemoan the fact that despite the clear evidence of the presence of chemtrails in the sky, no one ever seemed to come forward with a clear and convincing answer to the questions who is doing this – and why?And how long will they keep doing it?
One can imagine her astonishment when, on the very day that her article appeared online, she received a long letter from an anonymous source answering all her questions. As she later wrote in a post to an online forum: “I’m not sure if he/she is an insider or just a researcher”.
But whatever the origin or source of the information provided in this letter, it was evident that the author wrote with authority. He or she clearly knew what they were talking about, and the answers that were given were truly stunning. The opening line could not have been more stark.
” I know what chemtrails are and their purpose”.
The writer then proceeded to go into minute detail about the nature of the chemtrail project, what chemicals were being used, how they were used, who was using them, and then most importantly, why they were being used. The letter ended with the following chilling words:
” When you see the chemplanes and the chemtrails in their wakes, look at them not with fear and trepidation, nor with anger and enmity, but embrace them and their brave crews. They are truly fighting the odds to save us and our planet.
“Look up at the skies and say a prayer for the heroes who are among us. If they fail, we all fail and our race itself may fail. But damn it, at least we went down swinging!”
While most people would probably dismiss these words as conspiratorial propaganda, the writer then goes on to justify them by giving a detailed analysis of the development of the chemtrail programme. Because of the seriousness of the threat, I am letting his own words speak for themselves.
“Uncovering the terrible secret of chemtrails has led to many sleepless nights. What the human race faces, quite literally, is a battle for our future existence — at the very least a battle to try to retain the civilization we now enjoy.
“Terrorism, Iraq, Afghanistan, the potential threats of Iran and North Korea, nuclear conflagration — all pale when compared to the dire threat our world is facing right now. That’s right. Now. This instant — not some misty time in the far off future.
“As best as can be documented, chemtrails first appeared in our skies during 1997. But the growing awareness among certain scientific and military circles that something along the lines as chemtrails were needed to protect the human race began as long ago as the early 1980s.
“Many hypotheses exist as to why the world’s military forces (initially, primarily the United States Air Force) embarked upon this massive, well-coordinated, atmospheric aerosol spraying. Most of the hypotheses border on fringe science, complete speculation or fantastic conspiracy theories.
“These wide-ranging hypotheses span the spectrum from aerial applications in conjunction with HAARP technology being experimented with from installations in Alaska, Colorado, Utah, the United Kingdom, Costa Rica, Australia, the Antarctic and Japan (most are only familiar with the Alaskan operations as that has been heavily reported and discussed) — to wild assertions that it is some kind of “dumbing down” or “pruning” operation designed to take control of the greater populace, or de-populate the Earth to numbers that can be contained by some shadowy elite. Falling between these two extremes are those that believe that the now worldwide mission is somehow attempting to limit or forestall so-called global warming.
“Those that are aware of the aerosol spraying (which is a surprisingly small number) and believe it has to do with the climate are actually the closest to the truth. But the truth is so shocking, so unnerving, and so likely to cause huge social and economic upheaval, that it is understandable why the “powers that be” have elected to attempt this planetary rescue mission while keeping most of the world in the dark.
“Indeed, even most of the crews that fly the missions out of air force bases around the globe in specially re-fitted Lockheed and Boeing jets do not understand the true nature of their mission. The full scope of the mission is only revealed on a need-to-know basis. And what initially began as an American project has now been joined by almost every air force of every nation on Earth.
“The residue of chemtrails have been analyzed by some independent laboratories and the results have been variable, and to an extent, conflicting. Barium, aluminum oxide particles and carbon black are the primary mixture and work together to create the atmospheric barrier.
“Stories of samples from chemtrail residue analyzed by a facility in British Columbia, which is presumably licensed by the U. S. Environmental Protection Agency, were said to have found (in addition to the jet fuel) numerous pathogens including: Pseudomonas Aeruginosa, which causes respiratory infection and attacks the immunization system; Serratia Marcescens, an antibiotic-resistant bacteria causing pneumonia, endocarditis and meningitis; as well as Streptomyces and various molds capable of inducing heart disease, upper respiratory and gastrointestinal ailments.
“The problem with any analysis that presumably detects pathogens in the aerosol mixture, however, is that the samples could easily have become contaminated as they were not retrieved while airborne, but harvested from the ground or near the ground.
“Some think that the chemtrail mission is directly related to the late Dr. Edward Teller’s infamous white paper advocating aerosol spraying as a means towards global climate control. Dr. Teller, known throughout the world as the “father of the hydrogen bomb,” did write such a paper and it is still downloadable from the Internet as a PDF document.
“The truth is, Dr. Teller’s paper was more of a coincidence than a primary motivator for the aerosol spraying program which had already been approved in principle by both President George H.W. Bush in 1989 and President William Clinton in 1991. In 2001, George W. Bush inherited the program and, working with virtually every government in the world, moved to institute the program on a planetary basis.
“The Earth is in danger. Real danger. No, we are not about to be invaded by bug-eyed space aliens or gigantic mutant insects erupting from their atomically contaminated lairs. The danger, however, does sound like a science fiction scenario. Unfortunately it is real. Actually, to be exact, the Earth itself is not in imminent danger — merely every form of life that currently inhabits this planet.
“When did this danger emerge? No one may ever know for certain, but the signs that something was beginning to go terribly wrong were observed by a few as far back as the 1940s. The true scope of the danger began to be realized in the late 1960s.
“Less than 15 years later the data being analyzed confirmed that the worst fears were true. At that point the only questions in many researcher’s minds was, “How much time do we have?” and “Do we have a sufficient level of technology to save ourselves?”
“In a way, we are lucky. If this crisis had emerged even 100 years ago the human race wouldn’t have stood a chance. It wouldn’t even have known what was happening to it. Even now we can understand the ultimate consequences, the effects, yet have very little knowledge of exactly what is causing the phenomenon.
“While the world is heatedly debating issues such as war and rumors of war, pollution as a cause of global warming, the merits or lack of merits of certain religions or who will win the U.S. presidential election in November, the real action is occurring almost daily at 25,000 to 50,000 feet above our heads.
“The heroes are anonymous; there are weapons sparkling pinpoints cutting through the atmosphere at 500 mph. I call them heroes because that’s what they are — men and women who are literally fighting every day in a valiant attempt to save all of our lives.
“No one knows for sure if they will succeed. If they fail, however, the consequences are almost too terrible to contemplate. Quite simply, in the worst case scenario, a mass extinction will occur not experienced on Earth for almost 250 million years.
“I do not wish to frighten anyone, nor am I a ”doom and gloomer,” for I believe that we have a good chance of making this work. Being a realist, however, I must admit there are no iron clad guarantees. Putting it bluntly, if we fail, the human race will, for the most part, cease to exist.
“Climate is just one of the changes facing our brave, new world. Scientists have recently discovered that a new mass extinction is underway. Insect and animal migrations have begun on a titanic scale. Biological mutations are erupting spontaneously that have no counterpart historically and no easy explanation.
“Most disturbing of all, it has been confirmed that human male sperm counts are dropping precipitously around the world — a trend that began to be noticed and tracked just several decades ago. Concurrent to this is the little reported fact that this trend towards infertility is not constrained to humans alone, but cuts across all mammalian species.
“The late film director and producer, George Pal, created many classic science fiction and fantasy movies from the 1950s through the 1970s. One of his earliest films was the spectacular, “When Worlds Collide,” which some who speak of renegade planets or cometary bodies rely on heavy for their “factual” source material.
“Well, rest easy, for it is very unlikely you or I will ever see the planetary impacts or close flybys (such as the much discussed “Planet X”) anytime soon. By anytime soon I mean during the next several thousand years.
“Yet, in a sense, there are worlds colliding right now. These worlds are in our solar system and include our Earth. The collisions are not of mass, but energy. Some of the energy is coming from the sun, which has become more active than at any time since the last 1200 to 1400 years.
“But other activity seems to be extra-solar in nature. Here a secret, but fierce debate has begun as to whether it is because our entire solar system has moved into a new area of space rampant with anomalous energy, or if it is cyclical in nature and energy streams between our system and another dimension have erupted once again after millions of years.
“As I mentioned previously, the debate is interesting, but the effect is what is most important. Whatever the cause, it has been agreed upon that the effect is very quickly going to change our climate radically, displace billions, disrupt food supplies, cause massive outbreaks of disease, irradiate parts of the Earth, melt the Arctic ice, turn off crucial ocean currents such as the Gulf Stream that protect northern Europe from arctic-like conditions. . . and all that is merely the precursor of the breakdowns to come.
“Mars… the ancient god of war, of turmoil, of destruction. The angry red planet. Perhaps aptly named, Mars was the first planet that gave us clues that what was happening to Earth’s climate had little, if anything, to do with fluorocarbon in hair spray or the burning of fossil fuels.
“Large, politicized organizations like The Sierra Club and Greenpeace and politicians like Al Gore may still be beating the “evil industry is causing global warming” drum, but they are ignorant of the facts.
“The handwringers over the stalemated Kyoto Protocol don’t know or understand that their rather draconian agreement could have been passed and enforced to the letter and it would make not one iota of difference to the massive upcoming climate change ahead of us. It is analogous to attempting to stop a rampaging flood with a few, feeble sandbags.
“Mars is heating up. Mars is undergoing massive climactic change, exactly as our Earth is warming. The year 2050 is about the time that NASA predicts the polar ice caps on Mars will be completely eradicated.
“Curiously, the United States Navy has embarked on a time schedule to launch its new arctic fleet by 2050. You see, the year 2050 is when they project the north pole will be divested of much of its ice and its waterways will be open to navigation.
“Mars and Earth are both losing their ice caps.
“So, the Earth is heating up. . . and it’s not caused by pollution or volcanic action. Mars is heating up. . . and it is certainly not being caused by pollution, nor even volcanic eruptions. Are these the only two planets exhibiting such anomalous climate changes?
“No. The amazing truth is every planet in our solar system is being affected, from Mercury all the way out to distant Pluto (mean distance from sun 3.67 billion miles). Astronomers first discovered that Pluto is heating up during their 2003 routine observations. The data left them scratching their collective heads. Not only was Pluto heating up, but it was getting hotter even as its orbit was taking it farther away from the sun!
“Other observations of the planets during the past decade have revealed that Mercury, the closest planet to the sun (its mean distance from the Sun is cited as 36,000,000 miles) has developed an ice cap. Think about that: it has formed an icecap. What does that mean in respect to the extra-solar energy flowing into our system? It is heating up a world like Pluto while cooling down parts of a planet like Mercury, where the average temperature has always been measured as hot enough to melt lead.
“But there is much more.
“The thick atmosphere of Venus is rapidly changing. Its chemical composition has changed remarkably in the past several years and that change is accelerating. The giant gas planets (Jupiter, Saturn, Uranus and Neptune) are heating up. The radiation being emitted from them has intensified. Remarkably, even their luminosity has increased from 50% to over 300% depending on the planet. And most astounding of all, Io, one of Jupiter’s many moons, has become so hot that if it continues its temperature rise Io is in danger of melting.
“The climate change is not just affecting Earth. It is a solar-system-wide phenomenon.
“Less than eight years ago the United States took the lead and instituted a brilliant and bold project borne out of desperation: creating a thermal, anti-radiation barrier in a band of our atmosphere beneath Earth’s troposphere. Although the project itself may cause some planetary climate change, it is calculated to cause far less damage than the events that have been extrapolated to occur in our near future.
“It is a two-edged sword as the aerosol spraying will undeniably affect some individuals making them sick or otherwise affecting to an extent their immune systems and respiratory systems. The trade off, however, is long term survival of our civilization.
“The dice are rolling and no one knows if one of the most secret projects in history can protect our world from the extra-solar (perhaps extra-dimensional) catastrophes lying in wait ahead of us. It is ironic, that a project every bit as secretive as the breaking of the Nazi High Command codes, or the Manhattan atom bomb project, is visible in the skies above our heads on any given day (and sometimes any given night).
“It lends credence to the old intelligence axiom that the best way to keep something secret is by hiding it in plain sight. Obviously, hundreds of millions have seen chemtrails in the skies and have ignored them or dismissed them as simple ice-vapor contrails.
“During the past several years some of the media have raised questions about chemtrails (such as Fox News’ reports about them in 2002). But the news reports mysteriously fade away and mainstream investigative reporters and science reporters who express an interest are, for the most part, persuaded to drop their efforts to identify exactly what is going on in our skies and why.
“As long ago as the early 1940s, some physicists and astronomers began to notice a pattern of change coming over the sun. It did not become more pronounced until the new millennium arrived. During the past four years, from 2000 through 2004, the sun’s activity has become more unpredictable and more obvious. Scientists, some working for the military or the federal government, began to think the unthinkable: the sun and all the planets were beginning a massive transformation.
“This transformation is unstoppable, potentially catastrophic to life and will most certainly cause the Earth’s environment to experience abrupt changes on a massive scale. Because the sun and all the planets together are reacting to this outside phenomenon, it is beginning to be suspected that some trans-dimensional energy in this region of space is interacting with the normal activity of the sun and the planets.
“Richard C. Hoagland, among others, has been advocating such an energy transference between our universe and (for lack of a better term) a ”sister universe” for some years now. He has been all too aware of the significant changes happening with our sun and all the planets in our solar system. His latest paper discussing this phenomenon, (which he calls ”hyper-dimensional”) is “Interplanetary Day After Tomorrow?”
“Mr. Hoagland has a brilliant and highly imaginative mind. He is also a maverick. Because some of his methods are unorthodox and his insight unsettling, much of the scientific establishment tends to dismiss his ideas. The irony is, years after they dismiss his observations they often are found rushing to publish papers in peer publications exactly echoing what he often first pointed out to them. Such is the history of the established norm versus the insightful innovators.
“Hyper-dimensionalism or trans-dimensional energy transference, call it what you will, this phenomenon seems to be at the root of the system-wide disaster unfolding right before our eyes. It is only the beginning, perhaps the beginning of the end.
“H. G. Wells’ famous tale, “The Time Machine,” was spun about a nineteenth century inventor who breaks the boundaries of time and propels himself more than 800,000 years into the future only to find that the human race has split into two: the Eloi, who live on the surface of the world, and the Morlocks who are subterranean dwellers. Over the eons the Morlocks became monstrous, half-human cannibals that still controlled a rudimentary technology. The Eloi became simple, Eden-like creatures who were blissfully unaware that they were the entree of choice on the Morlock’s dinner plates.
“The road ahead of us may not produce such a gruesome schism, but the human race may indeed be forced into a scenario similar to that envisioned by Mr. Wells’ scientific fantasy.
“Many who read this are very much aware of the massive underground complexes that have been built in the United States and other countries since World War II. Much of the technology was acquired from Nazi engineering projects and during the last 60 years vastly improved upon using more advanced technology and materials.
“The original purpose of most of the underground complexes (many in hollowed out mountains or under the wasteland of parched desert terrain) was for key elements of society and government to survive a nuclear cataclysm. To an extent that is still one of the purposes.
“But all have been modified and more are being constructed around the world at breakneck speed in the event that the system phenomenon is not constrained by the aerosol chemical barrier, or the changes of the solar system last much longer than what is hoped. I say “hoped” because although there are numerous hypotheses, no one really knows how long this change will last or if, indeed, it may become permanent.
“Therefore, millions of people may have to spend the rest of their lives in underground cities — and perhaps their children and grandchildren. Of course, that still leaves billions on the surface of a dying planet. How long those billions will be able to survive, no one knows.
“The future “Morlocks” will be tasked with furthering the research so one day mankind can safely regain a foothold on the surface, while the “Eloi” will have to fend for themselves. Seeing the impact that the extra-solar changes could bring to this planet if the aerosol spraying program fails, it seems more likely that the ”Morlocks” will remain human, while the “Eloi” surface survivors (if any) could mutate into the monsters.
“I have traveled around the world and lived in many different American cities. Currently, I reside in the Southwest. I watch the chemplanes fly in from Edwards Air Force base in California, desperately performing their mission. Although most of the crews are not aware of it, the success of their mission holds the fate of the human race in their hands.
“Several months ago I met a flight engineer who is a regular crew member aboard a re-fitted U.S. Air Force Boeing aircraft that is part of the aerosol mission out of Edwards. I will call him “Roger Anderson,” although that is not his real name.
“He is a friend of a friend of mine who works in chemical engineering. Anderson was quite frank with me after I divulged to him all I knew at that point about the history and mission of chemtrails. We were sitting in the corner of an almost deserted BBQ restaurant in the city of Simi Valley, California (a restaurant, by the way, often frequented by men who work at Northrop’s Skunkworks on Project Aurora, if that rings any bells with you).
“Anderson confirmed the true mission objectives and protocols and laughed when I brought up some of the half-baked conspiracy theories out there. He shook his head and found it fascinating that people could believe that the government would purposefully try to make people sick on a worldwide scale. After all, he pointed out, we’re all breathing the same air — whether you are a farmer in Iowa, a mechanic in Texas or a politician in Washington, DC.
“When I pressed him about the long term health effects from an aerosol spray that always contains at its base carbon black, ionized aluminum particles and barium, he admitted it will make some people ill. But he went on to argue that the alternative is much worse if just left to follow its own course without at least the attempt of human intervention. Based on what I have personally learned from my own research and contacts with government scientists these past few years, I had to agree.
“So what comes next? Will we reach the apex of drama as depicted in that old British science fiction film, ”The Day the Earth Caught Fire,” where actor Leo McKern, portraying the editor of a London newspaper, holds up two possible headlines for the morning edition: ”Earth Saved. Billions Give Thanks,” or ”Earth Doomed. People of the World Pray.” The film ended with that scene and the viewer was left to their own imagination as to which scenario ensued.
“We are in that same predicament. We don’t know exactly the cause of the phenomenon we are fighting. We don’t know how long it will last or the peak of its intensity. We only know that the Earth, as well as all the other planets and our sun, has become enveloped in an unknown energy field that threatens all stability across the solar system and our very lives”. (View Source)
Allan, An Inconvenient Truth, June 5, 2017, 12:44 pm
The following post contains videos of whistleblowers who reveal classified information. While watching these videos my computer was subjected to a massive hack attack.
Those who watch these videos should proceed with caution. For those who prefer not to take the risk, a short summary of each of these videos is provided in the text.
A Presidential Warning
In January 1961, three days before the end of his term in office, President Dwight D. Eisenhower gave his farewell address to the nation. In it he included the following words:
“In the councils of government, we must guard against the acquisition of unwarranted influence, whether sought or unsought, by the military-industrial complex. The potential for the disastrous rise of misplaced power exists and will persist”.
As he was the first person to use the phrase “military-industrial complex” in a public speech, few people had any idea what he was talking about, especially when he warned that “the potential for the disastrous riseof misplaced power” not only existed, but would continue to be a threat.
But even if they did, they could probably never have imagined how this military-industrial complex would one day come to dominate every aspect of American society. Sadly, Eisenhower’s warning has fallen on deaf ears, for the very disaster that he warned the nation about has now come to pass.
A Strange Phenomenon
Some twenty years ago, a few observant citizens around the United States began to notice an unusual phenomenon. They noticed that as planes flew overhead, some of them left cloudy trails behind them, while others did not. And some of these cloudy trails often hung around for hours.
Curious as to what the source of this phenomenon might happen to be, they approached the authorities. They were assured that this was nothing to worry about, because they were simply condensation trails which persisted in the sky as a result of fortuitous atmospheric weather conditions.
In fact these condensations trails, or contrails as they are usually called, are formed whenever water vapour condenses and freezes around small particles that are emitted from aircraft engine exhaust. They typically form when planes fly at high altitudes in sub-freezing temperatures.
According to Wikipedia, “depending on the temperature and humidity at the altitude these contrails form, they may be visible for only a few seconds or minutes, or may persist for hours and spread to be several miles wide, eventually resembling natural cirrus or altocumulous clouds”.
And according to the authorities, the reason why these contrails seemed to be seen more often was easy to explain. More contrails were being seen, they said, because more planes were flying in the sky. And this continues to be the explanation that is offered to the public to this day.
My Personal Odyssey
I first began to notice these vapour trails in the sky about twenty years ago while I was taking my customary walks along the beach. Ever since I was young I have been in the habit of watching planes as they travelled across the sky. But there was something about these trails that was distinctly odd.
I was well aware of the existence of condensation trails forming behind aircraft travelling at high altitudes. But this is not a common feature in Vancouver where I live, because most planes operating around the airport fly at lower altitudes, as they are either taking off or landing.
But some of the planes left trails that did not dissipate after a few minutes as they normally would if they were simple condensation trails. Instead, they began to change shape almost immediately after they were formed, and then later spread out until they covered the sky.
Each individual trail would begin to break up into a sequence of separate tendrils, rather like the teeth of a comb. These tendrils would then steadily grow into separate patches of white cloud. It was these patches that would then expand until they filled the sky with a thin film of cloud.
I soon noticed that whenever one of these planes flew overhead leaving their distinctive trails behind them, that the sky would soon become overcast, filled with a thin veil of white cloud in a Cirrus type formation. But that in itself was not the most mysterious part of this phenomenon.
As I watched the planes that were laying down these trails, I saw that they would fly backwards and forwards along the same flight path. This made it obvious that they were not normal passenger planes, as FAA regulations forbid them from changing their prescribed routes in this way.
But what was even stranger was the fact that these planes had the ability to turn their exhaust trails on and off. So what would happen would be that a plane would lay down a certain length of trail, and then turn around and leave a similar trail parallel to it on the return journey.
It was clear to me that these parallel trails were being laid down in a precise pattern designed to take advantage of the offshore winds, so that these cloud formations would then blow inland and cover the whole of what is known as the “Lower Mainland” area of Vancouver.
I noticed that on summer days whenever the sky was clear, these planes would start spraying their mysterious trails as early as eight o’clock in the morning, and would then continue throughout the day until well past eight o’clock in the evening.
I also became aware of another odd phenomenon, this time associated with human behaviour. Whenever I pointed out these trails to strangers and asked them what they thought they were, they expressed no interest in them. They merely shrugged and carried on walking.
Meeting with the Media
After pestering my friends with questions about these trails which they could not answer, one of them suggested that I contact the Press about them. I did so, and made arrangements to meet with the Managing Editor of Vancouver’s largest newspaper at a local hotel.
At our meeting I explained what I had seen, and supported this with numerous documents and photographs. I pointed out that these trails hardly needed any documentation, because anyone could see them for themselves merely by going outside and looking up at the sky.
To my dismay, the Managing Editor responded by saying: “I do not believe in conspiracies”, and abruptly terminated our meeting. I subsequently learned that I was not alone, and that this was the standard response given by all authorities when confronted with questions about this subject.
To me this defied all logical reasoning. Here was a phenomenon that was clearly visible to anyone who cared to look. Yet even though local authorities must have been aware that something unusual was happening in Canadian skies, no one was prepared to talk about it.
It was as if the veil of cloud that filled the skies above Vancouver was being matched by a similar veil of secrecy by those responsible for protecting the environment. Even local weather forecasters ignored the presence of these clouds, dismissing them as normal features of the weather.
Digging Deeper
As I began to delve into this subject further, I discovered that one of the first people to undertake a serious investigation into these unusual trails was a fellow Canadian who lived not far from Vancouver. He was the award-winning environmental journalist William Thomas.
William Thomas
In January 1999, Thomas was asked by the Environment News Service to investigate these mysterious trails that were appearing in the sky. He did so, and subsequently issued a report entitled “Mystery Contrails may be Modifying Weather”.
This report gained immediate prominence, especially after he appeared as a guest on the popular late-night radio talk show hosted by Art Bell. Listeners from all over the United States called in to corroborate his findings, and he soon attracted a large following.
Thomas was also the first person to refer to these trails as “Chemical Trails”, later shortened to “Chemtrails”. He then went on to publish two books on the subject. The first was entitled Probing the Chemtrails Conundrum, which was followed by Chemtrails Confirmed.
Despite the success of both of these publications and the popularity of the subject with the general public, the reaction of the authorities was always the same. They dismissed his research as baseless, while his ideas of weather modification were greeted with ridicule and scorn.
To this day the word “chemtrails” has become inextricably linked with conspiracy, and anyone who tries to discuss this subject seriously in an open forum is treated as being of unsound mind. If anyone doubts this, I suggest they try raising this subject at their next dinner party!
Anyway, I was undeterred by this public opprobrium. In fact I have learned over the years that if you want to find out the truth about anything in life, it is a good idea to focus first on anything that is rejected by the authorities. And the more strident the criticism, the more likely it is to bear fruit.
I wanted to know what these trails were made of. I found out that over the years many people had taken samples of soil and water from heavily sprayed areas and sent them to reputable laboratories for analysis. The results of these tests have revealed some highly disturbing results.
Independent testing has confirmed that chemtrails contain a dangerous and extremely poisonous mix of chemicals that includes: barium, nano-aluminum-coated fibreglass (known as CHAFF), radioactive thorium, cadmium, chromium, nickel, ethylene dibromide and polymer fibres.
It is hardly surprising therefore that concerned citizens throughout the United States have come together to voice their outrage at what they see as a threat to their health and to the environment. A recent meeting in Shasta County in California is a case in point, as shown below. (Video later withdrawn)
Once it became obvious that a cocktail of dangerous chemicals was being systematically sprayed all over the country on a regular basis, concerned citizens began asking the obvious question: Who is doing this and why? The trouble was that those who should have had an answer, had no answer.
When approached, the authorities simply dismissed the whole topic of chemtrails as a conspiracy hoax that had been foisted upon a gullible public. The situation has been neatly summarised by Richard Leviton in his book Welcome to Your Designer Planet! In it he writes:
“We see these anomalous jet vapor trails increasingly overhead with no explanation. Hardly any media attention is given to them, yet often 50-75 trails are laid across the sky in an area in a single day, and this goes on, reportedly, all around the world, and it has been increasing since about the year 2000”.
“It is surprising how many otherwise intelligent people are hoodwinked into assuming the bizarre expanding chemtrails are normal jet exhaust from heavy air traffic. They are dispensed by jets clearly flying much higher than commercial traffic, presumably at 40,000+ feet, probably higher”.
Leviton writes about the standard response given by the authorities when asked about this phenomenon. “To start with, the U.S. Air Force refuses to discuss chemtrails as they brand this notion a hoax and they do not discuss hoaxes”.
And this is where the warning given by President Eisenhower in his farewell address, quoted earlier, assumes a grim reality, not just for the United States but for the whole of humanity. For as Richard goes on to point out:
“When you look up at what used to be a clear blue sky and see obnoxious criss-crosses of white feathery artificial substances and numerous parallel tracks of straight white lines, you know that not only is something being done to you but it’s done with contempt and a kind of black magic-flavored glee”.
We are reminded again of Eisenhower’s words when he warned: “The potential for the disastrous rise of misplaced power exists and will persist”. The threat which this poses for humanity has been exposed by Leviton when he writes:
“They’re not even bothering to veil their activities or hide behind facades and lies. They’re doing it and they refuse to discuss it; our public reaction is utterly irrelevant to them”.
When Eisenhower warned the country about this threat of “misplaced power”, he called it the Military-Industrial Complex. And that is exactly what it is. It is a combination of military power and industrial might that is shrouded in secrecy beyond the reach of any governmental agency.
It is worth noting here that when Edward Snowden revealed his trove of classified information about how the Central Intelligence Agency was spying on Americans, he was not an employee of the CIA. He actually worked for one of its contractors by the name of Booz Allen Hamilton.
So classified programmes conducted by the military frequently use private contractors, where all employees are bound by the highest levels of secrecy. But despite this tight control, whistle-blowers like Snowden do occasionally slip between the cracks. Another of these is Kristen Meghan.
So here we have the testimony of a person who worked for the U.S. Air Force for nine years as a specialist in Bio-engineering, whose job it was to review the use of all chemicals to ensure that they posed no threat to people or the environment, and that they met EPA standards.
And when she discovered orders for large quantities of hazardous chemicals, and then found that samples of air, soil and water taken from surrounding areas in Oklahoma, Georgia and Chicago showed unusually high levels of these same chemicals, she was “demonised” by fellow staff.
And when she persisted in raising questions about the use and purpose of these chemicals, she was told that she would be locked up in a mental institution and that her daughter would be taken away from her. It would be easy to dismiss her testimony if she was alone in what she said.
But she is not.
Disturbing stories continue to emerge from sources within the U.S. Air Force which corroborate her claims. Kristen said that pilots involved in spraying these chemicals were too scared to come forward and tell the world what they know. The following video would seem to bear this out.
It is clear from the third-hand information provided in the video above, that the U.S. Air Force pilot quoted here has gone to great lengths to ensure that his testimony could not be traced back to him, and that he felt that his career and possibly even his life would be in peril if it was.
He claims that he was employed as an aerosol (chemtrail) dispersal pilot engaged in a global geo-engineering programme operating under a classified top-secret code-name. It was his job, he said, to fly designated patterns within a 250 mile zone that alternated between day and night flights.
He said that pilots were rotated constantly, and seldom stayed in one place for more than 18 months. This was done to prevent “loose lips” and to preserve strict security. He said he was warned that harsh disciplinary action would be taken against him if he ever talked about what he did.
He said that pilots were told that the reason for the aerosol dispersal programme was to create an atmospheric shield designed to protect the United States from fearsome aerial weapons that could be used by hostile nations, although he said he thought that this was just a cover story.
He then referred to something that goes to the very heart of the strategy that was devised many years ago by the Military-Industrial Complex. It is the strategy of “compartmentalisation”. Over the years this has proved to be highly successful in preventing leaks in classified operations.
Under this strategy, all secret military projects operate on a “need to know” basis. What this means is that people who are assigned to a particular area or department are never told what other departments are doing. So only the most senior people are permitted to know what is really going on.
So a person working within a particular aspect of a secret project is forbidden to talk about what they do with anyone else, and they are never told what others involved in that project are doing. And anyone who breaks that rule of secrecy quickly attracts the attention of military security.
Anyone who tries to reveal classified information to the press or to the general public invites retribution by any or all of the forces available to the Federal government. And for those whose breach of security is deemed extreme, the penalty is death.
The compelling saga described in the video above (Since withdrawn) should shock any American who still believes that they live in a free country ruled by the Articles of the Constitution, and governed by elected officials who carry out their duties within the constraints set out in that Constitution.
For in this video Kevin Shipp relates his experiences while working for the Central Intelligence Agency as an Anti-terrorism Specialist. When he joined the CIA he was required to sign an oath that he would protect the country from any and all threats, both foreign and domestic.
He then goes on to describe his dismay at finding out that people within the Agency were doing illegal and unconstitutional things. But as he points out, most people who work at the Agency simply turn a blind eye to these things, knowing that their careers are at stake if they try to protest.
He goes on to claim that a secret government exists that is operating outside of the constraints of the Constitution that is beyond the reach of the U.S. Congress. He calls this secret government the Shadow Government, the Hidden Government or by the popular term of “Deep State”.
He believes that America is currently being ruled by subversion, force and fear, and that covert (secret) programmes exist in almost all of the government agencies, including the National Weather Service (NWS) and the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA).
As he explains, these agencies require all of those people engaged in classified black budget projects to sign binding secrecy agreements (non-disclosure agreements) as a condition of employment, and that it is these agreements which serve as the ultimate tool in maintaining secrecy.
People who sign these agreements actually sign away their rights under the American Constitution, and those who challenge these agreements can be terminated and put into prison. They can also be denied their pension benefits, and have interest rates on loans raised to penal levels.
Shipp also revealed a little known fact about the Whistleblower Protection Act of 1989, which was designed to protect those who disclosed information from retaliatory Government action, and that is those who have signed non-disclosure agreements are specifically excluded from the Act.
Shipp also had some deeply disturbing things to say on the subject of chemtrails. He said that the Secret Government had been spraying the skies above North America since 1997 with a cocktail of toxic substances, and that this was routinely denied by military and government officials.
He pointed out that by cooperating in secret with jet fuel manufacturers, the government had kept the knowledge about this aerosol dispersal programme completely under wraps for over twenty years, and had ignored the threat that it poses to the public and to the environment.
It was the actually the presence of these chemicals that poisoned his family and caused him to leave the Agency. The story of his personal struggle to reveal the truth of what was really going on in the CIA was finally published under the title “From the Company of Shadows”.
The Great Enigma
So here we have an enigma with profound implications for the future of humanity.
On the one hand we have the Paris Accord, where 195 countries have accepted the scientific verdict that global warming is the result of human beings burning fossil fuels, and have committed themselves to a campaign of reducing greenhouse gases in the atmosphere.
And on the other hand we have a global programme conducted by the military that has been going on for more than twenty years, of aircraft spraying toxic chemicals in the atmosphere and thereby increasing the amount of greenhouse gases in the atmosphere.
How can we possibly explain these two diametrically opposing campaigns?
One possible answer presents itself. And that is that the true cause of global warming is not the result of what human beings are doing on the planet, but is rather the result of what is happening to the entire solar system as it travels through space.
In the book The Last Days of Tolemac, when asked about the causes of climate change upon the earth, the Oracle replied:
“The most significant change that has taken place in the weather of your planet has been the phenomenon called global warming. While this phenomenon is real, its true causes are little understood by your scientists. Most of them are convinced that this is a phenomenon that is limited to the earth, and that because of this human behaviour must be to blame.
“These scientists believe that global warming can be reversed if only humanity can be persuaded to reduce their use of such things as fossil fuels before it is too late. While anything that your scientists can do to improve the atmosphere on earth is desirable, it is already too late to reverse these changes.
“That is because the problem of global warming does not have its origin on the earth. It will be clear to those scientists who care to look, that the heating of the earth is the localized effect of an increase in energy that is affecting the entire solar system.
“Not only are higher temperatures being recorded on the earth, but on other planets as well. Even the sun itself is undergoing a profound change.
“The reason why the sun and the planets are undergoing these changes together, is because the area of space through which the entire solar system is now travelling has much higher levels of cosmic radiation than was the case during the Piscean age”.
As we will see in the next instalment, there is evidence that the Military-Industrial Complex certainly believes this to be the case, and that the true purpose of their global aerosol dispersal programme is to shield the earth from the increased cosmic radiation impacting the earth from space.
Allan, An Inconvenient Truth, May 21, 2017, 12:17 pm
Based on the evidence presented in Part One of this post, it should be clear to anyone who is prepared to analyse the data that the earth’s climate is changing. And it is not just changing in some parts of the world, but in ALL parts of the world. And not just on land, but in the sea as well.
Not only are extreme weather events being reported from all over the planet, but they are happening more and more often, and in more and more extreme forms. Statistical weather reports continue to break new historical records year after year.
So the inevitable question that follows is – what on earth is happening? What is the cause of all these extreme weather events? And why do they seem to be getting worse with every passing year? To pursue the answers to these questions, we need to go back to beginning of the 21st century.
The year 2000 witnessed the closest presidential election in United States history. The Republican candidate for president was George W. Bush, governor of Texas and the eldest son of the 41st President George H.W. Bush. The Democratic candidate was Al Gore.
Al Gore had served as Vice-President under President Bill Clinton from 1993 to 2001. At the end of Clinton’s second term in office, Gore was chosen as the Democratic nominee for the 2000 presidential election. It was a moment that was to define the rest of his life.
For instead of being elected as America’s 43rd president, Al Gore lost the election by a mere 537 votes, even though he polled more votes overall that George Bush. In fact it took a highly controversial 5 to 4 decision by the Supreme Court Justices to decide the presidency in Bush’s favour.
Although he could easily have been devastated by this narrow loss and chosen to leave public life altogether, Gore decided to throw his energies into something that had occupied his attention for the previous quarter of a century.
During his time in political office, Al Gore had always been interested in environmental affairs. In 1994, he launched GLOBE (the Global Learning and Observations to Benefit the Environment Program), which became a world-wide science and education program focusing on the environment.
He also strongly supported and help to negotiate the Kyoto Protocol. This was an international treaty that was adopted in Kyoto, Japan, on 11 December 1997, and which entered into force on 16 February, 2005. This became the forerunner to the current Paris Accord on climate change.
So when Al Gore left office in 2001, he decided to devote his time to making people aware of how the decisions that they made were affecting the world’s climate. He did this by means of an illustrated slide show aimed at alerting the public to the “planetary emergency” due to global warming.
The Movie that Changed the World
It so happened that one of the people who happened to see this slide show was the American environmental activist Laurie David. Laurie was so impressed with Gore’s presentation, that she helped to persuade documentary film director Davis Guggenheim to adapt it into a film.
The film was made and released under the title An Inconvenient Truth.
It opened in New York City and Los Angeles on May 24, 2006, and proved to be an immediate success, winning Oscars in 2006 for Best Documentary Feature as well as Best Original Song for Melissa Etheridge’s song “I Need to Wake Up“. It has so far grossed over $50 million in the U.S. and abroad.
Throughout the film, Gore discussed the views of various scientists about the causes of global warming. He also emphasized his view that the real challenge facing humanity was not so much the phenomenon itself, as it was a moral issue confronting every individual on the planet.
In fact he concluded the film with the following words:
“Each one of us is a cause of global warming, but each one of us can make choices to change that with the things we buy, the electricity we use, the cars we drive; we can make choices to bring our individual carbon emissions to zero.
“The solutions are in our hands, we just have to have the determination to make it happen. We have everything that we need to reduce carbon emissions, everything but political will. But in America, the will to act is a renewable resource”.
But although individual decisions could make a difference in the outcome, Gore claimed that unless people across the globe recognized the nature of the problem and changed their behaviour, the impact of global warming on the planet could be catastrophic.
The film included a variety of segments that graphically illustrated both the extent of the problems that existed, as well as the likely consequences if timely action was not taken. For example, it discussed the possibility of the collapse of a major ice sheet in Greenland or West Antarctica.
Not only would such a collapse raise global sea levels by up to twenty feet, but this would also inevitably flood low-lying coastal areas around the world, which could lead to political upheavals as millions of people were driven out of their homes by the rising sea water.
The critical issue facing the earth, Gore explained, was the amount of human-generated greenhouse gases. To emphasize this fact, he pointed to the fact that ice-cores drawn from the Antarctic showed Carbon Dioxide (CO2) levels were higher than at any time in the past 650,000 years.
It would not be an exaggeration to say that the film An Inconvenient Truth focused the attention of the public on the problem of global warming to an extent that had never been done before. It also galvanized nations around the world to redouble their efforts to counter this problem.
In that sense, Al Gore may be said to have had as signal an influence on the environmental movement as the American marine biologist Rachel Carson in the early 1960’s with the publication of her book Silent Spring. For his contribution Gore was selected as joint-winner of the Nobel Peace Prize in 2007.
But perhaps his biggest contribution has been his insistence that because it is our own behaviour that is to blame for global warming, it will not get better until we change the way we live our lives. And this is the position that has increasingly been adopted by the scientific community.
Types of Greenhouse Gases
In 2013, an Assessment Report issued by the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change (IPCC) concluded by saying:
“It is extremely likely that human influence has been the dominant cause of the observed warming since the mid-20th century”, and that “the largest human influence has been emission of greenhouse gases such as carbon dioxide, methane and nitrous oxide”.
The greenhouse gases that the scientists refer to above fall into four major categories. They are:
It is worth noting here that although the public perception is that it is the burning of fossil fuels that is the major cause of global warming, in actual fact water vapour accounts for as much as two-thirds of the greenhouse gases present in the earth’s atmosphere.
However, water vapour is considered to be the major contributor to the greenhouse effect because, although it has a short atmospheric lifetime, it is the presence of water vapour in the atmosphere that determines the amount of evaporation and precipitation.
What this means in practice is that the warmer the temperature, the more water vapour can be stored in the clouds. And the more water vapour there is in the clouds, the greater amount of precipitation subsequently falls to the earth.
Carbon Dioxide
As pointed out above, although Carbon Dioxide emissions are considered to be the primary cause of global warming, they only make up about a quarter of the greenhouse gases present in the atmosphere at any one time.
It should be noted here that Carbon Dioxide is part of the natural cycle of life. After all, we breathe in Oxygen and we breathe out Carbon Dioxide. Fortunately this is reversed with plant life, which breathe in Carbon Dioxide and breathe out Oxygen.
However, human beings also do things like manufacture products, drive cars, fly planes and so on. And in providing the energy to do these things, they burn fossil fuels such as coal (43% of total emissions), oil (34%) and gas (18%).
Scientists now report that atmospheric concentrations of Carbon Dioxide have increased by more than 40% since pre-industrial times. What this means is that levels have gone from 280 parts per million by volume (ppmv) in the 18th century, to over 400 ppmv today.
Methane
The amount of Methane in the earth’s atmosphere ranges from 4% to 9%. It is formed by both human and natural activities. For example, natural wetlands, agricultural activities, and the extraction of fossil fuels from the ground all emit Methane.
Scientists have noted that the amount of Methane in the earth’s atmosphere is greater now than at any time in the past 800,000 years, and that these concentrations have increased sharply during the course of the 20th century.
Ozone
The amount of Ozone in the earth’s atmosphere ranges from 3% to 7%. Although Ozone only has a short atmospheric lifetime, it is considered to be a potent greenhouse gas. This is because in addition to trapping heat, it is a pollutant that can cause health problems in people and damage to crops.
The Causes of Climate Change
As climatologists have pointed out, the temperature on the surface of the earth depends on a balance between the amount of energy entering the earth’s atmospheric system, and the amount of energy that is reflected back into space.
When incoming energy from the sun is absorbed by the earth, it warms up. When the sun’s energy is reflected back into space, it cools down. However it is important to note here the crucial role played by the atmospheric envelope that surrounds the earth.
If our atmosphere didn’t exist, we would experience a range of temperatures like a desert or the surface of the moon. The days would burn with heat, while the nights would freeze with cold. Without our atmosphere to protect us, the average temperature on the earth would be well below freezing.
The fact that life exists at all upon the earth depends upon a variety of factors that up until now have been successful in maintaining a balance from being too cold or too hot. But the geological history of the earth shows us that this balance is delicate, and can easily be disturbed.
So for example, we know from the fossil record that there have been times in earth’s history when changes in climate, such as during past ice-ages, led to the demise of many different species, and that climate change can dramatically reduce the chances of survival of those species that cannot adapt.
There are many factors, both natural and human, that can cause changes in the earth’s energy balance. The most significant of these are:
• Variations in the amount of energy emitted by the sun
• Changes in the reflectivity (Albedo) of the earth’s atmosphere and surface
• Changes in the amount of heat trapped in the earth’s atmosphere
Once it became apparent that the world was steadily getting hotter, scientists looked for something that would account for this phenomenon. And not surprisingly, they first suspected that this might be due to an increase in energy emanating from the sun.
Unfortunately, this turned out to be a blind alley. For although scientists have a variety of satellites which can accurately measure changes in the energy output of the sun, they have not found a correlation between the sun’s output and the increasing temperatures upon the earth.
In fact they have now completely ruled out the sun as being the major cause of climate change. That is because the amount of energy the earth receives from the sun has not increased over the last seven decades or so. If anything, records show that there has been a slight downward trend.
So they turned their attention to the earth’s Albedo. The Albedo (the Latin word for “whiteness”) of the earth is a measure of the amount of solar energy that is reflected off the earth’s surface back into space. The higher the Albedo, the more sunlight that is bounced off the earth back into space.
Reflectivity can be illustrated by the different ways people who live in hot places use to keep themselves cool. Buildings that are painted white reflect heat, while those that are black retain heat. Lightly coloured clothing helps keep people cool in summer, while dark colours make them feel hotter.
But here again the scientists were confounded. That is because while there have been definite changes in the reflectivity index for certain areas of the earth, such as the melting ice-caps at the poles, this change in Albedo is not great enough to account for the rising temperatures of the earth.
So scientists were forced to look elsewhere for an explanation. They have now done so, and the theory that they have come up with is one that has now been accepted by most of the countries of the world. It is the theory known as the “Greenhouse Effect”.
The Greenhouse Theory
Most people are familiar with the concept of a greenhouse. Usually made of glass or some other transparent material, a greenhouse is an enclosed structure that allows sunlight in, but does not allow the infrared rays to escape, thus causing the temperature inside the interior space to rise.
In a similar fashion, say the scientists, greenhouse gases generated on or inside the earth rise up in the atmosphere where they become trapped, thus creating a sort of umbrella-like effect which causes the temperature underneath this umbrella to rise, just like it does inside a greenhouse.
So according to this theory, the “Greenhouse Effect” is the process by which the absorption and emission of infrared radiation by gases in a planet’s atmosphere, causes the temperature on the surface of the planet to increase, as shown in the following diagram.
Credit Wikipedia
Since the time of the Industrial Revolution, which began around the year 1760, human activity has increased the amount of greenhouse gases in the atmosphere. Based on data taken from ice cores, the concentrations of Methane have increased by 36%, and Carbon Dioxide by 148%.
It has been estimated that burning of fossil fuels (coal, oil and gas) has accounted for three-quarters of the increase in Carbon Dioxide over the last twenty years, with the other quarter being the result of changes in land use, particularly deforestation.
And as reported by the WMO (World Meteorological Association) in 2016, monthly global concentrations of Carbon Dioxide recorded by NASA have now exceeded 400 ppm (parts per million) for the first time in millions of years, and fully half of this is trapped in the atmosphere.
In December 2015, all of this led representatives of 195 countries to conclude an agreement within the United Nations Convention on Climate Change, to set targets for controlling the emissions of greenhouse gases. Because this was signed in Paris, it has become known as the Paris Accord.
The Paris Accord
In terms of this agreement, each country that was a signatory was required to set a “Nationally Determined Contribution” towards reaching the goal of reducing overall greenhouse gas emissions around the world. This agreement went into effect on 4 November, 2016.
Unfortunately, there was one glaring exception. One country in particular has so far failed to ratify this agreement. That country is the United States, which is by far the greatest contributor to the problem, and accounts for a full quarter of all the greenhouse gases released into the atmosphere.
One of the biggest sceptics that greenhouse gases are the cause of climate change is Donald Trump. During his campaign for the presidency, he called climate change a hoax invented by the Chinese, and vowed that if he was elected President he would undo Obama’s climate action plan.
Since that time, Trump has said that he will definitely pull out of the Paris Accord, or that he might do this, or that he is still thinking about it, or that he might go along with some parts of it. But if his words have been confusing, his actions have left little doubt about what he really thinks.
In his Earth Day statement in April, Donald Trump failed to make any mention of the threat of climate change. In fact he issued an Executive Order seeking to suspend, rescind or review various Obama-era rules in an effort to boost domestic energy production in the form of fossil fuels.
Not only has Trump promised to bring back jobs in the coal industry, but he has recently approved oil drilling in the Arctic, despite the hazards which this would pose for the environment. Even his choice for head of the Environmental Protection Agency seemed to make no sense.
For in choosing Scott Pruitt to head the EPA, he picked a man who had sued that very agency 14 times while he was attorney general of the state of Oklahoma, arguing that it should be left to the industries themselves to decide what actions should best serve the needs of the environment.
The Inconvenient Truth
There are two things that should be obvious to everyone living on the planet today. The first is that the climate of the earth is changing, and the second is that more and more extreme weather events are happening around the world, and that they seem to be happening more and more often.
There is also almost unanimous agreement among those countries that have ratified the Paris Accord, that climate change and global warming are twin effects of a common cause, and that this cause is the increase in atmospheric greenhouse gases as a result of humans burning fossil fuels.
But although scientists are undoubtedly correct in their belief that greenhouse gases produced by humanity are indeed polluting the atmosphere and contributing to the greenhouse effect, they may also be victims of an inconvenient truth.
The suspicion is beginning to grow, even amongst those who were formerly staunch supporters of the greenhouse theory, that the generally accepted explanation of global warming provided by scientists may be nothing more than a cover story designed to disguise a deeper and darker truth.
They base their suspicions on evidence indicating that the U.S. military has been actively engaged in a clandestine campaign for more than a quarter of a century, in which they have released into the atmosphere toxins that are far more dangerous than any greenhouse gases.
And because they have continued to deny both the existence of such a campaign, as well as their involvement in it, this suggests that they are hiding the truth from us, and that the earth may well be facing a threat far greater than anything that we have previously been told.
For as we shall see from the following instalment, it is beginning to look as if the dangers facing humanity at this time are not so much the result of what we are doing ON the earth, but rather what is happening TO the earth, emanating from sources beyond the solar system.
Allan, An Inconvenient Truth, May 6, 2017, 12:40 pm
Some seven years ago I referred to the words of the renowned Kenyan paleoanthropologist Richard Leakey, a man who has devoted his life to the study of ancient fossils. Leakey had this to say about the environmental crisis facing the world at that time:
“If you look at the fossil record, the thing that strikes you is that extinction is the most common phenomena. Extinction is always driven by environmental change, and environmental change is always driven by climate change.”
He said that the key challenge of our times was not whether the cheetah or the elephant would survive, but whether the human race itself would survive. He based his remarks on a report issued in 2007 by the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change.
This report indicated that the previous year (2006) had seen the warmest spring in the United States since record keeping began in 1895. It went on to warn that our planet was approaching a critical tipping point because of climate change and other factors.
The report noted that the average U.S. temperature between March and May of 2006 was 5.2 degrees Fahrenheit higher than the long term average for the whole of the twentieth century.
What this meant, the report added, was that if these trends continued, then by the year 2070, the average temperature on the earth would be higher than it had been at any time since the human species evolved.
Now that seven years have elapsed since that report was published, it is important to know whether these trends have in fact continued. A detailed report issued recently by the World Meteorological Organization provides us with an answer.
The WMO (World Meteorological Organization) is the official voice of the United Nations on matters relating to Weather, Climate and Water, and its annual report highlights topics like temperatures, oceans, ice and snow cover, as well as what it calls “high-impact” events.
The WMO provisional report, published on November 14, 2016, begins with the following stark assessment:
“It is very likely that 2016 will be the hottest year on record, with global temperatures even higher than the record-breaking temperatures in 2015. Preliminary data shows that 2016’s global temperatures are approximately 1.2° Celsius above pre-industrial levels…”
As the report goes on to explain:
“Global temperatures for January to September 2016 have been about 0.88° Celsius (1.58°F) above the average (14°C) for the 1961-1990 reference period, which is used by WMO as a baseline.
“Temperatures spiked in the early months of the year because of the powerful El Niño event of 2015-16. Preliminary data for October indicate that they are at a sufficiently high level for 2016 to remain on track for the title of hottest year on record. This would mean that 16 of the 17 hottest years on record have been this century (1998 was the other one)”.
The key changes in climate can be summarised as follows:
• 2016 was the warmest year on record – 1.1 degrees Celsius above the pre-industrial period
• Average global surface temperatures of the sea reached record heights in 2016
• Average global sea levels rose to new heights in 2016
• Average global sea ice shrunk more than four million square kilometres below average in 2016
• Average global ocean heat was the second highest on record leading to extensive coral bleaching in tropical waters
• Average annual global carbon dioxide concentrations reached 400 parts per million (ppm) for the first time
Commenting on this report, Secretary-General of the WMO Petteri Taalas warned that the above changes were leading to significant increases in events like “once in generation” heat-waves and floods, as well as more damaging storm surges associated with tropical cyclones.
In particular, the report highlighted the following “high-impact” weather-related events that occurred during 2016:
• The most significant of these, in terms of casualties, was Hurricane “Matthew”, which struck the island of Haiti in October, 2016. In addition, it went on to cause significant damage in Cuba and the Bahamas, as well as major flooding in South Carolina.
• Typhoon “Lionrock” caused destructive flooding and heavy casualties in North Korea.
• Of the 78 tropical cyclones that occurred in 2016, cyclone “Winston” proved to be the most severe ever to hit the island of Fiji.
• Summer floods in the Yangtze basin in China killed 310 people and caused damage in excess of US$14 billion.
• Flooding and landslides in Sri Lanka left over 200 people dead or missing, and displaced several hundred thousand more.
• Above average seasonal rainfall in the Sahel region of Africa led to significant flooding in the Niger river basin.
The report went on to highlight numerous areas around the planet that experienced major heat-waves during 2016. In particular, it mentioned:
• The year began with an extreme heat-wave in Southern Africa, which added to the ongoing drought in the region. Many stations set all-time records, including 42.7ºC at Pretoria and 38.9ºC at Johannesburg.
• Other areas that set all-time records in 2016 were 44.6ºC in Thailand, 51.0ºC in India, 54.0ºC in Kuwait, 53.9ºC in Basra in Iraq, and 53.0ºC at Delhoran in Iran.
The most damaging wildfire in Canadian history occurred in May 2016, in the city of Fort McMurray in Alberta. The fire ultimately burned an area of about 590,000 hectares. It led to the mandatory evacuation of over 100,000 residents of the city and surrounding areas.
This fire also destroyed 2,400 buildings valued at US$3 billion in insured losses, as well as several billion more in associated losses, making it the third-largest recorded environmental disaster requiring evacuation.
It is clear from the foregoing that the fear expressed by Richard Leakey about the danger to humanity posed by climate change has increased over the past seven years, and that the world is now stumbling towards a disaster that threatens to decimate the population of the planet.
Already, the global population has reached seven and a half billion people. These are people who need to be fed, housed, educated and employed if peaceful progress is to continue, and our thin veneer of civilisation is to be maintained. But all of this is dependent on the weather.
Yet the world continues to get hotter year by year. And more and more countries are being assailed by more and more extreme climatic events, as can be seen from a brief summary of what has already occurred in the first four months of 2017.
The intense phenomenon in the central Pacific Ocean known as El Niño, that led to the five-year drought that ravaged the entire state of California, has dissipated, only to be replaced by a series of onshore storms that have flooded coastal communities throughout North and South America.
And the fire in Fort McMurray in May 2016 that led to the mandatory evacuation of 100,000 citizens, proved to be a mere forerunner to the calamitous events in February 2017, which led to the overnight evacuation of almost 200,000 people in northern California.
These events centred around Oroville Dam, located 75 miles north of the state capital of Sacramento. This dam is the tallest dam in the United States, rising 770 feet high. Prior to the onslaught of winter storms in 2017, the dam had been reduced to a trickle of water that could no longer supply the needs of the surrounding areas.
What happened was that over a period of several weeks, a series of winter storms caused the Oroville Dam to overflow for the first time in its fifty year history. In fact, on February 12, 2017, the reservoir was calculated to be at 151 percent capacity.
Fearful that that the dam’s emergency spillway could fail, and cause an onrush of water that would engulf entire communities situated below the dam, Governor Jerry Brown ordered the immediate evacuation of 188,000 residents in all of the nearby towns.
The fear was that the 30-foot-high concrete barrier at the top of the spillway would collapse, causing billions of gallons of water to swamp the Feather River below, flooding dozens of towns between Oroville and Sacramento and causing unparalleled property damage.
Mercifully, the torrential rains eased and the concrete barrier held, allowing residents to return to their homes that they had been forced to abandon in haste forty-eight hours earlier. The great California drought was finally broken, but at the risk of an even greater environmental disaster.
Meanwhile, wave after wave of storms have continued to lash the entire west coast of North America as far north as Alaska. While in Vancouver, Canada, the city had fifty-one days of rain during one two-month period, and spring flowers only blossomed in the middle of April, the latest in recent history.
And in Washington State, the city of Seattle received more rain in four months than their average precipitation for an entire year. And still the rain keeps coming, and shows little sign of stopping, as a seemingly never ending series of cold fronts continue to drench the region.
Further south, the precipitation at higher elevations has come in the form of record levels of snow. The Sierra Nevada mountains in California have experienced more snow over the last winter that in the four previous years combined, and snowdrifts have been found to exceed 22 feet in depth.
And although this might seem to offer a welcome relief from previous years of scorching drought, if the summer should happen to bring with it a sudden thaw, then vast areas might be devastated by the ensuing floods. But these conditions have not been limited to North America alone.
In South America, similar falls of torrential rain have led to widespread flooding and damage due to landslides, as entire hillsides have collapsed under the weight of the moisture, threatening the lives of those citizens living in low-lying areas.
For example in Peru in early March, overflowing rivers driven by relentless El Niño rains drowned 67 people, damaged 115,000 homes, collapsed 117 bridges and paralyzed countless roadways, to say nothing of the thousands more who were displaced from their inundated homes.
Even in the capital city of Lima, located in a desert region where it almost never rains, Police had to rescue hundreds of residents from flooded areas of the city, while in nearby Huachipa more than 65,000 people were unable to go to work or return to their homes.
In the neighbouring country of Columbia, an avalanche of mud and water from three overflowing rivers swept through the town of Mocoa while people slept, killing more than 190 residents and injuring many hundreds of others.
Extreme flooding continues to occur in other parts of the eastern United States and Canada, as well as parts of Europe, Israel, Africa, India, Australia and New Zealand. And then there is the phenomenon of global warming, which continues to gather pace with every succeeding year.
In April 2017, scientists conducting an aircraft survey of the Great Barrier Reef off the coast of Australia returned with sobering news. They reported that warm waters had severely bleached large swathes of coral reefs for the second year in a row.
In 2016, two-thirds of the coral in the northern sector of the reef died as a result of unusually warm waters. As Terry Hughes, Director of the ARC Centre at James Cook University in Queensland reported at the time: “I showed the results of aerial surveys to my students, and then we wept”.
Coral bleaching on the Great Barrier Reef
It now appears that about 1,500 kilometres of the reef have experienced severe bleaching over the last two years. In fact temperatures in the waters surrounding the reef have been so abnormally high, that if they continue scientists fear that the survival of the entire reef may be threatened.
Then on the other side of the world, scientists have discovered two more examples of changes that can be directly linked to climate change. The first was discovered in the Petermann Glacier in Northwest Greenland, and the second in the massive Kaskawulsh Glacier in the Yukon in Canada.
In the course of a series of low level flights over Greenland as part of a research campaign conducted by NASA, scientists were disturbed to find a newly-formed crack in the Petermann Glacier. This new crack indicated the potential for a large iceberg to break off the glacier.
And although large icebergs had broken off this glacier previously in 2010 and again in 2012, researcher Joe MacGregor said that another rift occurring so soon after two other major calving events “would be extremely unusual if not unprecedented”.
Another discovery that happened by chance, occurred when a group of scientists returned to the Slims river region in the Kluane National Park in the Yukon, to study changes in the flow of the river. What they found turned out to be unparalleled in the history of glacier research.
As Dan Shugar, a geoscientist at the University of Washington in Tacoma, reported in a study published in the journal Nature Geoscience: “This was the first event we could find where river piracy occurred right under our noses and due to contemporary climate change.”
What Shugar and his colleagues found was that a river that they had observed during their previous visit to the region, had mysteriously gone missing. As Jim Best, professor of geology and geography at the University of Illinois reported:
“Where there had been blue, shimmering shallow water, it was now exposed sediment, and it had dried out. The afternoon wind in that area was picking up that sediment and dust and was creating a huge dust storm.”
To their amazement the group discovered that the melt-water of a glacier that had previously flowed into the Slims river, had now carved a new 30-metre canyon through the glacier towards a lower elevation. And in the process of doing this, it had completely changed the flow of the river.
So whereas the melt-water from the glacier had previously flowed north into the Slims river and then the Bering Sea, a series of collapsed ice blocks had changed its path so that it now flowed south down the Kaskawulsh Valley toward the Gulf of Alaska and the Pacific Ocean.
Although this phenomenon of stream capture, or “river piracy”, is usually caused by a dramatic tectonic event such as an earthquake, landslide or glacial dam collapse, in this case it was clearly seen to be the result of climate change. As Dan Shugar concluded:
“Climate change is happening, is affecting us and it’s not just about far-off islands in the South Pacific. It’s not just about sea-level rise for them. The effects can be very rapid and can be somewhat unanticipated. Climate change may bring new changes that we’re not even really thinking about”.
Shugar is just one of an international body of scientists warning us that it is not just our way of life that is being threatened by global warming and its effects upon our climate, but our very existence itself.
In short, as Richard Leakey observed in his quotation at the beginning of this post, if the fossil record of past ages of the earth is any guide, the earth may soon be facing an extinction level event.
Allan, An Inconvenient Truth, April 23, 2017, 12:16 pm
This selected entry was originally published here on July 16, 2017
So where has this search for the truth about global warming and climate change led us? What started off as an investigation into the science of what was going on in the upper atmosphere of our planet, has taken us on a circuitous journey to secret bases deep below the surface of the earth.
And what began as an innocent enough enquiry into a phenomenon that has captured the attention of all the countries around the globe, has led us into a dark world of government secrecy and classified information that is shrouded in deception, disease and death.
This quest for understanding has taken us from international forums where the subject is widely discussed and openly debated, to hidden chambers where evidence is officially denied as a conspiratorial hoax, and whistleblowers who speak out do so at the risk of their lives.
Yet beneath all this talk of conspiracy and denial, one truth remains self evident. The facts speak for themselves, no matter how much political spin is applied. The threat is real, and the threat is now. The evidence is undeniable, and it keeps on mounting month by month.
Our climate is changing, and changing at a pace that is beyond the control of any government, whether national or international. Extreme weather events are occurring all around the planet, threatening the existence of every species, from fish and birds to human beings themselves.
The Apparent Truth
Faced with this threat, the scientists of the world have come together to try to speak with a single voice on this matter. According to the official NASA website on Global Climate Change there is a consensus among studies published in peer-reviewed scientific journals.
According to NASA, the conclusion of 97% of climate scientists who have actively published reports on this subject is that climate-warming trends over the past century are extremely likely to have been the result of human activity, which is what activists like Al Gore have been preaching for years.
The human activities they refer to are the burning of coal and gas to generate power, as well and the use of carbon-based products to fuel our cars and machinery. It is the burning of these products that create the greenhouse gases that form the atmospheric barrier that traps heat.
And because global warming is believed to be a problem that we ourselves have caused, there has been a growing movement within the international community that has culminated in the Paris Accord on climate change, in which 195 countries have agreed to reduce their use of carbon products.
But behind this apparent unanimity among scientists and nations that human beings are the cause of climate change, and are therefore directly responsible for solving the problem, there has been another sinister and secret campaign that is based on a totally different premise.
The Real Truth
That premise, which is also supported by scientific study, holds that changes in the climate of our planet, as well as the increasing heat on land and in the ocean, are the direct result of energies that are impacting the earth from sources beyond the solar system.
And based on this premise, secret agencies around the world have joined together to embark on a two-fold campaign. One part is designed to create an atmospheric shield around the planet to protect it from incoming radiation, and the other is to build underground and undersea shelters to save a select few from destruction.
The rationale behind the extreme secrecy surrounding this campaign is simple. If the truth about global warming is that the lives of all the people on the planet are at risk, then that truth can never be made public. As the whistleblower known as “Deep Shield” explained:
“Due to the severity of the situation it is mandatory to maintain public calm for as long as possible. The Earth is dying. Humanity is on the road to extinction – without the Shield mankind will die off within 20 to 50 years.
“Most people alive today could live to see this extinction take place. This means that an announcement of the situation we face boils down to telling every man, woman and child on earth that they have no future, they are going to be killed.
“People would panic. There would be economic collapse, the production and movement of goods would collapse. Millions would die in all cities on earth, riots and violence would reduce civilian centers to rubble within days.
“Half of the population in dense metropolitan areas would try to leave the cities seeking ‘safety’ in the rural areas thinking that they would be safe.
“Those left behind in the cities would be at war with their neighbors, fighting for the remaining supplies. We would be telling the world that the world is coming to an end, and even with the Shield the chances of survival are small”.(View Source)
Increasing Cosmic Radiation
So what is the real cause of this threat? The honest answer is that we still do not know. All we can say is that the earth, as well as the entire solar system, is being subjected to significantly increasing amounts of cosmic radiation, as can be seen in the following graph taken from Spaceweather.com
As the above graph clearly indicates, in the short space of two years from March 2015 to May 2017, the amount of cosmic radiation registered by high altitude balloons in the upper atmosphere above California has increased by 13%. The website goes on to say:
“Why are cosmic rays intensifying? The main reason is the sun. Solar storm clouds such as coronal mass ejections (CMEs) sweep aside cosmic rays when they pass by Earth. During Solar Maximum, CMEs are abundant and cosmic rays are held at bay.
“Now, however, the solar cycle is swinging toward Solar Minimum, allowing cosmic rays to return. Another reason could be the weakening of the Earth’s magnetic field, which helps protect us from deep-space radiation”.
As pointed out above, the main reason that cosmic rays are intensifying is the sun. This was also pointed out by Swiss and German scientists as far back as July 2004, according to a report that was published in the British newspaper The Telegraph.
This study was based on research led by Dr. Sami Solanki, director of the renowned Max Planck Institute for Solar System Research in Gottingen, Germany. The conclusion of their study was that the earth was getting hotter because the sun was brighter than at any time in the last 1,000 years.
Although Dr. Solanki indicated that he did not know what was causing the sun to burn brighter, or how long this cycle would last, he did say that he believed that the impact of this intense sunlight on the ozone layer could be affecting the climate more than the sunlight itself.
Ozone Layer
Dr. Solanki’s comment about the effect of this intense sunlight upon the ozone layer goes to the very heart of the problem that is affecting the earth at this time. The reason is because of the nature of the ozone layer, and the function it fulfills in our atmosphere.
The atmosphere of the earth is divided into several layers. The lowest layer, called the troposphere, extends from the surface of the earth to about six miles (10 kms) in altitude. The next layer, called the stratosphere, extends from there up to about thirty miles (50 kms) above the earth.
The ozone layer consists of ozone molecules that are suspended in the upper reaches of the stratosphere. Stratospheric ozone is a naturally occurring gas that helps to filter out ultraviolet (UV) radiation emanating from the sun. It has been called the earth’s sunscreen.
So if the ozone layer is diminished for any reason, as it is now, it allows more UV radiation to reach the earth’s surface. And it is this increased UV radiation that leads to skin cancer, cataracts and other health problems. It also disrupts marine life and reduces crop yields.
But ordinary people do not need scientific studies to tell them that something is seriously wrong with our sun. They can see and sense this as they go about their daily duties. They already know that sunlight feels hotter and that it is easier to get sunburned than before.
One of the easiest ways to find out what ordinary citizens think about the sun, is to scan the comments that can be seen below YouTube videos dealing with the subject of climate change. The following is a selection of what people around the world have been saying recently.
What YouTube Viewers Have to Say
“The Sun burns like the arc from a welder machine. Prickly hot on the skin. When you go outside it’s like living in an overexposed photograph is the only way I can explain it.
“We live in Camp Verde AZ – every year up to this year we have had an increasing number of fire ants in our yard. This year we have not seen even ONE ANT anywhere in the whole yard. Looking for them, we can’t find any. How can ants just not be there anymore? Are they all hiding under ground because of the deadly UV spikes? Are they all dead?
“All I know is that the UV intensity and whiteness of the sun is relatively new, and the climate, the weather, the air quality and other things were completely different when I was a kid, and I’ve lived in the same part of the country for more than sixty years. The changes are undeniable and I do not think it has all been caused by burning fossil fuels.
“I am 48 and I can say for a FACT!! I remember the sun being softer gold with yellow tones. You could look at it for a second. This bright white sun you can’t even glimpse at is not the sun I remember as a kid.
“I’m 43. You are right on about the Sun being white. It’s been like that a few years now. I been photographing the Sun for awhile now. Pictures show a white Sun.
“I’ve been telling my friends & family for at least 5-8 years now – our sunlight seems different. It feels different on my skin. I try to explain to them that it’s subtle, but it’s certainly different.
“When I’m out in the sun, the light hurts my skin in a different way than it ever has in my entire life — I’m now 45. I explain it as though it “feels hotter” — which is a poor description, I know. But it stings in a way that it never has before — a bit more intense, I suppose. It’s so very difficult to articulate… It just feels like the sunlight is more “intense”.
“What makes me say that is the effect that it has on my sensory nerves under my skin. Of course, most people say that I’m nuttier than usual, but I certainly can & I stand by my own claims that the sunlight is different than it’s been during the first 35-38 years of my life.
“I’m from Warren county in SW Ohio. I currently live in Dayton. For the past few years I have definitely felt the sun burning my skin faster than my entire life and it seems to only be getting worse. Crazy weather we’ve been having here in Ohio.
“Something must be up. I just got mild sunburn after 30 minutes outdoors yesterday. This is Winter (Tasmania, Australia). A passer by commented to me that the Sun was too bright, too hot, and much bigger for Winter…and it was not as low on the horizon.
“Notice how the sun doesn’t have a yellow hue any more, bright white!!
“No offense sincerely, but I remember a yellow hued sun growing up. I loved to watch clouds and the sun felt warm – not burning little water blisters on my forearms. Something has affected our star.
“94º today in PA. Something definitely has been going on with the sun for years now. It doesn’t seem so hot out until you get into sunlight. Then it feels like you are being micro-waved. Strange.
“I’m sensitive to the sun. It’s definitely hotter and more intense. I can’t even go out for a minute now without getting really red.
“My dear grandson got a terrible burn today here in Maryland, even though he was covered in sun-block.
“Yes, for we who knew the benign golden Sun, it’s really sad. I can hardly see to drive when the road glares so much under this light. Maybe I need welder’s goggles, it seems to burn and leave after images. You see everybody squinting some days.
“The sun was yellow and sky blue. It was called the golden sun. Remember the children’s song: Mister sun, Mister sun, Mister golden sun, please shine down on me. The sky was also much bluer then.
“Another older guy to testify that the sun used to be yellow. It was possible to look directly at the sun for up to about ten seconds and this was intense but felt purifying. Now the sun’s so bright you’d go blind.
“Adding to an old post. Yes, I’m 57. The sun used to be yellow. As a young (and dumb) kid I used to stare into the sun to see how long I could look at it. It was yellow. The sun used to rise and set in yellow, orange, & red with the red being the color when it was closest to the horizon. Today, it is simply white and almost unbearable to the eyes.
“I think what happened is the ozone just left us, I remember it being yellow. We as kids during the 80s colored in a “Yellow sun” I noticed this shift in 2002 / 2004. Suddenly it was just this crazy white and it gets whiter every year.
The above comments made by ordinary people may seem rambling and mundane, but they go to the essence of the changes that are taking place on the sun. In fact they have unwittingly realised the true cause of global warming and the effect this is having upon the surface of the earth.
The key to understanding global warming is simply this. The earth is getting hotter because the sun is getting hotter. And the hotter the sun gets, the whiter it gets.
The changes that these viewers have described have so far eluded all those climatologists who subscribe to the greenhouse gases explanation of global warming. The truth is that climate change is not the result of people burning fossil fuels. It is because the sun itself has changed.
The Conventional Theory of the Sun
Conventional climatologists suffer from one basic defect which prevents them from understanding the true causes of the changes that are taking place on this planet, and that is their understanding (or should I say “misunderstanding”) of the nature and function of our sun.
All the leading colleges and universities around the world teach a single theory about the origin and nature of the sun, and any student who hopes to graduate and go on to enjoy a career in science is obliged to accept this theory as proven fact.
The conventional view of science is that our sun is a circular star which lies at the centre of our solar system. This star is considered to be roughly 865,000 miles (1,393,000 kilometres) in diameter, with a mass of about 330,000 times the mass of the earth.
As a result of spectrographic analysis, three-quarters of this mass has been found to consist of hydrogen, while the rest of it is made up mostly of helium. Small amounts of heavier elements such as oxygen, carbon, neon and iron have also been found.
Our sun is thought to have formed about four and a half billion years ago, and is considered to have been the result of the gravitational collapse of a large molecular cloud, and it is this cloud that ultimately became the sun with its orbiting planets.
Being at the centre of this gravitational collapse, our sun became increasingly hot and dense until it reached a point when thermonuclear fusion spontaneously occurred. It is this process of nuclear fusion, by converting hydrogen nuclei into helium, that produces its heat and light.
Charles Bruce
All remained well in this neatly organized world of accepted theory until a Scottish astrophysicist by the name of Charles Bruce arrived on the scene. In 1944, Bruce, who was an electrical researcher, astronomer, and expert on the effects of lightning, made an unusual discovery.
He found that the surface of the sun had the same appearance, temperature and spectral analysis as an electric arc. He then went on to make a bold proposition. The sun looked like an electric arc, he said, and had the same characteristics as an electrical arc, because it was an electric arc.
So what Charles Bruce theorised was that the sun was not a nuclear furnace after all. It was in fact an electrical body made up of a large number of arcs in parallel with one another. He explained that our sun, as well as every other star, was actually a sophisticated, though complex, electric light bulb.
Bruce’s idea that the source of the sun’s heat and light was the result of electromagnetic rather than thermonuclear interactions, was laughed at by all the scientific authorities of his time, just as it continues to be rejected to this day.
There was, however, one small problem, and that was that the old theory was devised by scientists before the advent of the space age. And once it became possible to send scientific probes into space to study the properties of the sun, it was clear that the accepted theory of the sun was in trouble.
The problem was that this elegant mathematical theory that had been held so fervently by so many people for so many years, was just not supported by the facts. The evidence proved that every aspect of the existing theory was wrong. In fact, it was so obvious that even a child could see it.
Ralph Juergens
The deficiencies of the traditional theory were exposed some years later when an American civil engineer named Ralph Juergens wrote an article in which he demolished the long accepted theory of the sun. In an unequivocal assessment of the situation, Juergens wrote:
“I can find no way to state this diplomatically, so let me be blunt. The modern astrophysical concept that ascribes the Sun’s energy to thermonuclear reactions deep in the solar interior is contradicted by nearly every observable aspect of the Sun.”
What incensed Juergens at the time was not only that the accepted theory of the sun as a thermonuclear reactor was unable to explain the observed features of the sun, but that the scientists who held so firmly to this theory blithely ignored these features.
The fundamental problem with the existing theory was this. If the sun truly was a nuclear reactor, converting hydrogen atoms into helium through a process of thermonuclear fusion, then there should be a simple temperature gradient between the inner and outer heat of the sun.
In other words, the sun should be hottest at its centre. And the further away one went from the surface of the sun, the cooler it should become. The problem was that the actual temperature readings on which all astrophysicists agreed showed the exact opposite.
The temperature at the surface of the sun is roughly 4,400 degrees Kelvin (7,460ºF). But about four times further away, it rises steadily to about 20,000ºK (35,540ºF) . From there the temperature jumps abruptly to two million degrees Kelvin (3,554,000ºF) in the Corona.
Based on this new data provided by space probes which was the opposite of what the traditional theory predicted, Juergens not only exposed the shortcomings of existing theory, but he went on to propose an entirely new theory of the sun that was founded on electromagnetism.
According to Juergens, the source of the energy that powers the sun comes from space beyond the sun, and this energy is electrical in nature. The sun is therefore the focus of a “coronal glow discharge” that is fed by electric currents coursing throughout the galaxy.
As he wrote in 1972, some years before his death in 1979, in an article entitled Reconciling Celestial Mechanics and Velikovskian Catastrophism:
“The known characteristics of the interplanetary medium suggest not only that the sun and the planets are electrically charged, but that the sun itself is the focus of a cosmic electric discharge – the probable source of all its radiant energy“.(See Electric Sun)
As he went on to clarify, “The sun is electrically powered – the source of the sun’s energy is coming from electric currents in galactic space.” (See Electric Comet)
Today, Juergen’s ideas have been amplified and refined by a growing body of scientists who have aligned themselves with the Thunderbolts Group. They believe that we live in an “Electric Universe”, and that electromagnetism is the fundamental source of all created life.
The Electric Sun
What ordinary people have now come to realise is that our sun has changed. It has become hotter and it has become “whiter”. And as the evidence quoted earlier shows, the earth is being impacted by ever increasing amounts of harmful UV radiation emanating from the sun.
Nevertheless, the key contribution that Juergens has made to this discussion is the idea that the sun is electrically powered, that the brightness of the sun is dependent upon its “coronal glow discharge”, and that this in turn is fed by electric currents coursing throughout the galaxy.
So the reason why the sun now appears hotter and “whiter” is because the area through which the solar system is now travelling is being exposed to more intense radiation, which has changed the sun’s electromagnetic field, and therefore its “coronal glow discharge”.
And as Charles Bruce noted earlier, just like an arc welder’s torch changes colour with the intensity of the current and glows “whiter” as it gets hotter, so changes to the “coronal glow discharge” of the sun are causing it to feel hotter and look “whiter” when we experience it on the earth.
So what common people everywhere are reporting is evidence that these changes to the sun are having devastating effects upon the earth, as evidence mounts of more and more species being harmed by the increasing levels of lethal UVB and UVC radiation.
The “inconvenient” truth about climate change is that the earth is dying. It is losing its ability to support life. Insects are dying. Trees and plants are dying. Birds and animals are dying. How long before our agriculture and crop yields are seriously affected? How much time do we ourselves have left?
This truth is inescapable. It is no longer something that we can merely shrug off as inconsequential. Not only is it a truth that none of us can avoid, but it is one that every one of us must come to terms with as we make the day-to-day decisions about the future conduct of our lives.
Unfortunately, the reality is that very few people today are equipped to handle the devastating truth that the world as we know it is coming to an end. They simply cannot bring themselves to believe that the entire human species could be threatened with extinction.
Yet the evidence is there for all to see. And it is growing more and more evident with every passing year. We are reminded of the movie A Few Good Men, in which the actor Jack Nicholson uttered that memorable line, “You can’t handle the truth!”.
Peace, goodness, happiness and virtue are not objectives that can be achieved by the action of desire. While we may certainly desire happiness and peace, such blessings can never be won by motivated action. They blossom of their own accord when the conditions are appropriate.
These conditions have always been non-interference and non-resistance. As Maharaj has said, “They manifest spontaneously and effortlessly, when things are left to themselves, and are not interfered with, not shunned or wanted or conceptualised, but just experienced in full awareness.”35
It is not by seeking the objectives of peace and harmony through outward action that these can be won, but by the transformation of the inner being, which is the source from which the entire manifested world projects.
The images and events of this world are projections upon our screen of consciousness. If we do not like the pictures that we see projected in consciousness, the answer is to change the contents of the mind that is doing the projecting.
When we look at cinematic images, we may be outraged at the violence and horror that we see portrayed upon the screen. Yet we recognise that these projections are simply part of the film itself. If we do not like these projections, the solution is to change the film, and not to attack the screen on which these images are projected.
It is the person who renounces the desire to help the world who does the most to improve it. He or she is the truly charitable person.
“Find yourself first,” says the Maharshi, “and endless blessings will follow. Nothing profits the world as much as the abandoning of profits. A man who no longer thinks in terms of loss or gain is the truly non-violent man, for he is beyond all conflict.”36
“Be free first of suffering yourself and then only hope of helping others. You do not even need to hope – your very existence will be the greatest help a man can give his fellowmen.”37
We imagine that results can only follow from direct action, and that cruelties, violence and war must be attacked by resolute action if peace and harmony are to be achieved. Likewise, we strive for goodness by helping others. We fail to see that we are linked individually to the entire universe.
Every action on our part has its counterpart in the universe we see around us. When we reform ourselves, the world itself becomes reformed, whether we are conscious of it or not. This is the true process of reform.
“There are people in the world”, notes Maharaj, “who do more good than all the statesmen and philanthropists put together. They radiate light and peace with no intention or knowledge. When others tell them about the miracles they worked, they also are wonderstruck. Yet taking nothing as their own, they are neither proud nor do they crave for reputation. They are just unable to desire anything for themselves, not even the joy of helping others. They know that God is good and are at peace.”38
The presence of enlightened souls transforms the lives of all those with whom they come in contact, not because of any inherent desire to do so, but through the resplendent nature of their Being. Just as shadows are banished by the light of the sun, so do the stains of the mind vanish in the presence of this Transcendent Reality.
When Confucius expressed the wish to live among some degenerate tribes, his followers remonstrated with him. “What about their crudeness?” they exclaimed. The Chinese Sage replied: “If Great Man were living among them, how could they be crude? His very presence would alter all that.”39
The true message of reform has been passed from generation to generation. Those whowould achieve social reform must first submit to self-reform. And in every generation this advice is spurned. For self-reform is a painful process. The soul is torn upon the rack of suffering before it can win its crown of peace and experience the soaring joy of redemption.
Far better say we, and quicker too, to strive for temporal power, and then use that power to compel others to reform. Throughout long centuries of travail, men and women have selected this path of folly. The banner of ignorance flies today from all the standards of the world.
Despite the evidence of sorrow and despair which these attempts have wrought in every age, we remain locked in the conviction that we can succeed where others have failed. We tie the noose ever more tightly around our necks and cry out in anguish when it strangles us.
Will the world be saved or will it slide into oblivion? The choice does not rest with governments or Kings. It remains where it has always been, with us as individuals. We do not need to hold high office to initiate change. When Confucius was asked why he didn’t work in the government, he responded:
“It is said in The Writings of Old, ‘Filial duty! Just let there be filial duty. Then there will be kindness toward brothers, and this in turn will spread to the administration.’ This too is to be working in the government. Why must one actually hold office in order to work in the government?”40
It is the individual actions of our daily lives that combine to make up the conditions of the universe. If we truly wish to work for benevolent change, we need to deal with those images that we alone are responsible for creating. When our hearts are changed, they will spread their healing to the farthest reaches of the cosmos, whether we intend this or not. For as Maharaj has remarked:
“When more people come to know their real nature, their influence, however subtle, will prevail, and the world’s emotional atmosphere will sweeten up. People follow their leaders and when among the leaders appear some, great in heart and mind and absolutely free from self-seeking, their impact will be enough to make the crudities of the present age impossible.”41
We believe that we are powerless to influence the vast arena of this world. The world’s problems appear so numerous and oppressive, that we wonder what we, as mere individuals, can do to overcome them. Yet we fail to reckon with the power of a transformed heart.
The people who actively transform this world for the better do not sit in Parliaments, Congresses or on thrones. They are the unheralded individuals in every land who have devoted their lives to rediscovering the True Source of their own beings. It is in the triumph of their inner revelation that the world will be renewed again, as it has been in ages past.
These new leaders of reformation are not daunted by the problems that now confront us. They are not deterred by statistics. If the light of one small candle can hold back the night, then the radiance of a single transformed soul can serve to banish the encroaching gloom.
On the outskirts of the Mexican City of Juarez, a large site was set aside where garbage collected from the city could be dumped. It was to this mountain of refuse that groups of impoverished peasants were drawn, in the hope of finding sufficient food and materials with which they might be able to sustain themselves.
In due course a large community became established at the edges of the dump. These destitute people built shacks of cardboard and odd pieces of metal that they found at the dump. They fed themselves and their families from the scraps of rotting food that had been taken from the dump.
As a way of earning a living, the men of this community gathered at the dump in order to sift through the daily piles of incoming garbage. By retrieving odd bottles, cans and cardboard boxes from the dump, and selling them back to the local Co-op, they were able to buy a few provisions to supplement their pitiful existence.
These labourers worked from daybreak to dusk to garner their meagre spoil. Day followed day in grinding weariness, without respite from the appalling filth. There was no running water. Disease stalked the entire community. Those few who could afford to do so, lived out their days in a blur of alcohol.
Deprived of adequate nutrition, the young suffered extensive brain damage, growing up painfully to face hopeless lives. The dump site outside the city of Juarez was a spectre of Dante’s inferno, home to some of the most horrifying and intractable problems of this planet.
It was to this miserable place that Father Rick Thomas, a Jesuit priest from the neighbouring city of El Paso, Texas, came with a few of his parishioners on Christmas morning, 1972, to share a frugal meal. That meal (as detailed in an earlier chapter), became the occasion for a miraculous regeneration of food, allowing all who were present that day to eat in abundance.
Father Thomas, along with a Daughter of Charity, Sister Mary Virginia, were drawn to the plight of these dump people. Together with a few Catholic parishioners from the communities of El Paso and Juarez, they arranged to visit the dump on a regular basis, talking to the men and women, and sharing with them the gospel message of hope in the midst of hopelessness.
In order to assist these “poorest of the poor”, parishioners sold various items of their household possessions, so that they could raise money and buy a few provisions to take with them to the dump. As Father Thomas remarked, “It is no good telling them of the good news if you are the bad news!”
At first the stench of rotting food, the ever-present flies and the sordid conditions seemed overwhelming. Yet as they persisted, the parishioners found that they were able to transcend these outward conditions, until they were hardly conscious of the surrounding squalor.
Father Thomas met with the men and women of the community and taught them how to pray. Seeing the chronic condition of the ill-nourished children, he prayed with the mothers that their children might be cured of their various physical deficiencies.
Another miraculous event took place shortly afterwards, in which the children were to be seen drawing pictures in the dust. It was a clear sign to Father Thomas that they had been healed of their former brain damage.
Not long after Father Thomas and his parishioners had begun to minister to this community, the local Tax Collector from the city of Juarez, Sergio Conde, got wind of the fact that people were buying and selling provisions at the dump without paying tax. Together with two of his agents, he travelled to the dump one day to crush this incipient commerce.
His intention was to seize the goods and to arrest those who were in violation of the law. During a brief discussion with some of these afflicted people, however, Conde experienced a sudden change of heart. Not only did he overlook the question of the unpaid taxes, but he also returned the goods which his agents had confiscated.
Conde was deeply moved by what he saw that day and underwent a dramatic transformation in character. Inspired by this change of heart, he thereafter chose to spend every Saturday with the people of the dump, and soon assumed control of the operation of the community store.
Describing his amazing conversion, Conde confessed: “God moved my heart to compassion. If it had been any other way, I would not have changed. He changed all my values. He changed my thinking, my interest in money and power. And now I’ve felt a great change in me, a great joy in me, that has been with me for many years now.”
Through the operation of what was called The Lord’s Food Bank, Father Thomas was able to oversee the distribution of food twice a week to about eight hundred and fifty families. Following morning Mass he arranged for able-bodied men and women to move through the community doing whatever useful work they could.
Having performed this voluntary service they would then line up to receive their rations of food. Although there were numerous occasions on which the supplies of food brought by Father Thomas and his helpers were insufficient for the number of families that were present, the food mysteriously multiplied, as it had done on that Christmas morning, so that none were turned away empty-handed.
As Father Thomas remarked, “The Lord is the true underwriter of His Food Bank.” In addition to the Food Bank and the community store, Father Thomas arranged for general storehouses to be built, on land that was donated for this purpose by the Mexican government. These storehouses held provisions for the entire community and were operated by selected families from the dump.
A local Co-operative was also formed, so that the people could become responsible for their own needs. Members of the dump were organized into various self-help groups who worked to assist others in the community. An Employment Agency was started to help people of the dump find work in the city of Juarez, and a Credit Union was formed to safeguard their financial interests.
In due course, a five-hundred-acre ranch was donated to the Church in the state of New Mexico. Christened “The Lord’s Ranch”, this farm not only produced a variety of foodstuffs, but it also served as a recreation and training centre for the young people who operated it.
The entire production of this ranch was distributed free to the poor people of Juarez. Under the guidance of Sister Mary Virginia, dairy products were produced which provided crucial protein for the pregnant mothers of the dump.
By 1980, the dump people of the city of Juarez had become a revitalised community. Not only were they healthier as a result of their regular and improved nutrition, but they possessed a dynamic sense of control and involvement in their own destiny. They enjoyed a spirit of communal sharing which enriched them all.
Underlying these material benefits was an abiding sense of faith and spiritual strength, generating hope and confidence in place of their former hopelessness. They had now become vigorous, enthusiastic and productive, whereas their lives had formerly languished in misery.
They had seen the sick and the deformed miraculously healed, the hungry fed, and broken lives rebuilt by faith. The rejuvenation of the dump people of Juarez was an example of true reformation of body, mind and soul.
This amazing transformation, from conditions that were as daunting as any which exist on earth today, was not achieved by means of any United Nations project or any government plan. No grants-in-aid were set aside, no battery of experts assigned to take care of their abundant needs.
Had the social plight of the dump people of Juarez been tackled in the usual manner of well-meaning reformers, representations would no doubt have been made to the Mexican authorities, pointing out the abhorrent and inhuman conditions that existed within their boundaries.
Petitions would have been drafted, speeches made, marches held, under the full glare of television. Various public demonstrations would have been held in many parts of the world. Boycotts would have been organised against Mexican products, as a means of demonstrating affirmative action and solidarity with the oppressed people of Juarez.
Documentaries would have been made to satisfy the public thirst for horror. Funds would have been solicited, committees struck, bureaucrats involved. Had such a path been followed, there is little doubt that the people of the Juarez dump would still be languishing in extreme poverty today, with the majority of funds collected siphoned off though corruption and intrigue.
The tragic plight of these peasants would even have increased, as they became targets of publicity and made to see their utter dependence on the handouts of others. The well-meaning actions of thousands would have consigned these people to an invidious fate.
In place of this concatenation of disasters, there were no petitions, speeches, marches, boycotts or vindictive campaigns on behalf of the people of the dump. Instead, two inconspicuous people, Father Rick Thomas and Sister Mary Virginia, chose to join these people in their misery, and convey to them a message of hope and love with which they could control and transform their own lives.
They were two dedicated people. Yet unlike the thousands of similar people who labour ineffectively in parishes around the world, they were not dedicated to helping the people of Juarez. They were dedicated instead to the teachings of the Christ. They did not enter Juarez in a fit of exuberant enthusiasm, anxious to put misery to the sword.
Unlike hordes of well-intentioned philanthropists who parade under the guise of helpers, Father Thomas and Sister Mary Virginia did not set out to try and help the people of Juarez. Their motive was simply to utilise an opportunity to grow in love, leaving the results to the natural outcome of that love.
The force of this love, that same force which animated Mahatma Gandhi, then proceeded to transform the lives of those with whom it came in contact, by the effulgent power of its radiance. Father Thomas and Sister Mary Virginia did not try to change the dump-people. They did not attempt to resist the evil they saw around them.
They merely responded to each challenge by drawing upon that reservoir of love within their own beings. In their humble dedication to the words of Jesus, and through their total dedication to His will, they were able to infuse the lives of those around them with energy, joy and peace.
Father Rick Thomas and Sister Mary Virginia are the true peacemakers of this world. If the Nobel Prize for peace is ever again to be awarded to the true bearers of the olive, then it would gain more honour in their names than a score of statesmen and philanthropists.
They are among the few on earth who are tackling the problems of exploitation, disease and want at their root. They are heralds of lasting regeneration, and the true reformers of mankind.
Father Thomas and Sister Mary Virginia achieved their success through the prism of Christianity. Many would claim in this the natural superiority of Christianity and the exclusivity of its hold on Truth. Sadly, in every triumph of faith there always seem to be those who wish to turn this into an opportunity to divide humanity.
The true source of love that nourishes Christianity flows equally through all the religions of this world. Yet it is not confined to them. The fruits of regeneration are available freely to any man or woman who approaches the centre of their being by whatever method they care to adopt.
Throughout history the Sages have borne testimony to the common experience of Transcendental Awareness that lies at the heart of life. While this source is inexpressible in its nature, it can nevertheless be approached by a thousand different paths. Just as the spokes of a wheel all focus on the centre, and meet in the emptiness of a common hub, so all the religious paths which mankind have adopted, lead inevitably to a single source.
That source is the Supreme Reality that underlies and animates all forms. As Lord Krishna taught his disciple Arjuna in the Bhagavad Gita:“However men approach me, in that same way do I show them my favour; my path men follow in all ways, 0 son of Pritha.” (Chapter 4:11) 42
This same truth is conveyed by Nisargadatta Maharaj. “Christianity is one way of putting words together and Hinduism is another. The real is, behind and beyond words, incommunicable, directly experienced, explosive in its effect on the mind.”43
The source of the power that is capable of re-forming the world lies ever present in each one of us. It is freely available to all who seek it. Any person who has discovered the way to tap its bountiful spring will acquire the power, as Paramahansa Yogananda has pointed out, “to reform thousands.”
The price of this attainment is personal self-sacrifice. It is a price that the comfortable philanthropists and politicians of this world do not care to pay. Yet those who choose to submit find it a small burden for the extravagant blessings it confers. They draw on the power of its Resplendent Silence, which is able to transform all dreams.
Being without motive and acting without personal desire or the hope for any reward, they simply work for the welfare of all life. In so doing, they prove that they are the true reformers of this world.
References:
35 “I Am That”, Conversations with Sri Nisargadatta Maharaj, translated by Maurice Frydman, Book I, Chetana, Bombay, 1973, p. 16.
36 Ibid, Book I, pp. 167-168.
37 Ibid, Book II, p. 22.
38 Ibid, Book II, p. 142.
39“The Sayings of Confucius”, op.cit., p. 62.
40 Ibid, p. 28.
41“I Am That”, Book II, op.cit., p. 21.
42“The Bhagavad Gita”, translated by W. D. P. Hill, Oxford University Press, London, 1928, p. 104.
43“I Am That”, Book II, op.cit., p. 285.
Allan, The Noose Around Our Necks, February 13, 2017, 1:07 pm
The reason why resistance to evil fails to overcome evil, but merely entrenches it, is because it seeks to impose change from without. People cannot be compelled to change their nature. They can, however, be impelled to do so, when they have come to see the error of their ways.
The idea that the world would somehow be a safer place without nuclear weapons remains a fallacy as long as people harbour destructive thoughts within their minds. To attack individuals, nations, and governments for the weapons they possess, is to set in train a process which inevitably leads to the utilisation of those weapons.
Peace can never be won by force. Peace is not simply the absence of war, or a state of suspended hostilities. It is a condition of active harmony resident in the human heart. The way to achieve outer peace is to cultivate inner harmony, by removing those thoughts and desires that are the true source of discord.
Those who truly wish to work for peace serve it best by attending to the pacification of their unruly hearts and minds.
Yet modern humanity has little appetite for these lofty admonitions. When the full horror and extent of evil, depravity and violence assault us daily we feel it is futile to talk of individual minds. For what is one individual able to accomplish in the face of so much evil?
The knowledge that outer salvation is the result of inner transformation may be welcome news, but we have no patience with such strategy. We invariably look for massive solutions to counter massive problems. Instinctively, we look to governments and powerful leaders to impose solutions.
We fail to recognise that solutions imposed can never resolve human problems. The overall global condition is the outward manifestation of the inner state of all of its individuals. If there is ever to be a return to peaceful co-existence, it can only be the result of inner harmony within the hearts of every individual. There is no other way.
As Maharaj advises, “First of all you must attend to the way you feel, think and live. Unless there is order in yourself there can be no order in the world.”15
He goes on to add, “Everybody makes the same mistake, refusing the means, but wanting the ends. You want peace and harmony in the world but refuse to have them in yourself.”16
The Sages speak unanimously to this need. We simply cannot reform our world until we are prepared to reform ourselves. For until we do so we merely broadcast our iniquities and launch them upon the universe. We are like the violinist who complains of a discordant orchestra, but who refuses to tune his own violin which is contributing to the noise.
Yet the power of a transformed mind is enormous. It inevitably brings social reform in its train. As Ramana Maharshi has remarked, “Self-reform automatically brings about social reform. Confine yourself to self-reform. Social reform will take care of itself.” 17
According to Paramahansa Yogananda, “Utopia must spring in the private bosom before it can flower in civic virtue, inner reforms leading naturally to outer ones. A man who has reformed himself will reform thousands.”18
Until a person has achieved this inner reformation, however, any outward effort must inevitably add to the world’s burden of sorrow.
Our difficulty lies in the fact that we have become conditioned into thinking that we live in an objective world as revealed by our senses, and that the outward circumstances of the universe bear no relation to such ephemeral things as thoughts and emotions.
Because we fail to find a link between the one and the other, we believe that the execution of outward change must necessarily rest upon the foundation of temporal power.
Almost without exception, those people who are striving to improve the world today do so from a platform of political or military power. Inevitably, great competition exists to obtain power, and having acquired it, to hold on to it. It remains our fervent belief that it is only through the exercise of power that we will be able to influence circumstances for the better.
Those who exercise power consistently fail in their endeavours. Having failed to reform themselves first, they are doomed in their efforts to reform the world, however noble their aspirations. Peace, happiness and harmony can never be the result of a political system, however exalted its principles, if it is practised by those who would impose their ideas on others or use the power of their office to do so.
We continue to be lured by the glamour of reform. We remain convinced that everything can be changed for the better in life, if those who are responsible for the problems of the world can only be persuaded to change their behaviour in ways which conform to our own ideas. Unfortunately, our efforts merely conspire to make things worse.
We might use as an example the question of abortion. There are many millions of people in the world today who are convinced that the practice of abortion is wrong, and that the presence of this practice in society is an evil that contributes to the sorry condition of our planet.
Many base their views on the conviction that abortion is a crime of violence against the unborn child, and that as such it is a direct contravention of the divine commandment not to kill. Buttressed by their beliefs, these advocates of the right to life feel compelled to do whatever they can to rid the world of this sin.
Unfortunately, these self-appointed apostles of righteousness find themselves confronted by an equally militant group of people who hold an opposing point of view. To these people, the denial of their basic right to govern their lives according to the dictates of their conscience, is regarded as a flagrant attack on their inherent freedom.
This is something that they insist needs to be resisted with the utmost vehemence if the very tenets of democracy are to be sustained. Here we see the classic confrontation that is such a pervading feature of the modern world.
The sad fact is that neither party serves the cause of justice, peace or truth. Both groups merely contribute to a heightened state of conflict by actively resisting the actions of the other. By seeking to compel their adversaries to submit, they march resolutely along the road of violence that leads only to the valley of desolation.
The very nature of their conflict is bound to spawn violence and subject society to greater tribulation. The unfortunate fact is that there can be no moral virtue in either point of view. It matters not whether we claim to speak from the Throne of God. The moment we seek to impose our views on others, we ourselves become the perpetrators of evil.
The truth is that the sins that we see manifest in the behaviour of others, are the sins that we ourselves have projected upon them. It is our own racism, prejudice and ignorance that we see reflected in the behaviour of others.
The pro-life crusaders march with slogans written in human blood. Their reforming zeal is a direct reflection of those stains that exist in their own minds. It is not the behaviour of others that is a threat to society or to peace, but the ugliness and ignorance of our own minds.
“You cannot change the image,” says Maharaj, “without changing the face. First realize that your world is but a reflection of yourself and stop finding fault with the reflection. Attend to yourself, set yourself right – mentally and emotionally. The physical will follow automatically. You talk so much of reforms: economic, social, political. Leave alone the reforms and mind the reformer. What kind of world can a man create who is stupid, greedy, heartless?” 19
The world is full of “righteous” people who claim to see clearly the faults of others, and who devote their earnest efforts towards pressurizing them to change. For these people, borne aloft on a fever of enthusiasm, any tactics or strategies are considered to be justified so long as their primary motives are held to be pure.
When the very methods adopted serve to promote conflict, there is no motive that can be called pure. Their efforts must inevitably reap a harvest of violence, suffering and sorrow. This is particularly evident today among those who claim to fight discrimination, whether it be by race or creed or sex.
In their desire both to signify their revulsion for this evil, and to punish those who practise discrimination, they join marches, sign petitions, organise boycotts and contribute money and other resources, in order to bring this discrimination to an end. They sincerely believe their motives to be laudable and their efforts to be justified by their call of conscience.
They remain mired in ignorance and their efforts do nothing for the cause of human liberation. By bringing more pressure to bear on those who practise discrimination, they themselves merely exercise another form of discrimination. They are no better than those they attack.
The reason why these people become so aggressive when confronted by oppression, and why they are driven to attack it so vehemently, is because the seeds of discrimination reside within their own consciousnesses. Rather than acknowledge and overcome this discrimination at its source, within themselves, they choose instead to rail against the evils that they see reflected in the actions of others.
They are the true hypocrites rejected by the Christ. Jesus warned his followers:
“Judge not, that ye be not judged. For with what judgement ye judge, ye shall be judged: And with what measure ye mete, it shall be measured to you again. And why beholdest thou the mote that is in thy brother’s eye, but considerest not the beam that is in thine own eye?” (Matthew 7:1-3)
The danger of superimposing subjective shortcomings on others was also echoed by the Buddha.
“If a man sees the sins of others and forever thinks of their faults, his own sins increase for ever and far off is he from the end of his faults.”20
The world has reached a sorry state when the lieutenants of the Church stand in the vanguard of those who judge others, and who call for the retribution of society on those they condemn. While they claim to fight under the banner of Christ, they clearly feel little need to be bound by his words.
When Jesus walked the dusty plains of Galilee and Judea, the Jews were dominated by a foreign state that wielded absolute power and was absolutely ruthless in its suppression of all those who challenged it. The Jews had no “human rights” that were recognised by the Romans. They had no democratic vote through which to express their feelings.
Those who had the courage to defy the rule of imperial Rome were subjected to barbaric forms of torture and execution. Yet despite these harrowing social circumstances, Jesus did not lead marches, promote insurrection or defy temporal authority. Instead, he chose to attack the source of evil in the heart of man, rather than its outer manifestation of visible oppression.
In fact, on the one occasion recorded in the gospels when Jesus was confronted with the problem of state oppression, he used the opportunity to stress the need for personal reform, rather than indulge in the folly of social resistance.
“There were present at that season some that told him of the Galileans whose blood Pilate had mingled with their sacrifices. And Jesus answering said unto them, ‘Suppose ye that these Galileans were sinners above all Galileans, because they suffered these things? I tell you, nay; but unless ye repent, ye shall all likewise perish.” (Luke 13:2-3)
A large section of the Christian Church today honours Jesus in the breach, preferring instead to attack the outward appearances of evil. Thus, we see the growth of militant Christianity, supporting political movements that claim to be inspired by true Christian sentiments.
These advocates of “freedom” and “justice” are themselves the instigators of oppression. They are the false prophets whom Jesus warned about, “who come to you in sheep’s clothing, but inwardly are ravening wolves.” (Matthew 7:15)
The pulpits of the church resonate with calls for social action, insisting that the practice of Christianity has no virtue unless it champions the rights of all those who are afflicted, and strives for the creation of a just society on earth.
But when Jesus was brought before Pilate to account for his teachings, he replied, “My Kingdom is not of this world. If My Kingdom were of this world, then would My servants fight, that I should not be delivered to the Jews.” (John 18:36)
As the American naturalist and philosopher Henry David Thoreau wrote:
“There are a thousand hacking at the branches of evil, to one who is striking at the root, and it may be that he who bestows the largest amount of time and money on the needy is doing the most by his mode of life to produce that misery which he strives in vain to relieve.”21
The world stands tortured today by those who wish it well and do it ill. Thoreau saw very clearly the evil that lurks behind the mask of those who are inspired by the urge to do good to others.
“There is no odor”, he wrote in his epic essay Walden, “so bad as that which arises from goodness tainted. It is human, it is divine, carrion. If I knew for a certainty that a man was coming to my house with the conscious design of doing me good, I should run for my life”.22
Nisargadatta Maharaj agrees. “When you deceive yourself that you work for the good of all, it makes matters worse, for you should not be guided by your own ideas of what is good for others. A man who knows what is good for others is dangerous.”23
The problem of “doing good” is that it presupposes that one knows what is good for others. All too often this simply means compelling people to do what we think is best. But the problems we seek to alleviate are the evils of our own minds that are superimposed upon society.
Whatever action we take merely contributes to the problem. It does nothing to alter the underlying stain. “When you go to them with your desires and fears,” Maharaj points out, “you merely add to their sorrows. Be free first of suffering yourself and then only hope of helping others.”24
Not only have we fallen into the trap of believing that peace can be imposed upon the world, rather than springing forth naturally from the hearts of peaceful people, but we have become obsessed today with the idea of combating evil. We see evidence of evil on every side and we imagine that to overcome it we must automatically resist.
The fact that our well-meant efforts to assuage evil have led to an unparalleled explosion of evil across the face of this planet does not deter us. We believe that it is simply necessary to redouble our efforts. Guided by the gospel of Edmund Burke, we remain utterly convinced that if good men do nothing, evil will be certain to triumph. We feel compelled to act.
But the irony is that Burke’s axiom is entirely misrepresented. The “good men” who go to war in defence of peace are simply “evil men” masquerading in sheep’s clothing. The cause of peace and justice is not advanced by the actions of well-intentioned men and women who are ignorant of their own inner violence.
In truth, if these “good” men and women could only be persuaded to do nothing, it would not be evil that would triumph, but peace, harmony, goodness and virtue. The world cries out today for people to stop “doing good”.
The paradoxical truth that has been taught through the centuries by enlightened seers is that peace and justice are the fruits of “inaction”, not of action. The way to overcome evil is not by resisting it, but by not resisting it. We may liken evil to the roiling waters of a stormy lake.
When the waters of the lake are rough with turbulence, our efforts to suppress evil are like the legendary attempts of King Canute, who tried to beat the waves into submission. Every act of striking the water merely adds to its turbulence. We can never restore calm by beating the waves. However, if we do nothing, the waves will subside of their own accord.
As Lao Tse states in the Tao Te Ching, “Who is there who can make the muddy water clear? But if allowed to remain still, it will gradually become clear of itself.” 25
“It is the way of Heaven not to strive, and yet it knows how to overcome,”26
“Perfect virtue is inactive, having no need to act.”27
In counselling others, he entreated: “Practise inaction, occupy yourself with doing nothing. Practise inaction, and there is nothing that cannot be done. Leave all things to take their natural course, and do not interfere.”28
Lao Tse‘s compatriot Confucius also spoke of the virtues of inaction. “The wise take delight in water; Manhood-at-its-best delights in mountains. The wise are active; Manhood-at-its-best is quiet.”29
The “wise” man of today assesses a problem by means of intellect, and initiates actions that are designed to counteract the problem. The underlying difficulty, however, is that it is the mind of the “wise” man that is itself the problem, and therefore any course of action simply contaminates that situation.
The Sage, by contrast, does not initiate action as a result of deliberate thought. The Sage, being at one with all of creation, serves the deepest needs of creation by the mere resonance of Being, as we see from the following conversation.
Question: “How does the gnani (enlightened being) proceed when he needs something to be done? Does he make plans, decide about details and execute them?
Maharaj: “A gnani understands a situation fully and knows at once what needs to be done. That is all. The rest happens by itself, and to a large extent unconsciously. The gnani’s identity with all that is so complete, that as he responds to the universe, so does the universe respond to him. He is supremely confident that once a situation has been cognized, events will move in adequate response.
The ordinary man is personally concerned. He counts his risks and chances, while the gnani remains aloof, sure that all will happen as it must; and it does not matter much what happens, for ultimately the return to balance and harmony is inevitable. The heart of things is at peace.”30
Being rooted in Transcendent Peace the Sage’s actions automatically serve to restore this peace, even though there is no conscious effort to do so. The “inaction” spoken of by the Sage must not be thought of as idleness, nor is it the “absence of action”.
“Inaction”, as it is referred to in the Hindu classics, is action without motive. The Sage acts without the express intention of influencing affairs for the better. As we read in the Ashtavakra Gita:
“The mind of the freed Sage is unmarred by trouble or pleasure; it is inactive, static and desireless and also free from doubts. The mind of the Sage is free from effort whether meditating or acting. His actions and meditations are not prompted by personal motives.”31
As Krishnamurti was fond of saying, the mind of a liberated Sage is characterised by “effortless and choiceless awareness.”
The Sage does not seek to impose his will. In a world dominated by purpose and motivated by action, it may seem impossible to imagine action without a motive. Motiveless action, or inaction, is however the inevitable fruit of self-sacrifice. It was that sacrifice which allowed the Christ to say, “not my will be done, but thine be done.” (Luke 22: 42)
A person who has sacrificed his or her personal self becomes transformed within. It is a transformation that is charged with power. This inner transformation leads mysteriously, but naturally, to outer transformation, without the least effort or motivation to do so.
Whatever effort is consciously expended to induce peace or happiness in the world is bound to fail. Peace is not the reward of effort. It is the perfume that radiates from the mere presence of the flower of inaction. It is through “not acting” that this inner transformation occurs, and which leads inevitably to outer reform. As Maharaj advises:
“Let go your attachment to the unreal and the real will swiftly and smoothly step into its own. Stop imagining yourself being or doing this or that and the realization that you are the source and heart of all will dawn upon you. With this will come great love which is not choice or predilection, nor attachment, but a power which makes all things love-worthy and lovable.” 32
Ramana Maharshi warned that it was the discrimination between right and wrong that was the true origin of sin. “One’s own sin is reflected outside and the individual in ignorance superimposes it upon another. The best course for one is to reach the state in which such discrimination does not arise. Moreover, however much you may advise them, your hearers may not rectify themselves. Be in the right yourself and remain silent. Your silence will have more effect than your words or deeds.”33
Again, when asked the best way in which to work for world peace, the Maharshi replied:
“What is the world? What is peace and who is the worker? Peace is the absence of disturbance. The disturbance is due to the arising of thoughts in the individual, who is only the ego arising up from Pure Consciousness. To bring about peace means to be free from thoughts and to abide as Pure Consciousness. If one remains at peace oneself, there is peace all about.”34
Continued in Part Three
References:
15 “I Am That”, Conversations with Sri Nisargadatta Maharaj, translated by Maurice Frydman, Book I, Chetana, Bombay, 1973, p. 267.
16 Ibid, Book I, p. 282.
17“Talks with Sri Ramana Maharshi”, Recorded by Swami Saraswathi, Sri Ramanasramam, Tiruvannamalai, 1968, p. 241.
18 Paramahansa Yogananda, “Autobiography of a Yogi”, Self Realization Fellowship, Los Angeles, 1977, pp. 560-561.
19“I Am That”, Book I, op.cit., p. 148.
20“The Dhammapada”, op.cit., pp. 71-72.
21 Henry Thoreau, “Essays, Journals and Poems”, edited by Dean Flower, Fawcett, Greenwich, 1975, p. 233.
22 Ibid, p. 231.
23 “I Am That”, Book I, op.cit., p. 104.
24 Ibid, Book II, p. 22.
25“The Sayings of Lao Tzu”, op.cit., p. 33.
26 Ibid, pp. 24-25.
27 Ibid, p. 27.
28 Ibid, p. 35.
29“The Sayings of Confucius”, translated by James Ware, Mentor, New York, 1955, pp. 47-48.
30“I Am That”, Book II, op.cit., pp. 301-302.
31“Ashtavakra Gita”, translated by H.P. Shastri, Shanti Sadan, London, 1961, p. 44.
32“I Am That”, Book I, op.cit., pp. 3-4.
33“Talks with Sri Ramana Maharshi”, op.cit., p. 429.
34 Ibid, p. 428.
Allan, The Noose Around Our Necks, February 11, 2017, 1:23 pm
/cdn.vox-cdn.com/uploads/chorus_image/image/50132881/fethullah-gulen-75.0.jpg)
When the airport was officially dedicated on March 19, 1994, a capstone was placed inside the terminal building displaying a Masonic symbol above an inscription referring to the “New World Airport Commission”. But no one has yet been able to identify this organization, or say what it is or does.
Curious as to what the source of this phenomenon might happen to be, they approached the authorities. They were assured that this was nothing to worry about, because they were simply condensation trails which persisted in the sky as a result of fortuitous atmospheric weather conditions.
